Public Health Engineering Department,

Government of the Punjab

WATER SUPPLY PIPE LINE FROM KUDWALA TO BANNA

POST, CHOLISTAN DISTRICT BAHAWALPUR

PART ‐ II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bidding Documents
Nov 2016

EMINENCE ONE
Consultants
 WATER SUPPLY FROM KUDWALA TO BANNA POST, CHOLISTAN
(DISTRICT BAHAWALPUR)
EMINENCE ONE CONSULTANTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter No Description Page

PART – 1: SPECIAL PROVISIONS

SP – 1: Location of Project and Contract ........................................................... 1

SP – 2: Definition of Site ................................................................................... 1
SP – 3: Climatic Data ........................................................................................ 1
SP – 4: Groundwater ......................................................................................... 2
SP – 5: Geology ................................................................................................ 2
SP – 6: Description of the Works ...................................................................... 3
SP – 7: Drawings ............................................................................................... 3
SP – 8: Right to Change .................................................................................... 5
SP – 9: Drawings and Data Furnished by Contractor ....................................... 5
SP – 10: Cooperation with other Contractors ...................................................... 6
SP – 11: Quality of Materials ............................................................................... 6
SP – 12: Standards and Specifications ............................................................... 6
SP – 13: Inspection and Tests ............................................................................ 7
SP – 14: Contractor’s Camps .............................................................................. 7
SP – 15: Extent of Work ...................................................................................... 8
SP – 16: Phasing of Work ................................................................................... 8
SP – 17: Reporting and Mobile Phones .............................................................. 8

PART – 2: TUBEWELL WORKS

Chapter – 1: General ........................................................................................ S5 – 1

Chapter – 2: The Site ...................................................................................... S5 – 11
Chapter – 3: Materials ..................................................................................... S5 – 19
Chapter – 4: Installation of Tubewells ............................................................. S5 – 22
Chapter – 5: Concrete and Reinforcement Steel ............................................ S5 – 39
Chapter – 6: Mild Steel Casing Pipes .............................................................. S5 – 51

i
Chapter Nr Description Page

PART – 3: CIVIL, WATER SUPPLY, ELECTRICAL &

MECHANICAL WORKS

Chapter – 1: General ........................................................................................... 1 – 1

Chapter – 2: The Site ........................................................................................... 2 – 1
Chapter – 3: Excavation, Filling, Backfilling & Disposal .......................................3 – 1
Chapter – 4: Soling ...............................................................................................4 – 1
Chapter – 5: Form Work ........................................................................................5 – 1
Chapter – 6: Reinforcement ..................................................................................6 – 1
Chapter – 7: Plain and Reinforced Concrete ........................................................7 – 1
Chapter – 8: Structural Steel Works ......................................................................8 – 1
Chapter – 9: Brick Masonry ...................................................................................9 – 1
Chapter – 10: Carpentry and Joinery ...................................................................10 – 1
Chapter – 11: Glazing ........................................................................................... 11 - 1
Chapter – 12: Water Proofing & Built-Up Roofing ................................................ 12 - 1
Chapter – 13: Cement Plaster ..............................................................................13 – 1
Chapter – 14: Marble Work ..................................................................................14 – 1
Chapter – 15: Floor and Wall Finishes .................................................................15 – 1
Chapter – 16: Painting ..........................................................................................16 – 1
Chapter – 17: Damp Proof Course .......................................................................17 – 1
Chapter – 18: Terrazzo Flooring ..........................................................................18 – 1
Chapter – 19: Cement Concrete Flooring ............................................................19 – 1
Chapter – 20: Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling ...........................................20 – 1
Chapter – 21: Piping Works - General .................................................................21 – 1
Chapter – 22: Pressure Pipe Lines and Appurtenances ......................................22 – 1
Chapter – 23: Valves, Fittings and Appurtenances ..............................................23 – 1
Chapter – 24: Electrical Works .............................................................................24 – 1
Chapter – 25: Miscellaneous Items ......................................................................25 – 1
Chapter – 26: Clearing and Grubbing ...................................................................26 – 1
Chapter – 27: Pumps ...........................................................................................27 – 1

ii
 PART - 1

SPECIAL PROVISION
 (Part – 1)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS : SPECIAL PROVISIONS

INSTALLATION OF NEW TUBEWELLS

SP–1 Location of Project and Contract

The Project, “Water Supply Pipe Line from Kudwala to Banna Post Cholistan, District
Bahawalpur”, is located as shown in the Drawings.

SP–2 Definition of Site

2.1 The Site of the Works is defined as the area for installation of the tube wells at
Kudwala, laying of rising main and construction of IPS’s & LLR’s and other allied
works in Cholistan within the right-of-way lines, boundaries and limits shown on the
Drawings and such additional areas adjacent thereto as may be designated by the
Engineer from time to time for the construction to be performed under the Contract,
and all such areas and additional areas shall be comprised in the Site as defined in
Clause 1 of the Conditions of Contract.

2.2 Within the areas which may from time to time be defined as the Site, the Contractor
shall carry out and perform the construction of the Works and subject to the approval
of the Engineer, will be permitted to construct temporary roadways, camps, buildings
and Temporary Works, which he may require for the construction of camps or for any
other Contract purposes, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with
the owner thereof and shall pay, on his own cost, all rentals or other costs connected
therewith.

2.3 The Employer will give to the Contractor possession of as much of the area
designated and defined as the Site and shown on the drawings as may be required
to implement the Works, when the Engineer’s order to commence Works is issued.

SP–3 Climatic Data

The Project area has a hot tropical climate, the hottest months being June when
maximum temperatures can approach 49C. The coolest months are December to
February. Rainfall is erratic, but most likely in July and August. Rainfall ranges from
100 to 200 mm annually. The project area is subject to severe local storms, which

–1–
 may precipitate in excess of the average monthly rainfall in a matter of hours, and
disrupt Works and access on the Site.

SP–4 Groundwater

Ground water in the project area is saline and the only nearest source of sweet water
is the seepage water of the Desert Branch Canal. The groundwater level in Kudwala
adjacent to desert branch canal ranges from 20 to 30 feet.

SP–5 Geology

5.1 The site area at source comprises predominantly clay, fine sand, fine medium sand
and medium sand. Generally the upper layer is of clay with average depth of 10 ft.
then fine sand sand and deposits of fine medium and medium sands encountered.
The site area in Cholistan comprises predominantly sandy Silt and silty Sand
with average depth of 8 feet overlying thin layer of very stiff/hard silty/lean clay
overlying medium dense silty sand.

There is no appreciable cover of vegetation due to less precipitation in the

area.

5.2 All the tubewells are to be drilled in the soil or in the subsurface defined in SP-5.1.

5.3 The Employer does not guarantee the correctness of the designations of any material
described in this Clause nor any interpretations, deductions, or conclusion relative to
subsurface conditions. Each bidder and the Contractor must form his own opinion of
the character of the Work and of the materials to be excavated: he must make his
own interpretations, and satisfy himself by his own investigations and research
regarding all conditions affecting the Works to be done, Bidders and the Contractor
must assume all responsibility for deductions and conclusions as to the nature or
condition of the materials to be excavated and of doing other Work affected by the
geology at the Site of the Works.

SP–6 Description of the Works

6.1 The Works comprise the installation of fourteen (14) number tube wells for water
supply in the Cholistan area. The production tubewells are to be provided with
approximately 12 inch or 14 inch diameter steel Upper Well Casing (UWC) as pump
housing and 10 in dia brass well screens and mild steel casing Lower Well Casing
(LWC). Pilot tubewells shall be drilled at 4 in minimum diameter to prove the lithology

–2–
 and or depth to water at selected Sites. Some pilot tubewells will be airlift tested with
a temporary screen and others may have a permanent slim casing installed to make
an observation well. Some Sites may be abandoned on the basis of the pilot and no
production tubewells constructed.

Direct circulation air and air foam drilling methods are to be used in preference to any
drilling muds in pilot tubewells. In the event of muds being required in any tubewell,
degradable polymer muds shall be used in preference to bentonite based muds for
drilling the LWC. UWC may be drilled with bentonite muds. The Contractor shall
supply and use vicosifiers during mud drilling.

6.2 These 14 No tubewells for Cholistan area will provide water to 10 locations in
cholistan. The water supply pipeline from Kudwala to Banna Post which form the
subject of this Contract will consist of:
Sr. No. Item Qty
1 Source Investigations 14 No
2 Tube wells boring and conversion 14 No
3 Interconnection of Tube wells (6 to 12 inch
01 Job
dia)
4 Pump House (12’ x 12’) 14 No
5 Electrification, pumps and diesel generator 01 Job
6 Rising Main
“B” Class (6 to 12 inch) length = 201,600 ft 251,300 Ft
“C” Class (4,8 &10 inch) length = 49,700 ft
7 Ground Storage Tanks (200,000 Gallons) 02 No
8 Generator room with other allied works 01 job
9 Low Level Reservoirs (LLRs) with other
10 No
allied works
10 Operator Rooms at LLRs 10 No
11 Staff quarter at tube well source 03 No
12 Control Room & Monitoring Center 02 No
13 Shed for Animals 10 No
14 Shed on Troughs 10 No
15 Toyota Hilux ( 4 x4) 02 No

Honda CG 125 10 No
16 Tractor Trolley with water Bowsers 03 No
17 Boundary wall with gate around IPS 02 No

–3–
SP–7 Drawings

7.1 The Drawings, issued with the Bid Documents and listed in Drawing Section, show
the Scope of the Works (SOW) to be performed by the Contractor. The Bid Drawings
shall not be used as a basis for construction but may be used as a basis for placing
preliminary orders for materials, subject to corrections based on the future issue of
Drawings as provided under Sub-clause (2) hereof.

7.2 After award of Contract, the Bid Drawings will be replaced by Drawings issued for
construction including supplements to the Specification as may be necessary. The
Drawings issued for construction will include re-issued Bid Drawings, Bid Drawings
as may be modified, and additional Drawings as required to develop the Works in
greater detail. Further modifications will be made as necessary to detail the
construction requirements. The Drawings issued for construction that show changes
from the Bid Drawings and Specification will be reviewed by the Contractor for his
quotation for adjustments (if any) of the Contract Price in accordance with the
provision of Clause 51 “Variations”, of the Conditions of Contract. The Works shall be
executed in conformity with the Drawings issued for construction.

7.3 The Contractor shall check all Drawings issued for construction carefully as soon as
practicable after receipt hereof, and shall promptly bring to the notice of the Engineer
any errors which are discovered.

During the course of the Contract, information will be given by the Engineer in
respect of individual structures to be constructed in accordance with issued Drawings
which show typical structures of the same form. It shall be the Contractor’s own
responsibility to prepare from this information such Working Drawings as he may
require for the proper setting out and construction of such structures. Work shall not
commence on an individual structure until the relevant Working Drawings have been
approved by the Engineer.

7.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of all record or “as built”
Drawings as the Work proceeds. These drawings shall be for the permanent record
of the Employer and shall be in the form of a black-line reproducible film negative
together with 5 prints for each drawing produced, and in digital format in AutoCAD
files. The quality and format of these drawings shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The issue of Certificate of Completion for the whole or a section of the
Works, in accordance with the Conditions of Contract Clause 48, shall be conditional
upon the Contractor having completed for the said Works a complete draft set of the

–4–
 record drawings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Thereafter the Contractor shall
submit the completed drawings in hardcopy and in electronic copy (AutoCAD files) in
accordance with this Clause not later than two months after the issue of the
Certificate of Completion.

SP–8 Right to Change

When additional information regarding the geological formations, or other conditions

becomes available as a result of excavation, testing, model studies, or exploratory
Work, the Engineer may find it desirable to change dimensions, nominal duties of
pumping equipment, or design of one or more of the features of the Works to
conform to the newly observed conditions and due these conditions, the Engineer
reserves the right to make any such reasonable changes, and the Contractor’s
Equipment shall be deployed and his operations shall be conducted so as to
accommodate any such reasonable changes in the Works with no increase in cost to
the Employer.

SP–9 Drawings and Data Furnished by Contractor

Whenever required by the Specifications of the Drawings and for all materials or
Plant to be fabricated, manufactured and furnished by the Contractor for the Works,
the Contractor shall make assembly and detailed Shop Drawings as required before
proceeding with the Work. All such drawings shall be adequately and properly
checked before submittal to the Engineer for approval and shall be so designated. All
unchecked drawings received by the Engineer for approval will be “Returned for
Correction”. Four copies of such drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer in the
form of prints from the original checked drawings. One print of each of these
drawings will be returned to the Contractor by the Engineer, marked “Approved”,
“Approved Except as Noted” or “Returned for Correction”. The notes “Approved” or
“Approved Except as Noted” will authorize the Contractor to proceed with the
fabrication and manufacture of the Plant covered by such drawings, subject to the
corrections, if any, noted thereon. When prints of drawings have been marked
“Returned for Correction”, the Contractor shall make the necessary revisions on the
Drawings and shall, within 30 days, submit prints for approval in the same manner as
before and any delay in submittal will be on risk and cost of the Contractor.

Any fabrication or manufacturing undertaken during or before the approval of the

drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk. The Engineer shall have the right to require
the Contractor to make any changes in the design which may be necessary, in the

–5–
 opinion of the Engineer, to make the materials or Plant conform to the requirements
and intent of the Specifications without additional cost to the Employer. Approval of
the Contractor’s drawings shall not be held to relieve the Contractor of any part of his
obligation to meet all of the requirements of the Specification or the responsibility for
the correctness of his drawings. At the time of delivery of the Plant or materials, the
Contractor, if requested and CD of AutoCAD files to do so, shall furnish to the
Engineer two complete sets of reproducible negatives of all final approved Drawings.

SP–11 Quality of Materials

11.1 All materials, fixtures, fittings and supplies furnished under the Contract shall be new
and unused, of standard first-grade quality and of the best Workmanship and design.
No inferior or low grade materials, supplies or articles will be either approved or
accepted, and all Work of assembly and construction shall be done in a first class
and professional manner. In asking for prices of materials intended for delivery to the
Site and incorporation in the Works under any portion of the Specifications, the
Contractor shall provide the manufacturer or supplier with complete information as
may be necessary to secure compliance with this Clause and, in every case he shall
quote this Clause in full to each such manufacturer or supplier.

11.2 Prior to procurement, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, for his approval,
the names of the manufacturers of all Equipment and materials which he
contemplates incorporating in the Works. With this information the Contractor shall
also furnish such pertinent information as to capacities, efficiencies and sizes, and
such other information as may be required by the Engineer. Samples of materials
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval when so directed. Equipment,
materials, supplies and articles installed or used without the Engineer’s approval
shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection and no payment or time shall be awarded
to the Contractor.

SP–12 Standards and Specifications

12.1 Except where otherwise specified all materials and Workmanship shall conform with
the requirements of the relevant British Standards and British Standard Codes of
Practice (hereinafter referred to as BS or CP) issued by the British Standards
Institution current on 1st January, 2006. Other equivalent National or International
Standard Specifications may be substituted at the sole discretion of the Engineer or
as may have been agreed in the Contract.

–6–
 Where relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice now quote metric units only,
these are to be interpreted as required to the nearest equivalent imperial (foot/pound)
unit for the purposes of this Contract.

All materials and Workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by an approved
Standard shall be of such a kind as is used in first class Work and suitable to the
climate in the Project Area.

12.2 If the Contractor, at any time and for any reason, wishes to deviate from the above
standards or desires to use material or Plant not covered by the above standards, he
shall state the exact nature of the changes, the reason for making the change and
shall submit complete Specifications of the material and Plant to the Engineer for
approval.

SP–13 Inspection and Tests

All Plant and materials furnished under the Specification and all Works performed in
connection therewith will be subject to rigid inspection by the Engineer or his
authorized agent. Inspection at the manufacturer’s plant will be made to determine
that the Plant and materials meet the requirements of the Specifications.

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 15 days in advance (or 30 days
in the case of inspection to be carried out abroad) of the date and place that the Plant
or materials will be available for inspection. No equipment or material shall be
transported until inspection at the manufacturer’s plant has been made and final
drawings have been furnished by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer.
Acceptance of equipment and materials or the waiving of inspection thereof shall in
no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing equipment and
materials meeting the requirements of the Contract.

SP–14 Contractor’s Camps

14.1 The Contractor shall provide such camps as are required for the proper and efficient
progress of the Works to house his own employees and to provide such Site office
facilities for the use of the Engineer and Employer as specified elsewhere in the
Specifications. The Contractor’s camps shall be included within his Temporary
Works.

14.2 The Contractor’s camps shall comply with the rules of the Government of the Punjab
Labour Camp Rules.

–7–
SP–15 Extent of Works

15.1 The Contractor shall Conduct Source Investigations, Tube wells boring and
conversion, Interconnection of Tube wells, Pump House, Electrification, pumps and
diesel generator, Rising Main, Ground Storage Tanks, Generator room with other
allied works, Low Level Reservoirs (LLRs) with other allied works, Operator Rooms
at LLRs, Staff quarter at tube well source, Control Room & Monitoring Center, Shed
for Animals, Shed on Troughs, Toyota Hilux ( 4 x4), Honda CG 125, Tractor Trolley
with water Bowsers and Boundary wall with gate around IPS in Kudwala and
Cholistan areas as shown on the Drawings in strict compliance with the
Specifications. The Contractor shall do all the Work required for the completion of the
Works as specified in the Contract.

15.2 The Contractor shall procure, furnish, provide and arrange for all the necessary
electric power, water and services; be responsible for the construction and
maintenance of the necessary construction camps, offices and warehouses; and
perform all other Work necessary for completion of the Works described herein strict
conformity with these Specifications.

SP–16 Phasing of Work

16.1 For the installation of tube wells the Contractor shall observe the sequence of Works
directed by the Engineer, as well as according to the approved Baseline Schedule in
the Contract or to any other modified schedule of Works.

SP–17 Reporting and Mobile Phones

As part of the Works, the Contractor shall produce regular report as provided for in
the Technical Specifications. In addition the Contractor shall provide his senior
representative at each active drilling Site with a mobile telephone.

–8–
 PART - 2

TUBEWELL WORKS
 Chapter – 1

GENERAL

1.1 Purpose and Location of the Works

The purpose of the Project is to provide water supply to the Cholistan area by
installing fourteen (14) No new tube wells at Kudwala, laying rising main and
constructing IPS’s & LLR and other allied works in Cholistan area.

1.2 Description of the Works

The scope of this Contract comprises of:

Sr. No. Item Qty

1 Source Investigations 14 No
2 Tube wells boring and conversion 14 No
3 Interconnection of Tube wells (6 to 12 inch
01 Job
dia)
4 Pump House (12’ x 12’) 14 No
5 Electrification, pumps and diesel generator 01 Job
6 Rising Main
“B” Class (6 to 12 inch) length = 201,600 ft 251,300 Ft
“C” Class (4,8 &10 inch) length = 49,700 ft
7 Ground Storage Tanks (200,000 Gallons) 02 No
8 Generator room with other allied works 01 job
9 Low Level Reservoirs (LLRs) with other
10 No
allied works
10 Operator Rooms at LLRs 10 No
11 Staff quarter at tube well source 03 No
12 Control Room & Monitoring Center 02 No
13 Shed for Animals 10 No
14 Shed on Troughs 10 No
15 Toyota Hilux ( 4 x4) 02 No

Honda CG 125 10 No
16 Tractor Trolley with water Bowsers 03 No
17 Boundary wall with gate around IPS 02 No

S5 – 1
1.3 Mobilization for Construction

The Scope of Works to be done under “Mobilization for Construction of Works” shall
consist of the following items:

(a) shipment of Contractor’s Equipment to the Site;

(b) mobilization of Contractor’s personnel and labour at the Site;
(c) provision of camps in compliance with the requirements of Clause SP.14;
(d) provision of such administrative and field offices as the Contractor considers
necessary for his organization;
(e) provision of Workshops, warehouses, sheds and storage yards required by
the Contractor for the proper and sufficient execution of the Works;
(f) arrangement for supply of water for use in construction, including installation
of necessary wells, pumps, pipes, storage tanks, and suitable arrangements
for the delivery of water at various points of requirement; and
(g) provision of such roads as may be deemed necessary by the Contractor for
the proper execution of the Works.

1.4 Duty of Employer

The Employer will be responsible for the design of the Permanent Works and award
of other Contract associated with the Works.

1.5 Standards and Codes

Except where otherwise specified plant materials and Workmanship shall comply
with the requirements of the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice
(hereinafter referred to as BS or CP) issued by the British Standards Institution, ISO
and Amercian Standards. Other authoritative, who ensure an equal or higher quality
than the standards and codes specified subject to the Engineer’s prior review and
written approval. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed
alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor
desires the engineer’s approval In the event the Engineer determines that such
proposed deviations do not ensure equal or higher quality, the Contractor shall
comply with the standards specified in the Bid Documents.

All Standards used will be the current version as available on 1st January 2007. A
Contractor proposing to use alternative of specified Standards and Codes shall

S5 – 2
 submit the alternative version to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the
requirements outlined in the above paragraph.

The Contractor shall obtain at least one copy of each approved standard and
reference Work which is referred to in the Specification, and of each other standard
which applies to materials which are being supplied to, or Workmanship executed on,
the Works. These Standards and Reference Works shall be supplied to the Engineer
within 90 days of the Engineer’s Order to commence the Works and will also be
available to the Contractor at all reasonable times.

All materials and Workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by an approved
standard shall be of such kind as is used in first class Work and suitable to the
climate in the Project Area. Where, the requirements of any such standard
specification or regulation conflict with the requirements of the specification or any
item on the Drawings, then the Contractor should refer to the Engineer for
clarification before proceeding with that section of the Works.

1.6 Drawings

Drawings which form part of the Contract are included in the Volume of the Contract
Documents.

1.7 Record Drawings

Within 28 days of the issue of a Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall

provide Record Drawings in black line on transparent film and in AutoCAD format in
CD. These Drawings shall include:

(a) General arrangement drawings of the Permanent Works.

(b) Project Components drawings shall be drawn to a horizontal scale of 1:1250
or 1:500 and vertical 1:200 or 1:100.

The title block shall be that of the Engineer responsible for the supervision.

The Employer will supply one velograph copy of the issued drawings, which the
Contractor may use to prepare the Records Drawings.

S5 – 3
1.9 Programme

Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall, in accordance with Clause 14 of
the Conditions of Contract, submit to the Engineer for his approval a programme
showing the order in which he proposes to carry out the Works. The programme shall
be in the form of a bar chart, or any other form as may be agreed by the Engineer,
and shall clearly indicate the followings:

(a) The sequence of each activity, the proposed start and completion dates of
each activity, the rate of progress and the cumulative quantity or percentage
of Work expected to be achieved on each activity by the end of each month.
(b) Dates by which major drawings requiring the Engineer’s approval will be
submitted. A period of three weeks shall be allowed from the date of receipt of
these drawings for such approval.
(c) The time allocated for Work by others, including those of the Employer and by
utility undertakings:

Sufficient space should be provided in the programme for recording the actual
progress against the programmed progress for each activity.

The programme shall be submitted with details of the followings:

(i) Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) of Resource and Activities.

(ii) A statement giving the numbers and categories of supervisory and technical
staff and skilled and unskilled Workers to be employed on the Works.
(iii) A list and type details of major Constructional Plant (including vehicles), which
the Contractor proposes to employ on the Works.
(iv) Details of the Contractor’s methods of Working for all operations.
(v) A statement giving the proposals for location or locations and sizes of base
camps, accommodation, offices, Workshops and stores.
(vi) Details of the programme for the Works from the date of receipt of the
Engineer’s order to commence the Works including a complete resource
allocation showing the number of units and allotted times for each unit of
Constructional Plant, materials and labour allocated to each part of the
Works.
(vii) Details of Contractors proposals for Work affecting private property and the
dates during which the relevant Work will be undertaken.

The Contractor shall make due allowance in his programme for the provision of any
temporary diversions of roads and existing channels which may be necessary.

S5 – 4
1.10 Meetings and Reports

Representatives of the Contractor, approved by the Engineer, shall attend monthly

progress meetings on Site or at the offices of the Employer. In addition, approved
representatives of the Contractor shall attend further meetings in cases of
emergencies or for other reasons when called upon by the Employer.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Daily, Bi-week, and a Monthly Reports
on his progress in the performance of the Contract. The Monthly Report shall include
a copy of the approved programme with the current progress for each activity shown.

1.11 Temporary Works

Not less than 14 days before commencing any portion of the Works, the Contractor
shall if ordered; submit to the Engineer for his approval complete drawings and
calculations for all Temporary Works which the Contractor may propose for the
construction of that part of the Works.

Notwithstanding approval by the Engineer of any design for the Temporary Works,
the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for their efficiency, security and
maintenance and for all obligations and risks in regard to such Temporary Works
specified or implied in the Contract.

1.12 Water and Electricity Supply

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water and
electricity for the purposes of the Works.
Water and wastewater derived from the construction, testing and completion of the
Works shall be disposed of clear of the Site to the satisfaction of the Engineer so as
to cause no damage or complaint.

1.13 Latrines

Throughout the period of construction of the Works the Contractor shall provide,
maintain and cleanse suitable and sufficient latrines for use by his employees; he
shall ensure that his employees do not foul the Site but make proper use of the
latrines.

Where practicable the latrines shall be connected to the nearest sewer, or if this is
not practicable the Contractor shall provide an adequately sized septic tank and soak
away.

S5 – 5
1.14 Camps and Accommodation

The Contractor shall construct and maintain a camp to provide living accommodation
for his staff and operatives. The location of the Contractor’s camp shall be to the
Engineer’s approval.

The Contractor shall be responsible for and provide all services to the living quarters
and shall see to it that all sanitary laws and other laws and regulations in force in the
area are completed with. The Contractor shall be responsible for and provide all
necessary fencing and security to these areas.

1.15 Photographs

The Contractor shall supply digital pictures on CDs and uncounted color positive
prints not less than 250 x 200 mm of such portions of the Works, in progress and
completed, as may be directed by the Engineer and specified herein. The photograph
shall be the property of the Employer and shall be delivered to the Engineer with the
color prints. No prints of these photographs shall be supplied to any other person
without the written permission of the Engineer.

If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply transparencies and colour
prints.

The photographs shall be of two categories:

(a) Progress Photographs.

(b) Record photographs.
(c) Video Pictures of all major activities and Meetings.

Both categories of photographs shall be properly referenced to the approval of the

Engineer, and on the front and back of each print shall be recorded the date of the
photograph, the direction in which the camera was facing, an identifying description
of the subject and the reference.

Photographs taken for record purposes as ordered by the Engineer or as specified

herein shall be supplied with three prints, having the reverse of one subscribed with
the signatures of the Contractor and the Engineer (or their authorized
representatives) for the purpose of attestation. If required, the Contractor may at his
own expense having an additional print similarly attested for his retention.

S5 – 6
 The Contractor shall supply three prints of each progress photograph ordered by the

Engineer. He shall supply two additional prints of progress photographs selected by

the Engineer for incorporation in albums. He shall supply two sets of albums, mount

the prints, and title the prints and albums all to the approval of the Engineer.

The taking of photographs of the Works by the Contractor for any other purpose
whether for use in Punjab or Pakistan shall not be carried out without written
approval from the Engineer.

1.16 Contamination of Water Supplies

Before any person is engaged on Work involving a risk to the purity of potable water
supplies or deemed to involve such a risk by the Engineer, he shall be tested to
indicate that he is not a carrier of typhoid or other water-borne disease and he shall
be informed of the dangers of contamination. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
of any person who has been certified by a doctor as suffering from an illness
associated with the looseness of the bowls, and no such person shall be employed
on such Work until the employer’s medical advisor is satisfied that it is safe for him to
be so employed.

1.17 Climatic Data

The Contractor shall take account of the climatic conditions at the Site of the Works
both in the design of all plant and equipment, and the construction of the Works.

The following information is provided as a guide to the climatic conditions likely to be

encountered on the Site to assist the Contractor in ensuring that the Works are
adequate to withstand the effects of the weather, but this shall not relieve him of his
responsibility under Clause 11 of the General Conditions of Contract.

(a) Monthly average temperatures:

- Maximum 39 degree C
- Minimum 16 degree C

(b) Extreme Temperatures

- 49 degree C in June
- 2 degree C January

(c) Annual Average Rainfall:

S5 – 7
 100 to 200 mm is Average Annual Rainfall per year the majority falling in the
monsoon months of July and August. On average there are 10 rainy days per
year.

(d) Cholistan is relatively low humid area

The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of the above climatic data,
which are based on limited records.
1.18 Level

The Contractor shall provide levels for the ground level, finished casing level and
pump house floor to a system of bench marks previously established in the area in
connection with the Project. For the purpose of this Contract, the datum to be used
shall be a bench mark for which the Engineer will ascribe a value prior to the
commencement of the Works.

1.19 Units of Measurement

All designs, drawings, specifications and manuals shall use FPS units and all
measurements dimensions and performance data shall be quoted in those units.

1.20 Languages

All drawings, instructions, signs, notices, nameplates, etc for use in the operation and
maintenance of the completed Works shall be in English.

Warning signs shall be in Urdu and English.

1.21 Contract Signboard

The Contractor shall supply and erect one or more Contract signboards at locations
to be specified by the Engineer. The signboards shall be of substantial construction
to the approval of the Engineer and the lettering in both English and Urdu shall be
black on a white background. The layout and dimensions of the signboards shall be
in accordance with the relevant Standard Drawing.

1.22 Advertising

The Contractor shall not use any part of the Site for any form of advertising without
the prior written approval of the Engineer.

S5 – 8
1.23 Safety Regulations on Site

The Contractor shall comply with all statutory and other regulations concerning the
safety and security of his Site staff, operatives, staff of the Employer and Engineer
and members of the Public, as a result of his operations. He shall obtain copies of all
the relevant regulations and shall make them available on Site for inspection by the
Engineer.

1.24 Protection of Existing Installation

The Contractor shall execute the Works in such a manner as to avoid interruption
and interference with the operation of the existing construction activities, to minimize
disturbance to those living or occupying properties near the Work and to all existing
services within and adjacent to existing facilities. Access to the existing facilities shall
be maintained, to the satisfaction of the Engineer at all times.

The Contractor shall apply to the Engineer in writing at least 28 days before starting
any Work which involves interference with the existing structures, equipment, etc or
otherwise interfere with or interrupt the Employer’s normal construction activities. The
Contractor shall not execute such Work until he has received permission to proceed
in writing from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure that no earth, debris or any type of waste material on
public or private roads or rights of way as a result of the Works and all vehicles
leaving the Site shall be cleaned accordingly.

1.25 Protection of Existing Public and Private Services

The Contractor shall notify all public authorities, utility companies and private owners
of proposed Works, which will affect then not less than one week before commending
the Works.

The Contractor shall adequately protect, uphold, maintain and prevent damage to all
services and shall not interfere with their operation without the prior consent of the
public authorities, utility companies, private owners, or the Engineer as appropriate.

If any damage to services results from the execution of the Works, the Contractor
shall immediately:

(i) Notify the Engineer and appropriate public authority, utility company or private
owner.

S5 – 9
 (ii) Make arrangements for the damage to be made good without delay to the
satisfaction of the public authorities, company or private owner as
appropriate. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs for making good such
damage.

The Engineer may issue instructions or make other such arrangements as he deems
necessary, to repair rapidly and essential services damaged during the execution of
the Contract, such arrangement shall not affect any liability to pay for making good
the damage, and Contractor shall pay all costs due to this damage.

1.26 Permits

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for obtaining all necessary permits, Licence
and permissions required for the execution of the Works, prior to the commencement
of the Works.

1.27 Location of the Tubewells Sites

The location of Tube Wells will be as shown on the plans. With the approval of the
Engineer, the position of the proposed Tube Wells may be reviewed within the
boundaries of the Project Site.

1.28 Notice of Operations

The Contractor shall give full and complete notice of all important operations to the
Engineer.

1.29 Sampling

The Contractor shall provide for the approval of the Engineer samples of all the
construction materials and manufactured items required for the Permanent Works, if
ordered. All samples rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the Site. All
approved items shall be stored on the Site by the Contractor for the duration of the
Contract under conditions which will prevent deterioration of the approved sample.
Any material or manufactured item subsequently delivered to the Site for
incorporation in the Permanent Works shall be at least equal to the approved
sample.

1.30 Responsibility for Sampling and Testing

It will be in financial and otherwise the responsibility of the Contractor to collect

sampling, testing and the costs thereof under the terms of the Condition of Contract.

S5 – 10
 Chapter – 2

THE SITE

2.1 Site

The Site pertaining to this Contract shall include only the areas required for different
package components like Pump House, Staff Quarters, Rising Mains, Intermediate
Pumping Stations, Low Level Reservoirs and the Contractor’s Working Area adjacent
to Site, within or outside the Cholistan area. The Contractor shall not use the Site for
any purpose not required by the Contract.

The Contactor’s Working Area as required, shall be formed adjacent to the package
Components. The Contractor shall at all time confine his Working operations to within
that Working Area identified and the general movement of the Contractor’s
Equipment to within the aforementioned boundaries. The Contractor shall at no time
restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The use of the area within the Site boundaries shall be governed by the conditions
set out in this chapter. Any Works conducted outside the boundary shall be governed
by these conditions as well as the additional conditions set out in Clause 2.02 of this
Specification.

2.2 Areas outside the Site

It is the Contractors responsibility to make provision for all Working areas, in addition
to the area defined above, all “accommodation” required by him as defined in this
Specification.

For the purposes of this Clause, “accommodation” shall be deemed to include

housing, offices, Workshops, warehouses, and storage areas.

In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or
additional accommodation required by him or any tip for the disposal of surplus
materials, or any borrow pit or quarry, he shall obtain the written consent of the
owner, occupier or authority having charge of the land in which such wayleave,
accommodation or tip is situated and shall make a record agreed by the owner,
occupier or authority as aforesaid of the condition of the surface of that land before
entering thereon.

S5 – 11
 The Contractor shall permit the Employer and the Engineer and any person
authorized by the Employer or the Engineer access for the purposes of the Contract
to any such special or temporary wayleave or additional accommodation.

In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or
additional accommodation make available to him for the purpose of the Contract, the
land in which such wayleave or accommodation is situated shall be deemed to be
part of the Site as defined in Clause 2.01 hereof.

Under these circumstances the Contractor shall form a Working Area incorporating
the special or temporary wayleave or additional accommodation. The Contractor
shall at all times confine his activities to within this Working Area. The Contractor
shall at no time restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. On completion of the Works in this area, the Contractor shall reinstate the
area to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.3 Use of Land for Construction Facilities

Land controlled by the Employer for the purpose of the Works will be made available
for field offices, construction equipment, storage yards, and other facilities required
for construction operations under the contract.

The location, construction, maintenance, operation and removal of the Contractor’s

construction facilities on government land shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

In the event of land controlled by the Employer and made available to the Contractor
is insufficient for the Contractor’s needs, then the Contractor shall, in accordance
with Clause SP-02 make all necessary additional arrangements.

2.4 Use of Public Highways

The Contractor shall ensure that roads and thoroughfares used by him in any way
are not dirtied as a result of such use and in the event of their becoming thus dirtied
in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to clean
them, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall at no time restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

S5 – 12
 The Contractor shall obtain all permits required for carrying out the Works on public
roads and shall liaise with the appropriate authorities with regard to the timing and
execution of the road Works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining temporary road
diversions for the duration of the road Works. The road shall be kept open at tall
times during the road Works period, and the Work shall be carried out in such a
manner as to minimize the disruption to traffic.

2.5 Access across the Site

The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed by the Engineer of the condition of
the surfaces of any private lands or of any public cultivated or maintained lands over
which access to the Site lies before any Work is commenced to make them suitable
for access and he shall keep such surfaces in a reasonable state of cleanliness and
repair during the execution of the Works. On the termination of the Contractor’s use
of such access he shall restore the surfaces to a condition at least equal to that
existing before his first entry on them.

The Contractor shall not first entry any part of the Site in private lands without the
prior permission of the Engineer and without first having obtained the consent of the
owner of such lands.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times, vehicular and pedestrian
access to all properties, private and public, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and no
impede access to any properties.

2.6 Maintenance of Existing Roads within the Site

The Contractor shall not run tracked or unstrung vehicles on surfaced roads without
the written approval of the Engineer who may require that planking or some other
protective material be used to protect the road surface.

2.7 Clearance of the Site

The Contractor shall clear the Site to the extent required by the Engineer for
checking the setting-out. Clearance of the Site shall also include the demolition and
removal of all articles, objects and obstructions which are expressly required to be
cleared. The Contractor shall not clear the Site of any structure without the prior
written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that the parts of the

S5 – 13
 Site to be occupied by the Permanent Works are clear, and shall maintain the
remainder of the Site as may be required for access and Temporary Works areas.

The Contractor shall remove the material arising from such clearance and dispose of
it in a manner and at a location, on or off the Site, to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall fill and make good with appropriate materials those cavities and
losses of soil which result from clearing the parts of the Site not subsequently to be
occupied by the Permanent Works.

2.8 Condition of Site

The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a clean, tidy and healthy conditions for the
whole of such time as he is responsible for the care of the Works.

The Works shall be kept in a dry state and any water entering the Works from any
source shall be collected and discharged in a safe manner approved by the
Engineer.

2.9 Reinstatement of the Site

On successful completion of each package component, the Contractor shall clear all
temporary access roads, fill and make good with appropriate materials all areas
disturbed during the Works and reinstate the roads, footpaths and other areas to their
original condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.10 Site Records

The Contractor shall make records of the position and extent in the excavations of
every type of service, stratum and obstruction encountered during the construction of
the Works, including samples taken and results of tests on such samples.

2.11 Access for the Employer and Engineer

The Contractor shall permit the Employer and the Engineer and any person
authorized by the Employer or the Engineer including Workmen of the Employer,
other Contractors or utility undertakings access for the purposes of the Contract to all
areas of the Site and to any additional accommodation or temporary wayleaves for
the duration of the Contract period.

S5 – 14
2.12 Access to the Works

Before the commencement of any part of the Works, the Contractor shall make
temporary access tracks including all necessary temporary diversions and bridge
Works to the part of the Site concerned, both for the Contractor’s own access and for
the maintenance of public access, all to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall maintain such access tracks in a condition suitable for safe and easy passage
of the Equipment, vehicles, and pedestrians until these tracks are no longer required
for the purposes of the Contract. Such access may be by other Contractors
employed upon the Project.

The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed by the Engineer of the condition of
the surfaces of any private lands or any public cultivated or maintained lands which
access for the Site lies before use for access and shall keep such surfaces in a
reasonable state of cleanliness and repair during the execution of the Works. On the
termination of the Contractor’s use of such access he shall restore the surfaces in
actual conditions.

2.13 Haul Routes

The operations of the Contractor on haul routes shall be in accordance with the
General Conditions. The hauling of materials and other intra-job hauling and
transportation over public highways, roads and bridges shall be in compliance with
local regulations. Where haul routes cross public highways or roads, the Contractor
shall provide barricades, flagmen and other necessary precautions for safety.

2.14 Site Operations

2.14.1 General

The Site may be located through and adjacent to tracts of improved property. Where
access to the Works is adjacent to, cross, or disturbed improvement such as
gardens, trees, irrigation and drainage facilities, crops and cultivated fields, the
Contractor shall conduct his operations so as to minimize disturbance to or
destruction of improvements, crops or property and to interfere as little as possible
with the operation of cultivators.

2.14.2 Restoration of Disturbed Land

The Contractor shall be responsible for restoration, to the satisfaction of the

Engineer, the surface of all lands disturbed by the Work to a condition at least equal
to that obtaining before his first entry on them.

S5 – 15
2.15 Utilities, Transmission and Telephone Lines

The Employer is responsible to provide information on locations of utility,

transmission and telephone lines to the Contractor at time of tendering. The
Contractor shall exercise due care during construction to ensure that no damage is
done to such lines. The Employer is responsible for providing the reference data
required for buried utility locations. The Employer will indemnify the Contractor
against all the claims for damages and the costs of repairs to the utility, transmission
and telephone lines arising out of the Contractor’s operation, excluding any claims
arising from willful damage or negligence by the Contractor.

2.16 Grazing Livestock

The Contractor shall provide reasonable care by hiring watchmen to ensure that
livestock are not allowed within the construction right of way during operations but he
will not be responsible under this contract for any damages, injury or death of
livestock resulting from the construction operations.

Fences and walls which must be crossed and which were in good condition
beforehand shall be repaired by the Contractor, if asked to do so by the Engineer. If
there are animals in the field the fences must be reconstructed immediately after
crossing.

2.17 Safety

High standards of safety for men and machines must be observed at all times as per
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards. Contractors shall
comply with existing Pakistani laws. Moving parts of the machines shall be protected
by proper guards. Casual observers shall not be permitted close to excavating
operations.

2.18 Disposal of Waste Material

2.18.1 General

Waste material including, but not restricted to, refuse, garbage, sanitary wastes,
industrial wastes, and oil and other petroleum products shall be disposed of by the
Contractor. Disposal of waste materials shall be by burying, where burial of such
materials is approved by the Engineer; by burning, where burning of such materials is
permitted in accordance with local laws; or by removal from the construction area to
a disposal are approved by the relevant local authority.

S5 – 16
2.18.2 Disposal of Material by Burning

All materials to be burned shall be piled in designated burning areas in such a

manner as will cause the least fire hazard. Burning shall be thorough and complete
and all charred pieces remaining after burning, except for scattered small pieces,
shall be removed from the construction area and disposed of. The Contractor shall,
at all times, take special precaution to prevent fire from spreading beyond the piles
being burned and shall be liable for any damage by his burning operations.

2.18.3 Disposal of Material by Removal

Disposal of material by removal from the construction area be accomplished prior to

the completion of any Section of the Works. All materials removed except trees, shall
become the property of the Contractor. Materials to be disposed of by dumping shall
be hauled to an approved dump. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
make any necessary arrangements.

2.18.4 Trees

Trees and bushes cleared from the construction area shall be placed at the edge of
the construction area or right of way. The use and disposal of the wood be arranged
by the Employer. Where large trees are to be removed, then the Engineer will
determine how the trees are to be cut and removed and at the same time try not to
impede the progress of the Works. All trees, trees roots and bush not required by the
Employer will be burned or removed from the construction area at the Contractor’s
expense.

2.19 Landscape Preservation

The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and shall
conduct his construction operation so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction,
scarring, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the Work.

2.20 Prevention of Water Contamination

The Contractor shall comply with applicable regulations concerning the control and
abatement of water contamination.

The Contractor’s construction activities shall be performed by methods that will

prevent entrance, or accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, debris and
other objectionable pollutants and wastes into flowing streams, flowing or dry water

S5 – 17
 courses, lakes and underground water sources; sanitary wastes shall be disposed of
on land by burial at approved Sites or by other approved methods.

2.21 Preservation of Graveyards

The Contractor shall not trespass, excavate in or otherwise disturb graveyards

whether shown on Drawings or not. In the case of unidentified graveyards or burial
Sites, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and the Engineer shall make
such design changes as required.

S5 – 18
 Chapter – 3

MATERIALS

3.1 Approval of Material

Before ordering material of any description intended for the permanent Works, the
Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Engineer the names of the proposed
maker or supplier, specifications of the material and details of the place of origin or
manufacturer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply to the
Engineer for his retention, a copy of any such orders placed, and prices.

Where items are identified in the Specifications, Bills of Quantities or Schedules by

brand name, materials, plant or equipment of alternative brands which are of an
equal or higher quality than the brand specified shall be accepted subject to the
Engineer’s prior review and written approval. Differences between the brand
specified and the proposed alternative brand must be fully described in writing by the
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer, together with relevant trade specifications
and details of tests, if any, performed on the proposed alternative brand, at least 28
days prior to the date when the Contractor intends to use, supply or install such plant,
equipment or materials. In the event the Engineer determines that such proposed
alternatives do not ensure equal or higher quality, the Contractor may submit further
alternative brands, always provided that he complies with the requirements of this
Clause.

All materials used in the permanent Works must be new, unless the use of old or
refurbished materials is expressly permitted by the Specifications or the Engineer.

3.2 Samples

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with samples of materials necessary for
testing in accordance with the Contract. Unless expressly excused the Contractor
shall also provide samples of all manufactured items required for the permanent
Works, or alternatively the Contractor shall submit trade literature where the provision
of samples, in the first instance and as agreed by the Engineer, is impracticable. All
samples rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from Site. All approved samples
shall be stored on Site by the Contractor for the duration of the Contract, and any
materials or manufactured items subsequently delivered to Site for incorporation in
the permanent Works shall be of a quality at least equal to the approved samples.

S5 – 19
3.3 Materials in Contact with Water

Materials used in the Work which are or can be in contact with the untreated or
treated water shall not contain any matter which could impart taste, odour or toxicity
or otherwise be harmful to health or adversely affect the quality of water. Any listing
or recommendation by the Pakistan Water Fittings byelaws and as operated by the
Pakistan Water Research Center will generally be regarded as satisfactory evidence
of the suitability.

3.4 Natural Materials

The Contractor shall make all arrangements for locating, selecting and processing
natural materials to comply with the Specifications and shall submit to the Engineer
for approval of information regarding the proposed location of well in advance of the
commencement of using of the materials. Approval of a location shall mot imply that
all materials in that location is approved.

3.5 Laboratory Facilities

The Contractor shall for the duration of the Contract, supply maintain and operate the
apparatus necessary for sampling, preparing and testing materials for specified tests.
Both the laboratory and the tests shall be to the approval of the Engineer, such
approval shall not be given if significant delays in obtaining results are likely, or if the
results may be unreliable. The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements
and provide all transport and labour for transporting the samples to the approved
laboratory, and shall ensure that all results are conveyed to the Engineer promptly.
The Engineer’s approval will be withdrawn if the Test results are unsatisfactory and
below Contract Specifications.

The Contractor shall keep records of all tests he conducts in connection with
compliance with and as required by the Specifications, and shall supply copies of the
results of such tests to the Engineer as soon as practicable after each test is made.

3.6 Concrete Tests

A comprehensive list of tests for Soil and Concrete is provided in SP-11.1 and the
Contractor shall make arrangements with an approved Laboratory to perform these
tests whenever required by the Engineer. The List of tests given in the Clause S5
(3.6 and 3.7) are to be performed at Site by the Contractor and Contractor shall
furnish all the required equipment and instruments and staff to run these tests at Site
as per the advice of the Engineer.

S5 – 20
 (a) Slump Test BS1881: Part 102
(b) Aggregate Moisture Test for determination of Water BS812: Part 2
Cement Ratio
(c) Compacting Factor Test BS1881: Part 103
(e) Compressive Strength Test BS1881: Part 116
(f) Chemical Analysis of Concrete and Cement Refer to Clause 5.07
(g) Loss Angles Abrasion Test As per BS or ASTM
Standard
(h) Gradation Test --- do ---
(i) Sand Equivalent Test --- do ---
(j) Soundness Test --- do ---

3.7 Soil Compaction Tests

(a) Soil Gradation Analysis Test, Liquid and Plastic Limit BS Standards
Test
(b) Determination of the Dry Density / Moisture Content BS 1377. Part 4
relationship of Soil (Proctor Test) (2.5 Kg rammer)
(c) Determination of the dry density of the soil BS1377: Part 2
(d) Sand Replacement Test BS1377: Part 9
(e) CBR Test BS Standards

The Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing test cubes in accordance
with BS 1881 Part 108 and 111 respectively and for measuring the temperature of
the atmosphere, formwork, concrete constituents and concrete itself as directed by
the Engineer, and shall provide and maintain the equipment required for such
activities and Tests or the Contractor will hire an approved Commercial Laboratory
for all type of field and Laboratory testing.

S5 – 21
 Chapter – 4

INSTALLATION OF TUBEWELLS

4.1 Scope

The Work covered by this Section of the Specifications shall consist of all plant, labour,
equipment, appliances, materials etc., as necessary for the well drilling, installation of
materials, well completion, development, testing and miscellaneous Work required for
the satisfactory completion of all Work involved with the construction of tubewells for
Water Supply Pipeline from Kudwala to Banna Post.

4.2 Drilling

4.2.1 General

The Contractor shall drill each bore hole for water supply wells at the location
established in the field by the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare the Site for the
construction of the tubewell and shall provide for the disposal of water, cuttings, and
refuse from his operations away from the tubewell at his own risk and cost.

4.2.2 Drilling Procedure

The bore hole shall be drilled by the straight or Reverse Circulation Rotary Method with
a drill bit diameter of 20 to 26 inches. The Contractor at his own risk and with the
permission of the Engineer may adopt other method of drilling at locations where sub-
surface conditions are such that the Straight or Reverse Circulation Rotary Method is not
feasible or suitable in which case the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extra claim.
Each bore hole shall be drilled to the depth specified by the Engineer. It is anticipated
that the depth of tubewells will vary. However, no minimum depth for any individual
tubewell or average depth for all tubewells is guaranteed. The bore holes shall be drilled
sufficiently straight and plumb so that the pump and tubewell Pump Housing Pipe may
be installed concentric with the hole and within the tolerance specified for plumbness of
the casing. Waste materials from the drilling operations shall be disposed off in a
manner approved by the Engineer on the risk and cost of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the tubewells from contamination by
foreign material until the completion of the tubewell. The Contractor shall bear any
expense that may result from damage to any tubewell, tools, or equipment that may be
caused by caving, washing, or other disturbances within the tubewell.
Where necessary to prevent sloughing and caving of surface material, the Contractor

S5 – 22
 shall furnish and install a conductor casing with a minimum diameter 2 inches greater
than the bit diameter not less than 6 inches above the ground surface up to a sufficient
depth to encounter firm material. The conductor casing shall be new or used pipe of
adequate strength for the purpose. After the drilling is completed, the conductor casing
shall be removed by the Contractor and shall remain his property.

If unstable material is encountered during drilling, the Contractor shall stabilize the
material in a manner approved by the Engineer. The use of drilling fluid additives or
other suitable materials specially approved by the Engineer may be employed in
stabilizing the bore hole. All temporary casing shall be removed by the Contractor in 5 to
10 feet stages as ground shrouding is placed. If in the opinion of the Engineer, it is
necessary to discontinue Work on any bore hole because it is out of line more than the
amount specified or on account of jammed tools, caving ground, or because of
negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor shall drill another bore hole at
an alternative location designated by the Engineer. The Contractor will not be entitled to
payment for any Work done or materials furnished for bore holes abandoned as a result
of his operation or negligence.

4.2.3 Data and Records

The Contractor shall keep an accurate drilling log, conversion charts, strata samples
collected and preserved from different depths during boring of each bore hole including
a description of all materials encountered and their location in the bore hole. The fact
that the Engineer or his representative may be present and keeping a separate record
by them shall not relieve the Contractor from this responsibility.

In the case of defective or incomplete records the Contractor shall complete the records
at his own expense. All records and data shall be kept by the Contractor on forms
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer the original of all
records.

4.2.4 Sampling

Representative ditch samples or cuttings of the material penetrated shall be taken at

every 5 feet interval or at each change in lithology encountered which ever is less of the
bore hole. Special care shall be exercised to determine the thickness and location of
each change in material encountered and to obtain satisfactory samples. Immediately
upon taking each sample, the sample shall be placed in a plastic or cloth bag,
partitioned wooden box or other approved container, properly marked for identification,

S5 – 23
 and plainly labeled with the depth of the top and bottom of the section of the bore hole
represented. The containers shall be furnished by the Contractor. The method of
obtaining, processing, and storing the samples will be subject to approval by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall deliver all samples to the Engineer at the Site of the
tubewells, except that when requested to do so by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
deliver specified samples to the Engineer's field headquarters.

4.3 Installation of Well Casing

4.3.1 General

Installation of casing shall consist of all Work required in connection with the installation
of casing pipe, comprising mild steel housing pipe, blind pipe, reducer, bail plug (sand)
trap and brass screen required for each tubewell as specified herein or on the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer and shall include, but not be limited to storing, fabricating
and installing all pump housing and tubewell casing including concentric reducers.

4.3.2 Materials

[Link] Pump Housing Pipe

Pump Housing Pipe shall be of mild steel of designated diameters and wall thickness.
The pipes shall be made from steel plates conforming to ASTM Specifications A-53/79.

The pipes shall have beveled ends. The pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths and
shall be painted outside with antirust chemical. All pipes shall be free from dents,
injuries, scars and ovalties.

The housing pipe shall be installed to extend a minimum 4 ft. (min) or as per specified
stick-up above the existing ground level in addition to the housing as specified by the
final design below ground level.

[Link] Well Blind Pipe

Well Blind Pipes shall be fabricated in conformity to Specifications designated here

above for Pump Housing Pipes. Well blind pipes shall be of designated diameters as
indicated in the Drawings.

[Link] Reducer

For connecting M.S. housing pipe and Well Blind Pipe at depths below ground level, a

S5 – 24
 transitional reducer shall be provided and made of the same material and of the same
thickness as used for well casing specified above. The ends of the reducer shall be
suitable for welding to the pump housing and well blind pipe.

[Link] Bail Plug

Bail Plug shall be of the same material and thickness as followed for well casing. Bail
Plug shall be provided with a cone or base plate, as per Contract Drawings, welded at
one end of the pipe. A steel hook of 5/8” dia MS Bar bent in the form of 'U' shall be
bolted and welded to the base cone or plate, as the case may be, to sustain a maximum
suspended length of 150 ft. of well casing. Bail plug shall be 6 ft. (min) long in sizes or as
indicated in the Drawings.

[Link] Well Screen (Strainer)

Well Screen (Strainer) shall be of brass screen suitable for gravel pack tubewell and
strong enough for location at a depth not exceeding 150 ft or as per design below
ground level. The strainer shall have minimum open area of 10 percent, minimum wall
thickness of 0.25 inch or as specified and slot size of 0.04 inch. The slots shall be of a
shape that produces an opening of a 'V' form, narrow on the outside and wide on the
inside. The openings shall be free from jagged edges, irregularities or any thing that will
accelerate or contribute to clogging or corrosion of the screen.

4.3.3 Fabrication

The depth of pump housing casing will be established by the Engineer for each tubewell
depending on the future water levels and Draw Down anticipated. Lengths of the
specified diameter of steel casing shall be provided to extend the Pump Housing Casing
from the elevation of the top of the Pump Housing Casing to the depth established by
the Engineer.

Adjoining sections of Pump Housing Casing shall be assembled by field welding. The
ends of the casing sections shall be lathe turned or otherwise prepared for jointing. All
field welding shall be performed by the electric arc method, using heavily coated welding
rods suitable for all-position welding. After being welded, the welds shall be cleaned of
slag and shall show uniform smooth sections, feather edges without overlap, and from
porosity and clinkers. The Pump Housing Casing shall be connected to the tubewell
casing by means of a concentric tapered reducer having a minimum length of 24 inches.

The length and sizes of tubewell casing to be installed shall be specified for each

S5 – 25
 tubewell by the Engineer and shall be sufficient to extend from the bottom of the housing
casing to the bottom of the tubewell. The bottom of the tubewell casing shall be provided
with bail plug as shown on the drawings.

4.3.4 Installation

The Contractor shall install the entire pump housing and tubewell casing assembly
straight, plumb, and concentric in the drilled hole to permit the installation of the pump in
such a manner that it will operate satisfactorily and without damage. The methods
employed by the Contractor in the installation of the casing and in obtaining or correcting
the verticality and straightness of the pump housing casing shall be subjected to the
approval of the Engineer.

Centralizers, spacers or other suitable devices shall be attached to the tubewell casing
so that it will be centered in the drill hole throughout its entire length and held in such
position while gravel shrouding, plastic clay puddle seal and sanitary seal, as per design,
are being placed. Centralizers shall be attached to the pipe in a manner that ensures
that the pipe is accurately centered in the drill hole. The detail design of centralizers and
the method of attachment to the pipe shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Unless otherwise directed centralizers shall be spaced at no more than 20 ft. centre to
centre along the overall length of Well Screens (Strainers), blind pipe and Pump
Housing Pipe assembly.

The Contractor shall install the pump casing so that the deviation of its axis from the
vertical shall not exceed 4 inches at the bottom of the pump housing casing.
Measurements for determination of verticality and straightness of the pump housing
casing shall be made by the Contractor according to the method approved by the
Engineer and in the presence of the Engineer upon completion of the gravel shrouding.

Measurements for determining the deviation of the pump housing casing pipe from the
vertical shall be made by the use of a circular plumb having a minimum outside diameter
of 1/2 inch less than the inside diameter of the pump housing casing pipe. The plumb
shall be suspended vertically down by a piano wire in the centre of the Pump Housing
Casing pipe from a point 10 ft. above the top of the casing pipe. The line from which the
plumb is suspended shall, with the plumb at any depth, not deviate from the centre of
the pump housing casing pipe at the top by more that that corresponding to a deviation
of the plumb of an angle, with the horizontal line, of 10 minutes at the bottom of the
pump housing casing pipe. All the deviations shall refer to a vertical line passing through

S5 – 26
 the centre of the pump housing casing pipe at the top. Deviations shall be recorded
against depths of measurements at every 10 ft, in a manner approved by the Engineer.

Another check applied for the requirement of the verticality limits of the pump housing
casing pipe will be that when the plumb is lowered to the bottom of the pump housing
casing pipe the line from which the plumb is suspended shall not deviate from the centre
of the pump housing casing pipe at the top level of the pump casing pipe by a dimension
more than that required to provide a minimum clearance of 1” between the inner wall of
the pump casing pipe and the outer diameter of the greatest flange of the
turbine/submersible pump assembly to be lowered and installed in the pump housing
casing pipe, as the case may be, at the bottom level the pump setting if lowered up to a
point 4” above the bottom level of the pump housing pipe i.e., top of reducer. For this
purpose the deviation of the plum line in the horizontal plan.

Straightness of the pump housing pipe shall be determined by lowering a section of pipe
40 ft. long or a dummy of the same length to the bottom of the pump housing casing
pipe. The minimum diameter of the pipe or dummy shall be 1 inch less than the inside
diameter of the pump housing casing pipe. If a dummy is used, it shall consist of a rigid
spindle with three cylindrical rings, each ring having a height of at least 12 inches. The
rings shall be true cylinders and shall be located at each end and in the centre of the
dummy. The central shaft of the dummy shall be rigid so that it will maintain the
alignment of the axis of the cylindrical rings. The pump housing casing pipe shall be
sufficiently straight so the pipe or dummy can be passed freely throughout the entire
length of the pump housing casing pipe. The Contractor shall provide all the T&P,
plumbs, pipes and dummies, hoisting arrangements etc. required and to be used for
testing of the vertical deviation and straightness of the pump housing casing pipe shall
be approved by the Engineer.

Any tubewell failing to meet the specified requirements and limits for straightness,
verticality and concentricity shall be abandoned and the Contractor shall construct a new
well at his own expense at an alternative Site to be given by the by the Engineer-in-
charge.

4.3.5 Shrouding Makeup Pipe with Feed Funnel

A 3 inch diameter galvanized iron (GI) shrouding recoupment/gravel makeup pipe, will
be provided and laid in the annular space between the bore hole and the pump housing
casing pipe to be projected down up to a minimum depth of 50 ft bellows the 6 ft thick

S5 – 27
 stiff clay puddle seal in to the shrouding area to be placed below the sanitary seal. The
shrouding recoupment pipe shall be duly embedded in the shrouding below puddle clay
seal and in the grout/PCC sanitary seal to be placed above the stiff clay puddle seal up
to the bottom level of the PCC pump foundation. The shrouding recoupment pipe will be
bent in the shape as shown in the contract drawing with its length at top will be
embedded in the PCC pump foundation at the location in plan as shown and according
the requirement of the direction of the delivery piping of the pump to be decided by the
Engineer. Top of the GI shrouding recoupment pipe shall have standard threads for 2½”
length for fixing the shrouding recoupment funnel on top. A shrouding recoupment
funnel fabricated from MS sheet of 1/8” thickness of 3” dia at bottom and 12” dia at top
and 15” height complete with a 3” dia GI socket welded at bottom with a hinged lid of
1/8” thick MS sheet will be fixed on top of the GI pipe. The funnel shall be painted on all
sides in 2 coats of gray enamel paint over 2 coats of red led oxide primer.

4.4 Gravel Shrouding

4.4.1 General

Gravel shrouding shall consist of all Work required in connection with supply and placing
of gravel shrouding in annular space between the walls of the drilled hole and the
outside of the pump casing. The Work shall include, but not limited to development of
source, excavation, stock piling, grading, washing, storing, transporting and placing of
gravel shrouding including placing and making good the quantity of shrouding material
for its settlement during the process of development and testing of the tubewell as
specified herein or as directed by the Engineer.

4.4.2 Gravel Source

The Contractor may obtain gravel from any source or location subject to the approval of
the Engineer provided that the gravel meets the requirements of the specifications. The
Employer will not be responsible for the amount of Work involved or the amount of
materials wastage in order to obtain the required amount of gravel of proper gradation.
4.4.3 Specifications

The gravel shrouding shall be clean, washed, water worn, hard, well rounded of
siliceous material and without platy particles, free from gypsum, shale and under no
circumstances shall contain >5% calcareous material. The gravel supplied shall be
subject to inspection and screening in the field to ensure proper gradation suitable to the
formation. The gravel shall be reasonably graded and shall conform to the following
requirements:

S5 – 28
 TYPICAL GRADING SHROUDING MATERIAL (AGGREGATE)

U.S. Standard Screen Number Percentage Passing

3/8 inch 100
No. 4 75 – 100
No. 8 35 – 65
No. 14 05 – 30
No. 16 00 – 15
No. 35 00 – 00

4.4.4 Placing of Shrouding

Gravel shall be placed at constant rate using tremie pipe, hoppers, hose or other similar
devices to provide a continuous and uniform gravel flow all around the tube well lowering
assembly so as to minimize segregation of particle sizes. When tremie pipe or hoppers,
hose are used, gravel shall be introduced in the annular space between the
pump-housing and the edge of the hole at two points located 180 apart. The tremie
pipe, when used, shall be of suitable size and lowered to the bottom of the well on two
opposite sides of the bore hole and calculated quantity of gravel equal to the volume of
annular space between the bore hole and the tube well lowered assembly, i.e. strainers,
blind pipe, reducer and the part of pump housing casing pipe, up to the bottom level of
the stiff clay puddle seal or the sanitary seal, as the case may be, shall be poured in the
pipe through a funnel and the pipe shall be raised by 6 ft. interval. In all cases water
shall be circulated steadily during gravel placement by inserting the drilling rod into
pump housing pipe and operating the circulation pump on the drilling rig. The water level
in the annular space outside the pump housing shall be maintained at or above natural
ground surface level by return flow from the cutting bit.

Temporary casing, if used, shall be carefully withdrawn in 6 to 10 ft. interval during

placement of gravel shrouding and the gravel shall be introduced so that each stage of
the hole above bottom of the casing is completely filled before the casing is withdrawn to
the next stage. The process of withdrawing the temporary casing shall be continued until
the bottom of temporary casing is at least 10 ft. above the top of the top most
screen/strainer. The temporary casing above this point shall also be removed.

4.5 Stiff Clay Puddle Seal between Shrouding and Sanitary Seal

4.5.1 General

After ascertaining the pouring and stabilization of shrouding up to the required level

S5 – 29
 as per design of the tubewell around the tubewell assembly by taking soundings, stiff
clay puddle seal in a height of 6 ft. or as required by the design and Contract
Drawings shall be placed above top of Shrouding in the annular space between bore
hole and the pump housing casing pipe.

4.5.2 Materials and Placing of Stiff Clay Puddle Seal

The material will be cohesive plastic clay, free of lumps, pebbles, kanker, silt, sand
and other undesirable matter such as rags, wood, paper, plastic etc, thoroughly
mixed with water and made into a dough of a uniform consistency that, if pressed in
the hand/palm and made into the shape of a ball of 2 to 3 inches dia, it should retain
its shape for a period not less than 5 minutes after releasing and placing on a non-
absorbing flat surface and will not release substantial amount of water. Bottom half of
the stiff clay puddle seal will be placed with clay dough of harder consistency than
the upper half taking all care that clay slurry should not travel and seep in to the
upper layers of shrouding area below. Top of the stiff clay puddle seal shall be
checked and ascertained by careful soundings to be up to the correct level as shown
in the contract drawings.

4.6 Sanitary Seal and Grouting of Pump Housing Casing

4.6.1 General

Grouting of pump housing casing (Sanitary Seal) shall cover providing all equipment,
labour and doing all Work required to seal the annular space between the pump housing
casing and the bore hole face by the introduction of grout as specified herein and on the
Drawings above a plastic clay puddle seal of 6 ft, or as per design for each individual
tubewell, depth on top of Shrouding as shown in the Drawing and according to
procedures approved by the Engineer.

4.6.2 Material

The Sanitary Seal shall have PCC 1:1½:3 with ¼” down aggregate or 1:2 cement sand
grout, as per requirements of the Contract and Drawings. Cement, sand and aggregate
shall conform to the requirements of Section "CONCRETE".

4.6.3 Placement of Grouting

S5 – 30
Before placing of the Sanitary Seal depth of the top level of the stiff clay puddle seal
shall be measured accurately by taking soundings all around the pump housing casing
pipe to ascertain its depth as specified in the contract drawing. The grout or PCC, as the
case, may be placed by either the tremie method or by being pumped into place
provided that both the method and the type of grout are approved by the Engineer prior
to the start of the operation.

If the tremie method is selected and approved the grout material shall be placed by
tremie pouring, (after water or other drilling fluid has been circulated in the annular space
sufficient to clear obstructions). The tremie method shall be used where there is a
minimum annular space of 3 inches only between the upside surface of the inside
casing and the inside surface of either the external casing or the borehole. The minimum
size tremie pipe utilized shall be 2 inches inside diameter. Where concrete grout is used
the minimum size tremie pipe used shall be 3 inches inside diameter. When making a
tremie pour, the tremie pipe shall be lowered to the bottom of the zone being grouted
and raised slowly as the grout material is introduced. The tremie pipe shall be kept full
continuously from start to finish of the grouting procedure, with the discharge end of the
tremie pipe being continuously submerged in the grout and gently struck continuously by
a light hammer to maintain the consistent flow down the pipe, until the zone to be
grouted is completely filled. The minimum curing time before the start of construction
might be 72 hours. If the method of grout placement selected and approved is to be by
pumping, the grout shall be injected (after water or other drilling fluid has been circulated
in the annular space sufficient to clear obstructions) in the annular space between the
inner casing and either the outer casing or the borehole. The annular space must be a
minimum of 1½ inches for sand and cement of neat cement grout, and not less than
three times the size of the largest coarse aggregate used in case plain concrete mix
adopted for the sanitary seal. The grout pipe shall extend from the surface to the bottom
of the zone to be grouted.

Grout or the PCC, as the case may be, shall be placed, from bottom to top, in one
continuous operation. The grout pipe may be slowly raised as the grout is placed but the
discharge end of the grout pipe must be submerged in the emplaced grout at all times
until grouting is completed. The grout pipe shall be maintained full, to the surface, at all
times and gently struck continuously by a light hammer to maintain the consistent flow
down the pipe, until the completion of the grouting of the entire specified zone. In the

S5 – 31
 event of interruption in the grouting operation, the bottom of the pipe should be raised
above the grout level and should not be renumbered until all air and water have been
displaced from the grout pipe and the pipe flushed clear water. Curing time before
further activities of Work shall be 48 hours minimum.

4.7 Development and Testing

4.7.1 General

Development and testing shall consist of all Work required in connection with the
development of each tubewell to produce the design capacity of sand-free water with a
minimum draw-down, and the testing of each tubewell to determine the effectiveness of
the development operations as specified herein. Development and testing shall include,
but not be limited to surging, backwashing and pumping the tubewell at higher than
rated capacity; testing the tubewell for determining the safe yield, draw down at the
recommended safe yield, static water level specific capacity, sand content, and degree
of development and disinfection and sealing each tubewell after completing the process
of developing and testing. The Contractor shall be required to take soundings of the well,
to determine whether excess sand has accumulated in the bottom of the well at the
following stages of the Works:

i) On completion of the casing and screen installation

ii) Before the starting of the development and
iii) After completion of development and testing

If it is found at any stage mentioned above that the well contains more than 1 ft. of sand
or other material in the bail plug, the Contractor shall clear the well down to a level
approximately 1 ft. above the bottom plate of the bail plug.

Water obtained in development and testing shall be disposed of by the Contractor in an

approved manner.

4.7.2 Development

The development and testing to be done by the Contractor under the procedures and
methods given in Item No. 8 of the Sub-Head No. 2 in BOQ under the head of “Tubewell
Boring & Conversion” and further detailed in the Sub Clauses hereafter shall be subject
to approval by the Engineer as per Site requirements and shall be supervised and
witnessed by the Engineer, from their start to completion. The Contractor shall maintain

S5 – 32
 a complete record, subsequently to be handed over to the Employer on completion of
Works before the payment, of the development operation and shall make regular
periodic measurements of discharge rates, sand content and steady state water level,
draw down measurements. Developing and surging of tubewells will be done first for 12
hours with air compressor at each strainer tapping depth starting from upper to the lower
tapings of strainer i/c bail plug at the end and then with continuous pumping with a
turbine/submersible pump at the rate of 1.5 time the design discharge of the tubewell for
a period of 24 hours and will take samples and monitor the turbidly and sand contents
and draw down after each ½ hour intervals.

In wells where bentonite or other formation stabilizing agents are used, the Contractor
shall undertake a programme of cleaning the well with poly phosphates or other
dispersing agents in a manner and with chemical dosages as approved by the Engineer
prior to starting normal development Work.

4.7.3 Testing

The Contractor shall perform testing of the tubewell with continuous pumping with
turbine/submersible pump, of double the discharge capacity of the design discharge of
the tubewell as “Step Test” starting from a 50% of the Design Discharge and raising the
discharge in steps of quarter multiples of the Design Discharge up to the maximum step
of 1.5 times the Design Discharge for a total duration of 48 hours or up to a time till the
turbidity of the pump med water is cleared and the sand content in the water discharged
by the tubewell at the highest specified step falls within the required limits. The extra
time taken by the Contractor for developing and testing of tubewell with
turbine/submersible pump to give the required results, over and above the time specified
in Item No. 8 of the Sub-Head No. 2 in BOQ under the head of “Tubewell Boring &
Conversion” shall be at his own risk and cost.

Continuous pumping will be done by the Contractor at each step of discharge till a
steady state Draw Down condition at that discharge step is reached with tubewell
discharging water clear of turbidity and sand content up to the required limit.

4.7.4 Measurements and Data

The Contractor will observe and keep the record, on the forms/data sheet (hardcopy as
well as softcopy) to be specified by the Engineer, of step discharge and steady state
drawdown of all the step discharges reached up to the above given limits of steady state

S5 – 33
 drawdown, clear water and sand content and will draw a curve of discharge, on
Horizontal Axis Versus Draw Down reached for the steady state condition at the step
discharge, on the Horizontal Axis, to find out the recommended Safe Yield and Draw
Down at the recommended Safe Yield including Specific Yield of the tubewell.

The results drawn from the Step Pumping Test of the tubewell as described above, shall
also be compared with the results of Tube Yield with respect to time intervals, starting
from one minute to one hour, as per decision of the Engineer, after immediate stopping
of the test pumping of the tubewell at 1.5 times the Design Discharge to the full recovery
up to the Static Ground Water Table with respective rise of water level in the tubewell
which will also be recorded and plotted for reaching the most reliable safe yields of the
tubewell and the respective Draw Down.

Upon completion of the development operations the tubewell shall be permitted to

recover till the static water table in the area is reached and time for this recovery shall be
noted as in the case of recovery period testing data mentioned above. During this
recovery period, the tubewell shall be sounded. If the comparison of the depth by
sounding and the length of the casing string indicate that there is more than 2 feet of
material in the tubewell, it shall be cleaned to within 1.0 feet of the bottom of the bail
plug.

4.7.5 Limits for Sand Content

At the end of the first five minutes of pumping, the sand content of the water shall be
determined by using a 40 inches Imhoff cone or other device approved by the Engineer.
The sand content of the water at this time shall be less than 100 mg/l. A second sand
content determination shall be made 10 minutes after the start of pumping. The sand
content at this time shall be less than 30 mg/l. If the sand content tolerances are
exceeded at this time, or at any subsequent time up to the time of final acceptance of
the installation, sand content determinations, water level, and discharge measurements
during the remainder of the one hour Sand Test Period shall be made as directed by the
Engineer.

When the sand test has been satisfactorily completed, the tubewell shall be further
developed for 4 hours by surging and backwashing with the test pump at five to ten
minute intervals. Following the development period, the tubewell shall again be pumped
for a period of one hour during which time the sand test shall be repeated. The Specific

S5 – 34
 Capacity of the tubewell shall be determined from the water level measurements and
flow rates obtained during the pumping periods. If the Specific Capacity obtained from
the second pump test is found to be more than 10 percent greater than that obtained in
the first pump test, the development shall be continued as directed by the Engineer.

4.7.6 Equipment, Machinery, T&P, POL etc.

The Contractor shall furnish at his own risk and cost all necessary equipment for the
development and testing of the tubewell, including air compressor, diesel/generator
operated (or at his own option will arrange temporary electric supply connection from
electronic supply company, if available in the vicinity, at his own cost for connection and
energy consumption charges) turbine pump/submersible pump, valve controlled delivery
of the pump for fine adjustment of the discharge for performing Step Test, using
discharge measuring V-Notch or other reliable and accurate devices, subject to the
approval of the Engineer, and an electric measuring device to determine the Draw Down
during each stage of the Step Test and Imhoff cones to measure sand content, water
sampling arrangements and all the required T&P, whatsoever. If oil lubricated test
pumps are used, the Contractor shall exercise all reasonable precautions to keep the
leakage of lubricating oil into the tubewell at a minimum and shall promptly remove all oil
which collects on the water surface in the tubewell by the addition of detergents or other
suitable chemicals and pumping the emulsified oil from the tubewell. In the event the
Contractor fails to keep the leakage of oil into the tubewell within acceptable limits or to
promptly remove oil accumulations from the tubewell, the Engineer will order the use of
oil lubricated test pumps discontinued and the Contractor shall use water lubricated
pumps for testing of the tubewells. The actual depth of setting for the test pump will be at
a level 5 ft above the bottom end of the pump housing casing pipe or as determined by
the Engineer after the tubewell has been developed and the data of Safe Yield, Static
Water Table and Draw Down is available. Piping, gauges, orifices, meters, wire boxes or
other measuring devices shall be furnished, installed and removed by the Contractor at
his own cost, which will remain his property after the completion of the Work and the
Contractor will not claim for any deterioration and damages sustained by the machinery,
equipment, T&P, other Work related gauggers whatsoever. All measuring devices and
testing equipment shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

Contractor shall bear all the costs of labour, transport and mobilization, demobilization of
the boring rigs, related machinery, equipment, materials etc including POL or the electric
temporary connection and energy charges, as the case may be.

S5 – 35
4.7.7 Measurements and Data

As detailed in Sub-Clause 4.7.4 the Contractor shall take readings of Draw Down and
discharge, recovery levels, time intervals and other pertinent data during each test at
intervals as required for the Work and further as specified by the Engineer. All such data
shall be recorded on forms approved by the Engineer and the original of such forms
shall be delivered along with results of testing to the Engineer at the completion of the
development and testing operations.

The Contractor shall collect water samples from tubewell, after completion of the
development and testing. Water samples shall be completely tested from any approved
laboratory as specified by the Engineer under the Contract and results in triplicate,
including one glass framed copy for hanging in the pump house, shall be submitted by
the Contractor to the Engineer at the completion of each tubewell. Contractor will
arrange at his own cost the delivery of water samples to the specified Water Testing
Laboratory in Pakistan. The water testing charges shall be paid to the Contractor as
covered under Item No. 11 of the Sub-Head No. 2 in BOQ under the head of “Tubewell
Boring & Conversion”.

[Link] Data, Testing, Record and Tubewell Performance

After development and testing the Contractor will provide the following data, for each
tubewell installed by him under this Contract, duly signed by him or his authorized Site
engineer: -

i) Depth of Static Water Table at Site of Tubewell.

ii) Recommended Safe Yield of the Tubewell, in cusecs.
iii) Draw Down at the Recommended Safe Yield, in ft.
iv) 3 copies of Boring (Strata) Log and Tubewell Conversion Chart including one
copy of each duly framed in glass with hanging hooks.
v) Report of Chemical Analysis of Water of the Tubewell, from an approved by the
Engineer, in original, with one copy duly framed in glass with hanging hooks of
the Chemical Analysis of Water of the tubewell

4.8 Sealing of the Tubewell

Upon completion of the tubewell the Contractor might be asked to seal the tubewell with
a ¼ inch thick steel plate cap welded to the top of the pump housing pipe, using arc
welding or by means of lockable clamping to be approved by the Engineer. Compliance

S5 – 36
 with this requirement will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
safeguarding of any part of the tubewell completed until the Certificate of Acceptance is
issued for the entire number of tubewells covered under his Contract.

4.9 Fixing of Suspension Clamp

After completion of all the Works relating to boring, conversion with allied items of Work,
developing, testing, disinfecting and fixing of the well cap a 5 ft long suspension
(anchoring) clamp made of 8” wide and ½” thick MS flat made in the shape as per
Design, duly painted in 2 coats of bitumastic paint, with 4 No. 5/8” diameter bolts and
nuts shall be fixed tightly on the 12” diameter pump housing casing pipe, in a diagonal
position at the middle height of the pump foundation made of PCC.

4.10 Pump Foundation

Lastly the Contractor will provide and lay fair-finish PCC of 1:2:4 cement, sand and
course aggregate ratio for the pump foundation of 4 ft x 4 ft size in plan up to the top of
the pump housing casing pipe above ground level, the stick-up portion, with its 2 ft
minimum depth below existing ground level or up to the firm undisturbed soil, which ever
greater. Four (4) No. recess holes of 4 inch dia and 15 inch depth will be left on top of
the pump foundation around the housing pipe in parallel directions to the sides of the
pump foundation with a center to center spacing suitable for fixing the discharge head of
the turbine pump or the MS bed plate for the submersible pump, as the case may be,
The Contractor shall arrange curing of the PCC pump foundation after dismantling of the
form Work for 10 day minimum or as required by the Engineer. The job will include the
cost of providing, assemblies and dismantling of leak proof fair-finish formWork,
shuttering etc. for laying the PCC pump foundation. The material for plain concrete and
its finishing shall conform to the relevant Specifications for this item of Work of the
Technical Specifications of this Bid Document.

4.11 Measurement and Payment

Measurement and payment for different components of the tubewell conversion

assembly including bail plug, strainers, blind pipe, pump housing casing pipe including
concentric reducer, shrouding, stiff clay puddle seal, PCC sanitary seal, MS suspension
clamp, shrouding recoupment pipe and all the allied items as contained in the BOQ and
done at Site will be made on the basis of the Units Rate included in BOQ for the
quantities of actual Work done at Site for each tubewell and recorded by the Engineer
for the total length of the tubewell conversion assembly actually provided and installed in

S5 – 37
the tubewell. The measurement of length will be taken from the elevation of the top of
the pump housing casing i/c stick-up above ground level to the lower tip of the bail plug
at bottom of the tubewell conversion assembly.

Payment for Work of Boring, Conversion and Testing of the tubewell will be made only
up to the lowest tip of the bail plug after successful completion of all the operations
including all applicable items provide in BOQ and after providing the testing results/data
of the tubewell including depth of Static Water Table (Ground Water Level), Safe
Recommended Yield, 3 copies of strata Chart (Boring Log), Conversion Chart (i/c one
glass framed copy for hanging in the tubewell chamber), Test Report of water, drawn
from the tubewell during testing, for chemical parameters compared to WHO Standards
from the Water Testing Laboratory recommended for this Contract, to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

S5 – 38
 Chapter – 5

CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT

5.1 General

The Work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists in furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials, and in performing all operations, in
connection with placing, curing and finishing concrete Work and reinforcement steel
strictly in accordance with this Section of the Specifications and the applicable
Drawings.

At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit for the approval of
the Engineer a Method Statement, detailing with regard to the requirements of these
Specifications, his proposals for the organization of concreting activities at the Site.
The Method Statement shall include the following items:

i) Plan proposed
ii) Location and layout of concrete production facility (Concrete Batch Plant).
iii) Proposed method of organization of the concrete production facility.
iv) Quality control procedures for concrete and concrete materials (aggregate,
cement, sand, water).
v) Transport and placing of concrete, vibration and curing etc.
vi) Details of formWork including striking times and procedures for temporary
support of beams and slabs, and dismantling of formWork.

5.1.1 Submittals

The Contractor shall submit all proposed Concrete Mix Designs to the Engineer. No
orders shall be placed for any material until the Concrete Mix Design has been
approved by the Engineer.

5.2 Quality Control

The Contractor shall employ appropriate qualified, trained and experienced engineer
who shall be responsible for the quality control and quality assurance of all concrete
production and execution. Materials and Workmanship for use in concrete Works
shall be of highest quality obtainable and only personnel who are fully skilled and
experienced in this kind of Work shall be employed for the Work covered by this
Section of the Specifications.

S5 – 39
5.3 Preparatory Work and Inspection

Before any concrete or mortar Work is carried out, the area inside the shuttering (or
other surfaces as applicable) shall have been thoroughly cleaned with water and/or
compressed air and in all other respects prepared as specified.

No concrete Work shall be placed anywhere until the Engineer has inspected and
approved (as applicable) the excavation, the measures taken for protection against
the weather, the arrangements for distribution of cooling and curing water, the
shuttering, water stopper, construction joint and stop-end positions and other
arrangements, the reinforcement and other items to be embedded and all the
concreting material, shuttering and formWork, curing materials, checking of vibrators
and other general arrangements.

5.4 Materials

5.4.1 Cement

(a) Ordinary Portland Cement shall comply with BS 12 or ASTM C-150 Type II or
Type V. This shall be used where concrete is not in contact with sewage,
sewer gas or ground water.
(b) Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement shall comply with BS 4027. This shall be
used for RCC pipe sewers, RCC drain, concrete structures including
manholes and all other appurtenances in contact with sewage, sewer gas or
ground water.

Cement is to be delivered in the undamaged original branded packing directly from

the manufacturer and is to be stored in a shed, the floor of which must be raised at
least 150mm from the ground. A sufficient supply is to be kept in store to ensure a
continuous supply to the Work, and it is to be so stacked that the various
consignments are used in the order in which they are delivered. Cement is not to be
stored at the site for more than three months without the Engineer’s permission. No
cement other than that intended for use on the Work shall be stored in such stores.
All cement shall be kept well-aerated and no cement which as become lumpy, or
otherwise damaged or deteriorated, shall be used in concrete or any other Work.
Manufacturer’s Test Sheets are to be supplied with each consignment certifying that
the cement delivered to the site has been tested and found to comply with
requirements mentioned above. Such Test Certificates are to be passed to the
Engineer for approval as they arrive. Cement salvaged by cleaning cement bags or

S5 – 40
 by cleaning the floor shall not be used. When directed by the Engineer questionable
cement shall be retested for loss of Compressive Strength.

5.4.2 Aggregate

Except as may be modified hereunder the aggregate (fine and coarse) for all types of
concrete shall comply in all respect with BS 882 or the provision of ASTM C33
“Concrete aggregate from natural sources”. They shall be hard, strong and durable
and shall contain no harmful material of sufficient quantity to affect the strength or
durability of the concrete adversely or, in the case of reinforced concrete, to attack
the reinforcement.

Material used as aggregates shall be obtained from source known to produce

satisfactory results for the different classes of concrete. The use of aggregates from
sources which have not been approved by the Engineer shall not be permitted.

Fine aggregate for the concrete classes A, B & C shall be well graded natural sand
and crushed stone screening with no round surface or other inert material of similar
characteristics or a combination of these. The whole of it shall be perfectly clean, free
from coagulated lumps, soft and flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic matter, loam,
mica and injurious amounts of the deleterious substances.

Maximum allowable content of silt and other deleterious inert substances is 5

percent. Material derived from stone unsuitable for coarse aggregate shall not be
used as fine aggregate. Fine aggregate derived from crushed stone screening shall
be sharp, cubical, hard, dense and durable and shall be stacked on a platform so as
to adequately protect it from dust and other admixtures.

Grading for the above specified fine aggregate shall be within the following limits, as
determined by the Engineer.

Sieve Size Percentage passing (Dry Weight)

10.00mm 100
5.00mm 89 to 100
2.36mm 60 to 100
1.18mm 30 to 100
0.60mm (600um) 15 to 100
0.30mm (300um) 5 to 70
0.15mm (150um) 0 to 15

S5 – 41
 Fine aggregate for class D concrete shall be good quality bank run sand. It shall be
clean natural material graded from fine to coarse, free from lumps, clay, cinder,
ashes, rubbish and other debris. It shall not contain more then 5 percent of material
finer than 150um mesh screen, nor more than 5 percent remaining on 2.36mm sieve;
all material shall pass through a 20mm screen.

Coarse aggregate for Concrete Classes A, B & C shall consist of crushed stone
orient material with maximum size of 20mm, and shall be clean, hard durable, sound,
cubical and well shaped, free from soft or friable matter, or thin elongated pieces,
alkali, organic matter, or injurious amounts of other deleterious substances.
Deleterious inert matter shall not exceed 3 per cent. Grading for the above specified
coarse aggregate shall be within the following limits:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing (Dry Weight)

50.0mm 100
37.5mm 90 to 100
20.0mm 35 to 70
10.0mm 10 to 40
5.0mm 0 to 5

5.5 Proportions of Coarse and Fine Aggregates

The nominal ratio of the volume of coarse aggregate to the volume of fine aggregate
shall be decided by Compression Test of concrete cubes but the Engineer may order
these ratios to be varied slightly according to the grading of the aggregate or by
weight, if necessary, so as to produce inclusive gradings for the mixtures of coarse
and fine aggregate, or whatever is approved by a good Job Mix Formula of Concrete
Mix Design.

At the beginning of the Work and where there is any change in the coarse or fine
aggregates or in their source of supply, the Contractor is to have a series of tests on
cubes made representative of and marked as to the aggregates and their grading
and Concrete Mix Design of concrete. Such cubes are to be tested in the laboratory
under identical conditions, except for small variations in the relative proportions of the
coarse and fine aggregates up and down from the best proportions derived from the
sieve analysis. The cubes are to be tested at 7 days and 28 days.

S5 – 42
 From the results of these tests (cube strengths), the Engineer may decide the
proportions of coarse to fine aggregates that are to be used for each mix thereafter
throughout the progress of the Work or until there is some change in the aggregates.

5.6 Delivery to Site

No aggregate for use in the Works shall be delivered to Site until the Engineer has
approved the aggregates to be used and the arrangements for washing etc.
Thereafter samples shall be taken by the Contractor from every 75 cubic meters or
as required by the Engineer, of each type of aggregate delivered to the Site and
handed to the Engineer for routine control tests.

5.7 Water For Cement

Water used for concrete shall be clean, fresh and free from earth, vegetable organic
impurities and from salts and others substances likely to cause efflorescence or
interfere with the setting of or otherwise prove harmful to the strength or durability of
the concrete. Water shall be obtained from public supply where possible and may be
taken from any other source only if approved by the Engineer. No water from
excavations, surface drains or irrigation canals shall be used. Only water of approved
quality shall be used for washing out shuttering, curing concrete and similar
purposes.

5.8 Concrete Mix Requirements

The strength classifications refer to the proportions of cement, fine aggregate and
coarse aggregate and water. The concrete mix requirements shall consist of
proportioning and mixing for the following strengths when tested in the form of cubes:

Compressive strength in
Concrete Class N/mm2 (Newton/mm2)
28 Days
Class A & A(s) 1:1.5:3 28
Class B & B(s) 1:2:4 21
Class C & C(s) 1:3:6 14
Note: (s) = Sulphate Resistant Cement

5.9 Water Cement Ratio

The water-cement ratio is the ratio of the weight of cement therein. Water content
shall be sufficient to produce a Workable mix of the specified strength but the total
water content shall be governed by the following table:

S5 – 43
 Maximum free
Concrete Class
water/cement ratio
Class A & A(s) 1:1.5:3 0.5
Class B & B(s) 1:2:4 0.6
Class C & C(s) 1:3:6 0.65
Note: (s) = Sulphate Resistant Cement

5.10 Consistency

Proportions of ingredients shall be varied to secure the desired concrete

consistencies when tested, conforming to the following slump requirements or as
directed by the Engineer.

Min & Max

Uses of Concrete Slump
(mm)
Reinforced sections or others shall be compacted by 25 to 75
mechanical vibration as well as manually
Heavily reinforced concrete sections, reinforced slabs, 50 to 100
beams, columns and walls by mechanical vibrations and
manually

In all cases, the proportions of aggregates for concrete shall be such as to produce
mixtures which will Work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around
the reinforcement without permitting the segregation of materials or laitance.

5.11 Measurement of Materials

The coarse and fine aggregates are to be weighed or accurately measured to the
Engineers satisfaction. In no event are they to be measured by the shovel or barrow.

Cement is to be measured by the 50kg bag and the size of mixer is to be such that it
will take the batch of materials appropriate to one or more complete bags.

5.12 Mixing Methods

The concrete is to be mixed in an approved Batch Concrete Plant. The Plant, its
hopper and Working platforms are to be protected from rain and wind.

The aggregates throughout and cement are to be mixed together before adding
water until the concrete is of even color and consistency. Dirt and other undesirable
substances shall be excluded. Water is not to be added indiscriminately from a hose
or tank. All concrete shall be thoroughly mixed by a modern dependable Concrete

S5 – 44
 Batch Plant to produce maximum output of concrete necessary to complete the Work
within the specified time without reducing the required mixing time. Concrete shall be
mixed in the concrete plant for the duration required for uniform distribution of the
ingredients to produce a homogeneous mass of consistent colour but for not less
than 1- ½ minutes. The plant shall be operated by trained operators who have
previous experience of running and operation of concrete plants.

At the conclusion of mixing, the plant and all handling parts shall be thoroughly
cleaned out before the concrete remaining in them has had time to set.

No concrete shall be mixed by hand without the Engineers consent, and such
consent will be given only for small quantities under special circumstances.

5.13 Concrete Strength Tests During Work

The Contractor shall provide for test purposes one set of 3 cylinders for any structural
concrete pour involving from 1 to 15 cu. m. of concrete. For concrete pours of more
than 15 cu.m., the Contractor shall provide at least one additional set of 3 cylinders
for each additional 30 cu.m. or fraction thereof. If the average of the strength tests of
the specimens for any portion of the Work falls below the minimum allowable
compressive strength specified, the Engineer will order a change in the proportions
or the water content of the concrete, or both, for the remaining Work at no additional
cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall properly identify all the samples relative to
the portion of concrete Work from which they are taken. Where the results of the
strength tests of the control specimens indicate the concrete placed does not meet
specification requirements or where there is other evidence that the quality of
concrete is below specification requirements, the concrete in place which the
specimens represent will be rejected by the Engineer and the Contractor will remove
and replace the rejected portion of the concrete at this own expense. Strength testing
will be conducted by an authorized laboratory approved by the Engineer. The
expenses involved in testing will be borne by the Contractor.

5.14 Transporting Concrete

Concrete shall be handled form the place of production (Plant) to the place of final
deposit as rapidly as practicable by means which will prevent the segregation or loss
of any strength.

S5 – 45
 Should the Contractor propose to use concrete pumps for the transporting and
placing of concrete he shall submit full details of the equipment and operating
techniques he proposes to use for the approval of the Engineer.
Where concrete is conveyed by chutting or pumping, the plant used shall be
designed to ensure continuous and unimpeded flow in the chute or pipe. The delivery
end of the chute or pump shall be thoroughly flushed with water before and after
each Working period and shall be kept clean. Water used for this purpose shall be
discharged away from any permanent Works.

5.15 Placing and Compacting Concrete

The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer to his proposed
arrangements before commencing concreting operations.

All placing and compacting of concrete shall be carried out under the direct
supervision of a competent member of the Contractor’s staff.

The Contractor shall regard the compacting of the concrete as Work of fundamental
importance the object of which shall be to produce a watertight concrete of maximum
density and strength.

After being mixed, the concrete is to be conveyed to its position in the Work as
quickly as possible, thoroughly rammed into place around the reinforcement, properly
spaded with suitable steel tools against the formWork to ensure a good surface and
dense concrete free from honey-combing, and well tamped to bring any water to the
surface and to prevent air pockets. The formWork shall be tapped to release air
bubbles that may be clinging to it, and all concrete shall be vibrated by means of
electro-mechanical vibrators to make it dense.

Concrete shall be placed while fresh and before it has taken its initial set and in any
event no later than thirty minutes after being mixed.

The method of conveying the concrete from the plant to its place in the Work is
subject to the Engineers approval. No method shall be allowed which encourages
segregation of the coarse and fine particles, nor which involves dropping the
concrete freely from a height of more than 1.5m.

Whenever the placing of concrete is interrupted, the concrete must not on any
account be allowed to tail off to a feather edge, but is to be stopped and thoroughly
consolidated against a properly constructed stop & so shaped as to form an efficient

S5 – 46
 construction joint which is generally to bear right angles to the main reinforcement.
The position & design of such construction joints are to be subject to the Engineers
approval.

Immediately before further concrete is placed, the surfaces of all joints are to be
checked, brushed clean and washed with clean water. It is advisable that the
roughing of the concrete shall be carried out when the concrete is green and not left
until it is set hard.

Before concrete is placed in or against any excavation, such excavation shall be

consolidated and be free from running and standing water, oil and deleterious matter.
Loose earth and other material and in the case of rock excavation loose shattered
rock and fragments shall be removed. The excavation shall be damp but not wet and
special precautions shall be taken to prevent ground water from damaging unset
concrete or causing movement of the concrete.

Where necessary or required by the Engineer, concrete shall be vibrated during

casing by immersion vibrators, capable of producing vibrations at the rate of not less
than 5000 cycles per minute. The Contractor shall take every care to avoid contact
between the vibrators and the reinforcement, and to avoid segregation of the
aggregation through over-vibration.

The vibrators shall be inserted vertically into the concrete at points 500mm apart, and
gradually withdrawn when air bubbles no longer come to the surface.

If, in addition, tapping is applied to the outside of the formWork, great care must be
exercised to avoid damage of the reinforced concrete member.

When placing concrete against horizontal or inclined elements of water stop the latter
shall be lifted and the concrete placed and compacted to a level slightly higher than
the underside of the water stop before releasing the water stop to ensure complete
compaction of the concrete around the water stop.

5.16 Concrete Exposed to Sulphate Attack

Before commencing any concreting on Site the Contractor shall conduct tests to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to determine the concentration of sulphate in the soil and
groundwater in order to determine the concrete exposure class.

S5 – 47
 The Contractor shall ensure that all concrete susceptible to sulphate attack shall be
designed to satisfy the additional requirements for the particular exposure class. This
shall be taken to include all concrete from below finished ground level up to 1.0 m
above finished ground level.

Unless otherwise specified Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) shall be used for
concrete of grade 35 and above in exposure Class 2. Otherwise Sulphate Resisting
Portland Cement (SRPC) shall be used for all other concrete mixes in exposure
Clause and above.

5.17 Concreting in Unfavourable Conditions

The Contractor shall not place concrete in the Permanent Works:-

(a) During heavy rains or dust storms.

(b) When the air temperature is more than 43 C°.
(c) When the air temperature is less than 2 C°.
(d) If the temperature of the concrete on discharge from the mixer is less than
4 C° or more than 32 C°.
(e) When the air temperature exceeds 25 C° without taking precautions and
demonstrating to the approval of the Engineer that the maximum internal
temperature of the concrete within 24 hours after casting in place in unlikely
to be more than 30 C°.
(f) Without the approval of the Engineer if the temperature of the shutters or
reinforcement exceeds 30 C°.

To keep within these limits the Contractor may, among other means, spray
aggregates with water, and use chilled missing water, or add ice directly to the Plant
provided that no ice is present in the mix when discharged from the mixer.

When concreting in hot weather all materials to be used shall be kept in the shade.
Water tanks, mixers and chutes should be shaded, but where this is not possible they
shall be painted white and kept white.

5.18 Concreting Records

A written record of the concrete Works shall be made each day by the Contractor and
kept available for inspection by the Engineer. This record data (diary) shall contain
notes and records of:

S5 – 48
 (a) The names of the Contractor’s engineers who are responsible for the different
phases of the concrete Work, and also the names of their assistants.
(b) The temperatures of air, water, cement, aggregates and concrete, together
with the air humidity and type of weather.
(c) Deliveries to the Site of concrete materials (quantity, brand of cement, etc.)
(d) Inspections carried out, tests performed, etc. and their results.
(e) Times of commencement and completion of different parts of the concrete
Works, and times of erection and striking of forms.
(f) Quantity of cement, fine and coarse aggregate and admixture used for each
section of Work, and the number and kind of test samples taken on these
ingredients and water.

5.19 Reinforcement Steel

Reinforcement steel bars shall conform to ASTM-A/305(Grade 60 steel) or equivalent

B.S. Specifications.

Reinforcing steel shall be free from pitting, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil, grease,
adhering earth or any other materials that may impair the bond between the concrete
and reinforcement or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or disintegration
of the concrete. Adhering cement grout shall no be permitted. Neither the size nor the
length of a bar shall be less than the size or length shown on the drawings.

Bars shall always be bent cold. Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means
used for straightening and re-bending be such as shall not injure the material. No
reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the Work without approval of the
Engineer, whether or not it is partially embedded in hardened concrete. The internal
radii of the bends shall be not less than twice the diameter of the bar for mild steel
and three times the bar diameter for high yield steel.

Reinforcement shall be accurately fixed and maintained by approved means in the

position described on the Drawings. Bars intended to be in contact shall be securely
wired together at all crossing points with No-16 gauge annealed soft-iron wire.
Binders and the like shall tightly embrace the bars with which they are intended to be
in contact and shall be securely wired thereto. Immediately before concreting, the
reinforcement shall be examined for accuracy of placing and cleanliness and
corrected if necessary pacers shall be of cement sand mortar 1:2 or steel or other
material approved by the Engineer. Plastic spacer blocks shall not be use in the
Works.

S5 – 49
The Contractor shall adopt effective measures to ensure that reinforcement remains
accurately in position during the placing consolidation and setting of the concrete.

In slabs provided with two or more layers of reinforcement the parallel layers of steel
shall be supported in position by the use of steel chairs. Steel Spacers shall be
placed at each chair to support layers of reinforcement from the concrete blinding or
formWork.

Except where otherwise shown on the Drawings the length of lap joints shall be not
less than 40 times the diameter of the larger diameter bar.

Fabric reinforcement when laid adjacent to other sections of reinforcement or when

lapped shall have a minimum lap of 300mm for the main wires and 150mm for the
transverse wires. The use of off-cuts will not be allowed.

Except where otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings the concrete cover to
the nearest reinforcement exclusive of plaster or other decorative finish and concrete
blinding shall be as follows:

i) For external Work and for Work against earth faces and in water retaining
structures – 50 mm.
ii) For internal Work in non-water retaining structures:
(a) For beams and columns - 50 mm to the main steel and in no place
less than 40 mm to the bar nearest the outside wall.
(b) For slab reinforcement – 25mm to all bars or the diameter of the
largest bar whichever is the greater.

The cutting, bending and fixing of the reinforcement shall be part of the Work under
the Unit Rate stated in the Bid Schedule for reinforcing steel furnished and placed in
the Work.

Reinforcement projecting from Work being concreted or already concreted, shall not
be bent out of its correct position unless approved by the Engineer, and shall be
protected from deformation or other damage. Welding of reinforcement bars, except
in the cause of welded steel fabric, shall not be permitted. Exposed reinforcement
bars intended for future extensions shall be protected from corrosion and other
hazards.

S5 – 50
 Chapter – 6

MILD STEEL PIPES FOR WELL CASING

6.1 Scope

Furnishing of tubewell casing shall consists of all work required in connection with the
furnishing of casing pipes and screens for tubewells and shall include, but not be
limited to, fabrication, inspection and testing at the manufacturer’s plant, delivery to
the Site storage and transporting to tubewell locations. Tubewell casing shall
comprise upper well casing (UWC) as a pump housing and all lower well components
together with all couplings, fitting ready for placing in the borehole Tubewll casing will
be installed in an area of high temperature and low humidity.

6.2 Definitions

The following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to
them except where the context otherwise requires:

‘Pressure Pipe’ shall mean pipe in which the nominal internal working pressure
exceeds 3 meters of water (0.3 bar) and such other pipe work as may be designated.

“Pipes” shall mean straight tubes having plain ends or ends shaped to from joints.

“Flexible Pipes” shall mean pipes having a specific stiffness of E” = (E I) D3 of less

then 11 000 N/m2 per unit length of pipe.

Where E = Young’s Modulus of pipe wall material

I = Moment of Inertia of pipe wall per unit length
D = Pipe diameter

“Internal” shall mean those parts of pipes which are to be in contact with the water
being conveyed.

“raw water” is water from a river, lake, well field, watercourse or other source before it
has received any treatment other than that inherent in pumping and conveyance.

6.3 Transport of Pipes

Any vehicle on which pipes are transported shall have a body of such length that the
pipes do not overhang. Large pipes shall be placed on cradles and the loads properly

S5 – 51
 secured during transit. The pipe shall be handled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Additional precautions shall be taken to avoid deformation of flexible pipes. To

maintain their circular cross-section internal struts shall be fitted in the pipes after
curing where pipes are cement mortar lined – and shall be retained in position until
laying and jointing have been completed. At least two struts shall be used in each full
length of pipe. They shall be adjustable in length having the ends suitably shaped.

Details of the proposed strutting system shall submitted to the Engineer for approval
and if required by the Engineer, the method of strutting shall be demonstrated and
tested on Site.

Wide non-abrasive or other approved slings shall be used and all hooks and dogs
and other metal devices shall be well padded. Hooks engaged on the inner wall
surface at pipe ends shall not be used. Steadying ropes shall be employed. The
position of lifting slings shall ensure that stresses and tendency towards deformation
in the pipes are kept at a minimum.

Pipe handling equipment shall be maintained in good repair and any equipment
which in the opinion of the Engineer may cause damage to the pipes shall be
discarded.

Under no circumstances shall pipes be dropped, be allowed to strike on another, be

rolled freely or dragged along the ground.

6.4 Storage of Pipe Material

Pipes shall be stored raised off the ground, and shall be carefully supported,
cushioned and wedged. Pipes shall not rest directly on one another and shall not be
stacked more than four pipes high or two pipes high in the case of pipes of 500 mm
diameter or over. Special care shall be taken to ensure that flexible pipes are cradled
and supported in a manner that prevents any distortion of the pipes.

Where items to be stored have a limited shelf life or require special storage
arrangements, the method of storage shall be to the approval of the Engineer and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
End covers and protection shall not be removed until incorporation of the pipes.

S5 – 52
6.5 Casing Materials and Composition

All casing pipe shall be new and the product of a manufacture currently engaged in
the commercial production of waterwell casing or wellscreen. Material not definitely
specified shall be of the quality regularly used by the manufacturer in the product
sold by him on the commercial market.

It is proposed to use mild steel for the pump housings of all tubewells and for the
blank lower well components. Screens shall be of brass, comprising continuous
wedge shape slots. Components shall be originally manufactured and joints formed
so that assembled strings meet the straightness requirements of BS 879 for well
casing.

Steel well casing shall comply with BS 879, API 5L or similar approved. Base pipe
shall be seamless or Electric Resistance Welded (ERW).

The Contractor should furnish, and subsequently certify, for all casing offered details
of the chemical composition, form of construction, mechanical properties, including
Young’s Modulus and Poison’s Ratio of blank casing pipe. Source countries and any
other information as the Engineer may require to evaluate submissions and any
offers relating to use of casing materials other than those described herein. The
decision of the Engineer for acceptance or rejection of any alternative offer will be
final.

6.6 Strength and Dimension of Casing and Screen

All casing pipe shall be manufactured in nominal pipe sizes. The minimum wall
thickness shall be such so as to meet the strength requirement set in Table-6.1.

Table 6.1: Dimension and Strength of Casing and Wellscreen

External
Nominal Minimum
Hydrostatic Axial Axial
Pipe Wall
Type Collapse Tension
Diameter Compression Thickness
Pressure (tons)
(inch) (mm)
(psi)
12 Blank 140 18 13 8
10 Blank 160 18 13 7

While Table-6.1 shows nominal diameters, the following restrictions shall apply to
actual diameters:

S5 – 53
 a) The clear internal diameter or the blank and slotted casing components shall
not be less than the nominal diameter.
b) The full external diameter of components over couplings shall not be more
than the nominal diameter plus 2.5 inches.
c) The maximum ovality allowance shall 10 percent of the casing wall thickness
measured as the difference between principal diameters.

The portion of casing to be supplied in each nominal length shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer before final order for manufacture is placed.

6.7 Wellscreen Slots and Open Area

All wellscreen shall be a purpose built for use in water wells. Wellscreen shall have
smooth, sharp-edged slots free of burrs, chipped edges, or broken areas on the
interior or exterior surfaces of the pipe. The slots shall have a nominal width of 1.5
mm or as otherwise ordered by the Engineer. The open area of screen shall not be
less than 10 percent.

There shall be no internal projections that may hamper the use of swabs or jetting
tools during well development.

For shipping and handling any exposed spigot threads shall be fitted with thread
protectors of a type identical in form to casing socket threads. Spacers and
component separators shall be used such that after shipping and storage for up to six
months components shall not suffer diametric distortion and shall still be able to meet
the straightness requirements of BS 879.

6.8 Couplings and Reducers

Couplings and Reducers for casing pipes may be threaded or welded, of a design to
be approved by the Engineer. Each coupling attached to the pipe section shall have
a wall thickness and construction such that the circumferential strength of the
coupled unit shall not be lower than the section of casing elsewhere along its length.

All threaded pipe sections shall be field connected by the use of threaded couplings.
Thread geometry shall conform with the applicable sections of ASTM Standard D-
1694 or equivalent. The threaded couplings shall be such that the minimum wall
thickness under the thread is not less than the minimum wall thickness of the length
elsewhere.

S5 – 54
 Where required the pump housing casing shall be connected to the lower well casing
by means of a Tampered Reducer. The taper shall run at 1 in 6.

6.9 Wellscreen with Threaded Connections

Where wellscreen has to be coupled to blank LWC, threaded connections would be

preferred to welded. Any wellscreen to be coupled to a welded connections shall be
fitted with thread to mild steel weld ring crossover such that the filed weld shall
between two mild steel weld rings.

Suitable approved threading compound shall be used on all threaded connections.

6.10 Bail Plug

A two feet blank casing section with closed bottom will be required as a bail plug for
all wells. For all tubewells, the Contractor shall install a concrete plug using sulphate
resistant cement as shown in the relevant Drawings in the bottom of each bail plug.
The plug shall not be less than 9 inches in depth and shall be fixed to the tubewell
casing by steel cross bars or other means as may be approved by the Engineer.

Bail plugs may be supplied integral with a screen section.

6.11 Welded Joints For Steel Pipe

Welded joints shall in general be butt welded externally. Lap welded sleeve type
joints welded inside and outside the pipe may be used in certain circumstances with
the approval of the Engineer.

Welded joints in steel pipes shall be carried out manually by the metal arc welded
process complying with AWWA Standard C206.

Before starting the welding of pipe joints in the Works, the Contractor shall submit for
the Engineer’s approval details of the plant, methods and materials he proposes to
use, including make and size of electrodes, number of runs, currents strength and
arrangements for air testing of individual joints.

Welding shall only be carried out by welders approved by the Engineer, each welder
shall identify his work by means of stenciled mark.

All parts to be welded, having loose scale, slag, rust, paint and other foreign matter
shall be removed by means of a wore brush and shall be left clean and dry. All scale
and slag shall be removed from each weld run when it is completed. Pipes

S5 – 55
 manufactured with longitudinal or spiral weld shall be lined up before jointing so that
these welds are at least 15 apart around the joint circumference.

For pipes larger than 900 mm diameter a triple run convex fillet weld shall be used.
For pipes of 900 mm diameter or less a double run convex fillet weld shall be used.
The minimum leg length of the fillet as deposited is to be equal to the full thinness of
the pipe wall. The actual throat depth shall not be grater than 9/10th and not less than
7/10th of the minimum leg lengths as deposited. The depositing of the weld metal
shall be carried out in such a manner as to ensure that all the welds have adequate
root fusion impurities. The surface of the weld shall have an even contour with
regular finish and shall indicate proper fusion with the parent metal. All salg shall be
thoroughly removed after depositing each run of welding by light hammering with a
chipping hammer followed by wire brushing. Any welds showing cracks or other
cavities or in which the weld metal tends to overlap onto the parent metal without
proper fusion or containing any other defects whatsoever shall be cut out and
rewarded to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense.

Where the Engineer requires that two plain ended pipes shall be joints by a welded
joint the gap between the two ends shall not exceed 75 mm. An external steel sleeve
collar, of a thickness not less than that of the pipe itself and approximately 300 mm in
length shall be placed centrally over the two ends to be joints and the end of each
pipe shall then be fillet welded to the sleeves collar in accordance with the above
procedure.

6.12 Welder Performance Test

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s approval the names of persons whom
he proposes to employ as welders with evidence that, as a minimum preliminary
qualification, they have passed the Qualifying Tests prescribed in Clause 11 of BS
2633 and possess Certificates from an Independent Testing Authority. The Engineer
may further require any such person to perform satisfactory test welds under Site
conditions and on pipes similar to those for use in the work, before approving his
employment as a welder. The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date list of welders
approved by the Engineer and if ordered by the Engineer he shall remove from the
approved welder whose workmanship, as demonstrated by the results of air pressure
tests on individual welded joints, is below a reasonable standard of quality of
consistency in the Engineer’s opinion.

6.13 Application

S5 – 56
All welding and in particular the deposition of the root run, will be subject to stringent
examination by the Engineer. The Contractor shall give adequate advance advice of
welding operations and provide test equipments for the welds. Radiographic
inspection of welds shall be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
in accordance with BS 4515 or API 1104 to a maximum of 10% of the total run of
weld. Each joint to be radiographer shall be cleaned , and weld spatter removed. Any
defective weld shall be repaired by approved means or cut out if necessary. If in the
opinion of the Engineer. Excessive repair work is necessary, the radiographic
inspection may be increased beyond 10% of the total run of the weld.

S5 – 57
 PART - 3

CIVIL, WATER SUPPLY, ELECTRICAL &

MECHANICAL WORKS
 Chapter – 1

GENERAL

1.1 Purpose and Location of the Works

The purpose of the Project is to provide water supply to the Cholistan area by
installing fourteen (14) No new tube wells at Kudwala, laying rising main and
constructing IPS’s & LLR and other allied works in Cholistan area.

1.2 Description of the Works

The scope of this Contract comprises of:

Sr. No. Item Qty

1 Source Investigations 14 No
2 Tube wells boring and conversion 14 No
3 Interconnection of Tube wells (6 to 12 inch
01 Job
dia)
4 Pump House (12’ x 12’) 14 No
5 Electrification, pumps and diesel generator 01 Job
6 Rising Main
“B” Class (6 to 12 inch) length = 201,600 ft 251,300 Ft
“C” Class (4,8 &10 inch) length = 49,700 ft
7 Ground Storage Tanks (200,000 Gallons) 02 No
8 Generator room with other allied works 01 job
9 Low Level Reservoirs (LLRs) with other
10 No
allied works
10 Operator Rooms at LLRs 10 No
11 Staff quarter at tube well source 03 No
12 Control Room & Monitoring Center 02 No
13 Shed for Animals 10 No
14 Shed on Troughs 10 No
15 Toyota Hilux ( 4 x4) 02 No

Honda CG 125 10 No
16 Tractor Trolley with water Bowsers 03 No
17 Boundary wall with gate around IPS 02 No

1–1
1.3 Mobilization for Construction

The Scope of Works to be done under “Mobilization for Construction of Works” shall
consist of the following items:

(a) shipment of Contractor’s Equipment to the Site;

(b) mobilization of Contractor’s personnel and labour at the Site;
(c) provision of camps in compliance with the requirements of Clause SP.14;
(d) provision of such administrative and field offices as the Contractor considers
necessary for his organization;
(e) provision of Workshops, warehouses, sheds and storage yards required by
the Contractor for the proper and sufficient execution of the Works;
(f) arrangement for supply of water for use in construction, including installation
of necessary wells, pumps, pipes, storage tanks, and suitable arrangements
for the delivery of water at various points of requirement; and
(g) provision of such roads as may be deemed necessary by the Contractor for
the proper execution of the Works.

1.4 Duty of Employer

The Employer will be responsible for the design of the Permanent Works and award
of other Contract associated with the Works.

1.5 Standards and Codes

Except where otherwise specified plant materials and Workmanship shall comply
with the requirements of the relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice
(hereinafter referred to as BS or CP) issued by the British Standards Institution, ISO
and Amercian Standards. Other authoritative, who ensure an equal or higher quality
than the standards and codes specified subject to the Engineer’s prior review and
written approval. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed
alternative standards must be fully described in writing by the Contractor and
submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Contractor
desires the engineer’s approval In the event the Engineer determines that such
proposed deviations do not ensure equal or higher quality, the Contractor shall
comply with the standards specified in the Bid Documents.

All Standards used will be the current version as available on 1st January 2007. A
Contractor proposing to use alternative of specified Standards and Codes shall

1–2
 submit the alternative version to the Engineer for approval in accordance with the
requirements outlined in the above paragraph.

The Contractor shall obtain at least one copy of each approved standard and
reference Work which is referred to in the Specification, and of each other standard
which applies to materials which are being supplied to, or Workmanship executed on,
the Works. These Standards and Reference Works shall be supplied to the Engineer
within 90 days of the Engineer’s Order to commence the Works and will also be
available to the Contractor at all reasonable times.

All materials and Workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by an approved
standard shall be of such kind as is used in first class Work and suitable to the
climate in the Project Area. Where, the requirements of any such standard
specification or regulation conflict with the requirements of the specification or any
item on the Drawings, then the Contractor should refer to the Engineer for
clarification before proceeding with that section of the Works.

1.6 Drawings

Drawings which form part of the Contract are included in the Volume of the Contract
Documents.

1.7 Record Drawings

Within 28 days of the issue of a Certificate of Completion, the Contractor shall

provide Record Drawings in black line on transparent film and in AutoCAD format in
CD. These Drawings shall include:

(a) General arrangement drawings of the Permanent Works.

(b) Project Components drawings shall be drawn to a horizontal scale of 1:1250
or 1:500 and vertical 1:200 or 1:100.

The title block shall be that of the Engineer responsible for the supervision.

The Employer will supply one velograph copy of the issued drawings, which the
Contractor may use to prepare the Records Drawings.

1–3
1.8 Programme

Before commencing the Works the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his
approval a programme showing the order in which he proposes to carry out the
Works. The programme shall be in the form of a bar chart, or any other form as may
be agreed by the Engineer, and shall clearly indicate the followings:

(a) The sequence of each activity, the proposed start and completion dates of
each activity, the rate of progress and the cumulative quantity or percentage
of Work expected to be achieved on each activity by the end of each month.
(b) Dates by which major drawings requiring the Engineer’s approval will be
submitted. A period of three weeks shall be allowed from the date of receipt of
these drawings for such approval.
(c) The time allocated for Work by others, including those of the Employer and by
utility undertakings:

Sufficient space should be provided in the programme for recording the actual
progress against the programmed progress for each activity.

The programme shall be submitted with details of the followings:

(i) Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) of Resource and Activities.

(ii) A statement giving the numbers and categories of supervisory and technical
staff and skilled and unskilled Workers to be employed on the Works.
(iii) A list and type details of major Constructional Plant (including vehicles), which
the Contractor proposes to employ on the Works.
(iv) Details of the Contractor’s methods of Working for all operations.
(v) A statement giving the proposals for location or locations and sizes of base
camps, accommodation, offices, Workshops and stores.
(vi) Details of the programme for the Works from the date of receipt of the
Engineer’s order to commence the Works including a complete resource
allocation showing the number of units and allotted times for each unit of
Constructional Plant, materials and labour allocated to each part of the
Works.
(vii) Details of Contractors proposals for Work affecting private property and the
dates during which the relevant Work will be undertaken.

The Contractor shall make due allowance in his programme for the provision of any
temporary diversions of roads and existing channels which may be necessary.

1–4
1.10 Meetings and Reports

Representatives of the Contractor, approved by the Engineer, shall attend monthly

progress meetings on Site or at the offices of the Employer. In addition, approved
representatives of the Contractor shall attend further meetings in cases of
emergencies or for other reasons when called upon by the Employer.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer Daily, Bi-week, and a Monthly Reports
on his progress in the performance of the Contract. The Monthly Report shall include
a copy of the approved programme with the current progress for each activity shown.

1.11 Temporary Works

Not less than 14 days before commencing any portion of the Works, the Contractor
shall if ordered; submit to the Engineer for his approval complete drawings and
calculations for all Temporary Works which the Contractor may propose for the
construction of that part of the Works.

Notwithstanding approval by the Engineer of any design for the Temporary Works,
the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for their efficiency, security and
maintenance and for all obligations and risks in regard to such Temporary Works
specified or implied in the Contract.

1.12 Water and Electricity Supply

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for the supply of water and
electricity for the purposes of the Works.
Water and wastewater derived from the construction, testing and completion of the
Works shall be disposed of clear of the Site to the satisfaction of the Engineer so as
to cause no damage or complaint.

1.13 Latrines

Throughout the period of construction of the Works the Contractor shall provide,
maintain and cleanse suitable and sufficient latrines for use by his employees; he
shall ensure that his employees do not foul the Site but make proper use of the
latrines.

Where practicable the latrines shall be connected to the nearest sewer, or if this is
not practicable the Contractor shall provide an adequately sized septic tank and soak
away.

1–5
1.14 Camps and Accommodation

The Contractor shall construct and maintain a camp to provide living accommodation
for his staff and operatives. The location of the Contractor’s camp shall be to the
Engineer’s approval.

The Contractor shall be responsible for and provide all services to the living quarters
and shall see to it that all sanitary laws and other laws and regulations in force in the
area are completed with. The Contractor shall be responsible for and provide all
necessary fencing and security to these areas.

1.15 Photographs

The Contractor shall supply digital pictures on CDs and uncounted color positive
prints not less than 250 x 200 mm of such portions of the Works, in progress and
completed, as may be directed by the Engineer and specified herein. The prints shall
not be retouched. No prints of these photographs shall be supplied to any other
person without the written permission of the Engineer.

If so directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall supply transparencies and colour
prints.

The photographs shall be of two categories:

(a) Progress Photographs.

(b) Record photographs.
(c) Video Pictures of all major activities and Meetings.

Both categories of photographs shall be properly referenced to the approval of the

Engineer, and on the front and back of each print shall be recorded the date of the
photograph, the direction in which the camera was facing, an identifying description
of the subject and the reference.

Photographs taken for record purposes as ordered by the Engineer or as specified

herein shall be supplied with three prints, having the reverse of one subscribed with
the signatures of the Contractor and the Engineer (or their authorized
representatives) for the purpose of attestation. If required, the Contractor may at his
own expense having an additional print similarly attested for his retention.

1–6
 The taking of photographs of the Works by the Contractor for any other purpose
whether for use in Punjab or Pakistan shall not be carried out without written
approval from the Engineer.

1.16 Contamination of Water Supplies

Before any person is engaged on Work involving a risk to the purity of potable water
supplies or deemed to involve such a risk by the Engineer, he shall be tested to
indicate that he is not a carrier of typhoid or other water-borne disease and he shall
be informed of the dangers of contamination. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
of any person who has been certified by a doctor as suffering from an illness
associated with the looseness of the bowls, and no such person shall be employed
on such Work until the employer’s medical advisor is satisfied that it is safe for him to
be so employed.

1.17 Climatic Data

The Contractor shall take account of the climatic conditions at the Site of the Works
both in the design of all plant and equipment, and the construction of the Works.

The following information is provided as a guide to the climatic conditions likely to be

encountered on the Site to assist the Contractor in ensuring that the Works are
adequate to withstand the effects of the weather, but this shall not relieve him of his
responsibility under Clause 11 of the General Conditions of Contract.

(a) Monthly average temperatures:

- Maximum 39 degree C
- Minimum 16 degree C

(b) Extreme Temperatures

- 49 degree C in June
- 2 degree C January

(c) Annual Average Rainfall:

100 to 200 mm is Average Annual Rainfall per year the majority falling in the
monsoon months of July and August. On average there are 10 rainy days per
year.

(d) Cholistan is relatively low humid area

1–7
 The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to the accuracy of the above climatic data,
which are based on limited records.
1.18 Level

The Contractor shall provide levels for the ground level, finished casing level and
pump house floor to a system of bench marks previously established in the area in
connection with the Project. For the purpose of this Contract, the datum to be used
shall be a bench mark for which the Engineer will ascribe a value prior to the
commencement of the Works.

1.19 Units of Measurement

All designs, drawings, specifications and manuals shall use FPS units and all
measurements dimensions and performance data shall be quoted in those units.

1.20 Languages

All drawings, instructions, signs, notices, nameplates, etc for use in the operation and
maintenance of the completed Works shall be in English.

Warning signs shall be in Urdu and English.

1.21 Contract Signboard

The Contractor shall supply and erect one or more Contract signboards at locations
to be specified by the Engineer. The signboards shall be of substantial construction
to the approval of the Engineer and the lettering in both English and Urdu shall be
black on a white background. The layout and dimensions of the signboards shall be
in accordance with the relevant Standard Drawing.

1.22 Advertising

The Contractor shall not use any part of the Site for any form of advertising without
the prior written approval of the Engineer.

1.23 Safety Regulations on Site

The Contractor shall comply with all statutory and other regulations concerning the
safety and security of his Site staff, operatives, staff of the Employer and Engineer
and members of the Public, as a result of his operations. He shall obtain copies of all
the relevant regulations and shall make them available on Site for inspection by the
Engineer.

1–8
1.24 Protection of Existing Installation

The Contractor shall execute the Works in such a manner as to avoid interruption
and interference with the operation of the existing construction activities, to minimize
disturbance to those living or occupying properties near the Work and to all existing
services within and adjacent to existing facilities. Access to the existing facilities shall
be maintained, to the satisfaction of the Engineer at all times.

The Contractor shall apply to the Engineer in writing at least 28 days before starting
any Work which involves interference with the existing structures, equipment, etc or
otherwise interfere with or interrupt the Employer’s normal construction activities. The
Contractor shall not execute such Work until he has received permission to proceed
in writing from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall ensure that no earth, debris or any type of waste material on
public or private roads or rights of way as a result of the Works and all vehicles
leaving the Site shall be cleaned accordingly.

1.25 Protection of Existing Public and Private Services

The Contractor shall notify all public authorities, utility companies and private owners
of proposed Works, which will affect then not less than one week before commending
the Works.

The Contractor shall adequately protect, uphold, maintain and prevent damage to all
services and shall not interfere with their operation without the prior consent of the
public authorities, utility companies, private owners, or the Engineer as appropriate.

If any damage to services results from the execution of the Works, the Contractor
shall immediately:

(i) Notify the Engineer and appropriate public authority, utility company or private
owner.
(ii) Make arrangements for the damage to be made good without delay to the
satisfaction of the public authorities, company or private owner as
appropriate. The Contractor shall be liable for all costs for making good such
damage.

The Engineer may issue instructions or make other such arrangements as he deems
necessary, to repair rapidly and essential services damaged during the execution of

1–9
 the Contract, such arrangement shall not affect any liability to pay for making good
the damage, and Contractor shall pay all costs due to this damage.

1.26 Permits

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for obtaining all necessary permits, Licence
and permissions required for the execution of the Works, prior to the commencement
of the Works.

1.27 Location of the Tubewells Sites

The location of Tube Wells will be as shown on the plans. With the approval of the
Engineer, the position of the proposed Tube Wells may be reviewed within the
boundaries of the Project Site.

1.28 Notice of Operations

The Contractor shall give full and complete notice of all important operations to the
Engineer.

1.29 Sampling

The Contractor shall provide for the approval of the Engineer samples of all the
construction materials and manufactured items required for the Permanent Works, if
ordered. All samples rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the Site. All
approved items shall be stored on the Site by the Contractor for the duration of the
Contract under conditions which will prevent deterioration of the approved sample.
Any material or manufactured item subsequently delivered to the Site for
incorporation in the Permanent Works shall be at least equal to the approved
sample.

1.30 Responsibility for Sampling and Testing

It will be in financial and otherwise the responsibility of the Contractor to collect

sampling, testing and the costs thereof under the terms of the Condition of Contract.

1 – 10
 Chapter – 2

THE SITE

2.1 Site

The Site pertaining to this Contract shall include only the areas required for different
package components like Pump House, Staff Quarters, Rising Mains, Intermediate
Pumping Stations, Low Level Reservoirs and the Contractor’s Working Area adjacent
to Site, within or outside the Cholistan area. The Contractor shall not use the Site for
any purpose not required by the Contract.

The Contactor’s Working Area as required, shall be formed adjacent to the package
Components. The Contractor shall at all time confine his Working operations to within
that Working Area identified and the general movement of the Contractor’s
Equipment to within the aforementioned boundaries. The Contractor shall at no time
restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The use of the area within the Site boundaries shall be governed by the conditions
set out in this chapter. Any Works conducted outside the boundary shall be governed
by these conditions as well as the additional conditions set out in Clause 2.02 of this
Specification.

2.2 Areas outside the Site

It is the Contractors responsibility to make provision for all Working areas, in addition
to the area defined above, all “accommodation” required by him as defined in this
Specification.

For the purposes of this Clause, “accommodation” shall be deemed to include

housing, offices, Workshops, warehouses, and storage areas.

In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or
additional accommodation required by him or any tip for the disposal of surplus
materials, or any borrow pit or quarry, he shall obtain the written consent of the
owner, occupier or authority having charge of the land in which such wayleave,
accommodation or tip is situated and shall make a record agreed by the owner,
occupier or authority as aforesaid of the condition of the surface of that land before
entering thereon.

2–1
 The Contractor shall permit the Employer and the Engineer and any person
authorized by the Employer or the Engineer access for the purposes of the Contract
to any such special or temporary wayleave or additional accommodation.

In the event of the Contractor making use of any special or temporary wayleave or
additional accommodation make available to him for the purpose of the Contract, the
land in which such wayleave or accommodation is situated shall be deemed to be
part of the Site as defined in Clause 2.01 hereof.

Under these circumstances the Contractor shall form a Working Area incorporating
the special or temporary wayleave or additional accommodation. The Contractor
shall at all times confine his activities to within this Working Area. The Contractor
shall at no time restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. On completion of the Works in this area, the Contractor shall reinstate the
area to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.3 Use of Land for Construction Facilities

Land controlled by the Employer for the purpose of the Works will be made available
for field offices, construction equipment, storage yards, and other facilities required
for construction operations under the contract.

The location, construction, maintenance, operation and removal of the Contractor’s

construction facilities on government land shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.

In the event of land controlled by the Employer and made available to the Contractor
is insufficient for the Contractor’s needs, then the Contractor shall, in accordance
with Clause SP-02 make all necessary additional arrangements.

2.4 Use of Public Highways

The Contractor shall ensure that roads and thoroughfares used by him in any way
are not dirtied as a result of such use and in the event of their becoming thus dirtied
in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor shall take all necessary steps to clean
them, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall at no time restrict or impede the free flow of traffic, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

2–2
 The Contractor shall obtain all permits required for carrying out the Works on public
roads and shall liaise with the appropriate authorities with regard to the timing and
execution of the road Works.

The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining temporary road
diversions for the duration of the road Works. The road shall be kept open at tall
times during the road Works period, and the Work shall be carried out in such a
manner as to minimize the disruption to traffic.

2.5 Access across the Site

The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed by the Engineer of the condition of
the surfaces of any private lands or of any public cultivated or maintained lands over
which access to the Site lies before any Work is commenced to make them suitable
for access and he shall keep such surfaces in a reasonable state of cleanliness and
repair during the execution of the Works. On the termination of the Contractor’s use
of such access he shall restore the surfaces to a condition at least equal to that
existing before his first entry on them.

The Contractor shall not first entry any part of the Site in private lands without the
prior permission of the Engineer and without first having obtained the consent of the
owner of such lands.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times, vehicular and pedestrian
access to all properties, private and public, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and no
impede access to any properties.

2.6 Maintenance of Existing Roads within the Site

The Contractor shall not run tracked or unstrung vehicles on surfaced roads without
the written approval of the Engineer who may require that planking or some other
protective material be used to protect the road surface.

2.7 Clearance of the Site

The Contractor shall clear the Site to the extent required by the Engineer for
checking the setting-out. Clearance of the Site shall also include the demolition and
removal of all articles, objects and obstructions which are expressly required to be
cleared. The Contractor shall not clear the Site of any structure without the prior
written permission of the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that the parts of the

2–3
 Site to be occupied by the Permanent Works are clear, and shall maintain the
remainder of the Site as may be required for access and Temporary Works areas.

The Contractor shall remove the material arising from such clearance and dispose of
it in a manner and at a location, on or off the Site, to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall fill and make good with appropriate materials those cavities and
losses of soil which result from clearing the parts of the Site not subsequently to be
occupied by the Permanent Works.

2.8 Condition of Site

The Contractor shall maintain the Site in a clean, tidy and healthy conditions for the
whole of such time as he is responsible for the care of the Works.

The Works shall be kept in a dry state and any water entering the Works from any
source shall be collected and discharged in a safe manner approved by the
Engineer.

2.9 Reinstatement of the Site

On successful completion of each package component, the Contractor shall clear all
temporary access roads, fill and make good with appropriate materials all areas
disturbed during the Works and reinstate the roads, footpaths and other areas to their
original condition, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.10 Site Records

The Contractor shall make records of the position and extent in the excavations of
every type of service, stratum and obstruction encountered during the construction of
the Works, including samples taken and results of tests on such samples.

2.11 Access for the Employer and Engineer

The Contractor shall permit the Employer and the Engineer and any person
authorized by the Employer or the Engineer including Workmen of the Employer,
other Contractors or utility undertakings access for the purposes of the Contract to all
areas of the Site and to any additional accommodation or temporary wayleaves for
the duration of the Contract period.

2–4
2.12 Access to the Works

Before the commencement of any part of the Works, the Contractor shall make
temporary access tracks including all necessary temporary diversions and bridge
Works to the part of the Site concerned, both for the Contractor’s own access and for
the maintenance of public access, all to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall maintain such access tracks in a condition suitable for safe and easy passage
of the Equipment, vehicles, and pedestrians until these tracks are no longer required
for the purposes of the Contract. Such access may be by other Contractors
employed upon the Project.

The Contractor shall make a record to be agreed by the Engineer of the condition of
the surfaces of any private lands or any public cultivated or maintained lands which
access for the Site lies before use for access and shall keep such surfaces in a
reasonable state of cleanliness and repair during the execution of the Works. On the
termination of the Contractor’s use of such access he shall restore the surfaces in
accordance with Clause 33.1 of the Conditions of Contract.

2.13 Haul Routes

The operations of the Contractor on haul routes shall be in accordance with the
General Conditions. The hauling of materials and other intra-job hauling and
transportation over public highways, roads and bridges shall be in compliance with
local regulations. Where haul routes cross public highways or roads, the Contractor
shall provide barricades, flagmen and other necessary precautions for safety.

2.14 Site Operations

2.14.1 General

The Site may be located through and adjacent to tracts of improved property. Where
access to the Works is adjacent to, cross, or disturbed improvement such as
gardens, trees, irrigation and drainage facilities, crops and cultivated fields, the
Contractor shall conduct his operations so as to minimize disturbance to or
destruction of improvements, crops or property and to interfere as little as possible
with the operation of cultivators.

2.14.2 Restoration of Disturbed Land

The Contractor shall be responsible for restoration, to the satisfaction of the

Engineer, the surface of all lands disturbed by the Work to a condition at least equal
to that obtaining before his first entry on them.

2–5
2.15 Utilities, Transmission and Telephone Lines

The Employer is responsible to provide information on locations of utility,

transmission and telephone lines to the Contractor at time of tendering. The
Contractor shall exercise due care during construction to ensure that no damage is
done to such lines. The Employer is responsible for providing the reference data
required for buried utility locations. The Employer will indemnify the Contractor
against all the claims for damages and the costs of repairs to the utility, transmission
and telephone lines arising out of the Contractor’s operation, excluding any claims
arising from willful damage or negligence by the Contractor.

2.16 Grazing Livestock

The Contractor shall provide reasonable care by hiring watchmen to ensure that
livestock are not allowed within the construction right of way during operations but he
will not be responsible under this contract for any damages, injury or death of
livestock resulting from the construction operations.

Fences and walls which must be crossed and which were in good condition
beforehand shall be repaired by the Contractor, if asked to do so by the Engineer. If
there are animals in the field the fences must be reconstructed immediately after
crossing.

2.17 Safety

High standards of safety for men and machines must be observed at all times as per
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards. Contractors shall
comply with existing Pakistani laws. Moving parts of the machines shall be protected
by proper guards. Casual observers shall not be permitted close to excavating
operations.

2.18 Disposal of Waste Material

2.18.1 General

Waste material including, but not restricted to, refuse, garbage, sanitary wastes,
industrial wastes, and oil and other petroleum products shall be disposed of by the
Contractor. Disposal of waste materials shall be by burying, where burial of such
materials is approved by the Engineer; by burning, where burning of such materials is
permitted in accordance with local laws; or by removal from the construction area to
a disposal are approved by the relevant local authority.

2–6
2.18.2 Disposal of Material by Burning

All materials to be burned shall be piled in designated burning areas in such a

manner as will cause the least fire hazard. Burning shall be thorough and complete
and all charred pieces remaining after burning, except for scattered small pieces,
shall be removed from the construction area and disposed of. The Contractor shall,
at all times, take special precaution to prevent fire from spreading beyond the piles
being burned and shall be liable for any damage by his burning operations.

2.18.3 Disposal of Material by Removal

Disposal of material by removal from the construction area be accomplished prior to

the completion of any Section of the Works. All materials removed except trees, shall
become the property of the Contractor. Materials to be disposed of by dumping shall
be hauled to an approved dump. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
make any necessary arrangements.

2.18.4 Trees

Trees and bushes cleared from the construction area shall be placed at the edge of
the construction area or right of way. The use and disposal of the wood be arranged
by the Employer. Where large trees are to be removed, then the Engineer will
determine how the trees are to be cut and removed and at the same time try not to
impede the progress of the Works. All trees, trees roots and bush not required by the
Employer will be burned or removed from the construction area at the Contractor’s
expense.

2.19 Landscape Preservation

The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve the natural landscape and shall
conduct his construction operation so as to prevent any unnecessary destruction,
scarring, or defacing of the natural surroundings in the vicinity of the Work.

2.20 Prevention of Water Contamination

The Contractor shall comply with applicable regulations concerning the control and
abatement of water contamination.

The Contractor’s construction activities shall be performed by methods that will

prevent entrance, or accidental spillage, of solid matter, contaminants, debris and
other objectionable pollutants and wastes into flowing streams, flowing or dry water

2–7
 courses, lakes and underground water sources; sanitary wastes shall be disposed of
on land by burial at approved Sites or by other approved methods.

2.21 Preservation of Graveyards

The Contractor shall not trespass, excavate in or otherwise disturb graveyards

whether shown on Drawings or not. In the case of unidentified graveyards or burial
Sites, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing and the Engineer shall make
such design changes as required.

2–8
 Chapter – 3

EXCAVATION, FILLING, BACKFILLING & DISPOSAL

3.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section consists of excavating, in all types of soil, lifting,
transportation and disposal of the excavated material, back-fill and fill for building
foundations, and under floors including all incidental Work necessary for excavation
to the required depth and dimensions and in accordance with the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The Work shall be carried out in complete conformity with
the specifications set-forth hereunder.

All fill or refill around structures, i.e. within the slopes and limits of the established
lines for excavation for the structures and below the natural surface level, shall be
defined as "Back Filling".

All fill or refill (from the excavated earth at Site) about structures, i.e. above the
natural surface level shall be defined as “Filling Under Floors or Embankment from
Excavated Spoil".

All fill or refill, from the material provided and brought from outside the Site (any
lead), about structures, i.e. above the natural surface level shall be defined as " filling
under floors with earth provided and brought from outside".

Filling shall be approved selected material from excavated or other predominantly

granular material, free from slurry and organic or other unsuitable matter and capable
of compaction by ordinary means.

Filling around pipes and cables shall be carefully placed, fine material shall cover the
pipe of cable completely before the normal filling is placed.

Material for back-filling shall conform to the requirements of Specifications. It shall be

placed in layers of 6" and saturated with sufficient water or otherwise compacted to
produce not less than 95 percent in situ density with respect to the maximum density
at optimum moisture content, achieved in Test No. 12 of B.S. 1377-1967.

Filling shall not be placed against foundation walls without first obtaining approval to
do so. Filling shall be brought up evenly on each side of the walls as far as
practicable. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting the fill shall not be

3–1
 operated closer to the wall than a distance equal to the height of the fill above the top
of footing.

3.1.1 Setting Out

Lines and levels shall be set out by the Contractor who shall be responsible for
maintaining all stakes Bench Marks, datums and witness points set up for the Work
in strict accordance with the requirements and Drawings.

3.1.2 Cleaning

All areas requiring clearing shall be cleared of all trees, bushes, rubbish and other
objectionable matter and such materials shall be removed from the Site of Work or
otherwise disposed off as approved. Any damage to the Works of public or private
property caused by Contractor's operation shall be made good through repair or
replacement at the sole expenses of the Contractor.

3.2 Authorized Outlines

Unless otherwise specified or directed in writing, all earthWork, i.e. excavation of

trenches, pits, etc. for foundations, filling under floors, etc. shall be executed to the
widths, depths, lengths, alignments grades and levels shown on the Drawings. If they
are not indicated on the Drawings then the Contractor shall prepare the Drawings
showing the existing ground levels and the actual grades and levels of excavation for
obtaining necessary approval.

Similarly for all backfill and fill Works the Contractor shall prepare Drawings showing
the existing ground levels and the actual finished level to ascertain the volume of fill
for obtaining approval before the commencement of Work.

3.3 Construction Requirements

3.3.1 Excavation in Foundations & Backfilling

[Link] Lines and Grades

The bottom and side slopes of excavation upon or against which structures or other
required constructions are to be placed shall be finished accurately to the required
grades and dimensions and, if required, shall be moistened with water and tamped or
rolled with suitable tools or equipment for the purpose of forming firm foundation.
Whenever the natural foundation material is disturbed or loosened or excavated
beyond the approved lines and grades the loose material shall be removed and the
extra excavation made good at Contractor's expense with selected materials which

3–2
 shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping rolling in layers not exceeding 6" (150
mm).

[Link] Location for Placing of Excavated and Surplus Materials

The excavated/surplus earth shall not be heaped within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of the top edge
of any foundation. The surplus material shall be disposed off or within the Site
without any additional cost.

[Link] Inspection of Foundations

Foundation trenches shall be inspected and approved before foundation is laid. If

safe foundation could not be obtained at the depth shown on the Drawings or at
maximum depth of five feet below the ground level, the Work shall be carried out as
directed. Additional Cost if any shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of the
Conditions of Contract.

[Link] Excavation to be kept Free of Water

All excavations shall be kept free from water from whatever source it may come at all
times except where otherwise specified or permitted in writing by the Engineer.

[Link] Excess Excavation

In the event of any excavation being carried out wider or deeper than shown on the
Drawings, it shall be filled in by the Contractor at his own expense to meet the
required dimension and levels with concrete or any other material approved for such
purpose.

[Link] Planking and Strutting

The Contractor shall provide at his own expense all timbering, piling, shoring,
strutting and other approved supports to the sides of all excavation, trenches and all
other Works in such a way as will be sufficient to secure them from falling and to
prevent any movement. The Contractor shall submit his proposals with
drawings/sketches for approval prior to execution of any such construction Work. All
pecuniary and other responsibilities connected with this part of the Work shall rest
with the Contractor.

In removing timbering, shoring and strutting and all other supports from excavation
and trenches etc., special care shall be taken to avoid bringing pressure to bear on
any concrete or other Work until it has hardened sufficiently to resist such pressure.

3–3
[Link] Classification of Material

No classification will be made for payment purposes of any material excavated as to

its class, nature, origin or condition, unless an unusual obstruction or embedded
matter or substance is encountered. If this occurs, it shall be submitted by the
Contractor for evaluation of design and Working out of a necessary treatment. New
items shall be mutually agreed.

[Link] Transportation of Materials

All carts, trucks or other vehicles used by the Contractor for transportation of the
material shall be suitably constructed or lined out not to permit any leakage of soil
while the vehicles are on the move and during transport of soil, the travel should be
covered with proper protection clothing. These would be so loaded and arranged as
not to spill on the Site and public roads. Whenever any vehicle so used is found
leaking and unsuitable and is not using cover, it shall be immediately withdrawn from
the Work.

[Link] Compacted Fill and Backfill

It comprises returning, transportation and filling the selected excavated material

around foundations, and at back of walls etc., up to finished levels shown on the
Drawings or as required in layers not exceeding 6 inches carefully compacted using
mechanical or manual operations and consolidated (with addition of water if required)
so as to achieve a minimum relative density of 90%. No filling shall be made until the
concrete foundations and footings etc., have been inspected and approved. Earth to
be used for filling must be free of all the organic impurities, debris or any other
foreign matter. Earth which contains more than 1% of salts, particularly sulphates,
will not be used in filling. In case of non-sufficiency of excavated material and
unsuitability of earth for back-filling, appropriate material conforming to the
Specifications requirements shall be brought by the Contractor. Necessary
Laboratory tests shall be carried out at the Contractor's expense.

3.4 Earth Filling Under Floors

3.4.1 Excavation of Works

3–4
 After the masonry has been laid up to the plinth level and the Damp Concrete Proof
Course, if required, is laid the space between the walls shall be cleared of debris and
loose soil shall be laid in layers of 6" (150 mm) and each layer watered and
compacted until the filling is completed up to the base level of the floor as shown on
the Drawings. Only sandy soil free from salt peter either from the materials excavated
from the foundations, if such materials is suitable and sufficient or suitable material
brought from outside, shall be used.

3.5 Sand Filling Under Floor

Unless otherwise specified the base of all ground floors shall be constructed in
accordance with the following specifications:-

(a) Sand filling shall be done in layers not more than 4" (100 mm) thick and shall
be compacted using mechanical equipment after saturation to such an extent
that 4" (100 mm) layer is reduced to about 2.7" (68 mm) after compaction.

The required in situ density with respect to maximum density to optimum

moisture content shall be in compliance with test 12 of B.S. 1377-1967.

(b) The base shall be perfectly level. A slope of 1:64 shall be provided in
verandahs and bath rooms if required.
(c) Sand shall conform in all respect to the specifications for fine aggregate
except for its grading, i.e. it shall pass through a sieve No. 16 and not more
than 30% shall pass through a sieve No. 100.

3.6 Measurement and Payment

3.6.1 Excavation and Backfilling

[Link] Measurement

The measurement shall be made in cubic feet of soil acceptably excavated and
backfilled for trenches and structures within the lines and grades shown on the
drawing or as directed by the Engineer. The measurement of dewatering in trenches
or structures shall not be measured separately.

[Link] Payment

Payment for earth excavation and backfilling in trenches or structures will be made
at Unit Rate per cubic feet stated in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ) of this Contract or

3–5
in the applicable Variation Orders. Payment for dewatering for trenches or
structures shall not be made extra over but its rate will be included in the unit rate
of excavation.

3–6
 Chapter – 4

SOLING

4.1 Scope of Work

The work to be done under this Section of Specifications consists of furnishing all
plant, labour, equipment, appliances, materials and performance of all operations
required in connection with the construction of stone or brick bottoming in strict
accordance with the specifications and Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer.
The scope of this Section of Specifications is covered with detailed specifications as
laid down herein.

4.2 Materials

4.2.1 Stone

Stone to be used shall comprise of strong, hard, durable stone of the

specified/approved size, free from impurities, quarry sap, dust, dirt and solubility
characteristics. The stone shall be obtained from approved quarries and shall be
sound, free from laminations and weak cleavages.

4.2.2 Clay Bricks

First class burnt bricks with minimum compressive strength of 1400 psi. Bricks
should not be over or under burnt and should produce ringing sound.

4.3 Construction

4.3.1 Preparation of Sub-grade

Sub-grade shall be formed of suitable materials free of clods, roots, stumps, bush or
other objectionable material.

Sub-grade material shall be placed in successive layers not exceeding 6 inch

(150mm) in thickness loose measure, and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted
to give the specified density.

The sub-grade will be compacted at optimum moisture content and loose pockets, if
any, cut-out and refilled with selected materials in layers not more than 6 inch
(150mm) thick and formed to levels and grades shown on the Drawings. Compaction
shall be done by approved methods consistent with the soil/material to be
compacted.

4–1
 The maximum dry weight density of the sub-grade shall not be less than 95% of
Modified AASHTO requirements, maximum density is defined as the maximum dry
weight density as determined by ASTM Designation D-1557 (MOD-AASHTO).

4.3.2 Stone or Brick Ballast Soling

The stone/brick ballast shall be well graded having a maximum size of 2 inch
(50mm). It should be graded down to 3/4 inch (20mm).

The soling material shall be laid and packed to even grades and well rolled to a
consolidated thickness as shown on the Drawings.

The whole of the surface of the compacted stone bottoming will be blinded with or
any other approved gritty material after the interstices have been filled with smaller
size stones, so as to effectively fill in the voids and crevices, watered, if necessary
and again thoroughly rolled with the same roller to produce a smooth and even
surface free from irregularities, true to line and level.

Care is to be taken to avoid any damage to existing structures, mains or pipes while
rolling operation is in progress. In places inaccessible for a roller, compaction shall
be done by hand tampers weighing not less than 9 kg or power rammers as directed
by the Engineer.

4–2
 Chapter – 5

FORM WORK

5.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with the supply and installation of formwork for the purpose of shuttering
in concreting Work, complete in strict accordance with this Section of the
Specification and the applicable Drawings and subject to the terms and Conditions of
the Contract.

5.2 General

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to perform the Work by engaging well
trained and experienced staff or by the sub Contractor who shall have enough
number of well trained and experienced staff to coordinate his activities with the other
operations. However the Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of Work
performed by the sub-Contractor as per the requirements of these specifications.

5.3 Materials

The Contractor shall use the following formWork materials for different purposes as
stated below:

(a) Timber
Form framing, sheathing and shoring.

(b) Ply wood

Form sheathing and panels.

(c) Steel
(i) Heavy forms and false Work
(ii) Column and joint forms

(d) Form Ties Anchors and Hangers

For securing formWork against placing loads and pressure.

(e) Coatings
Facilitate form removal.

5–1
 (f) Steel Joints
For formWork support.

(g) Steel frame shoring

For formWork support.

5.4 Delivery and Storage

(a) Delivery

The delivery of formWork materials shall be done in such a manner that

damage can be prevented.

(b) Storage

Form Work should be stored, after cleaning and preparing for re-use if used
before in such a manner that access to all different materials is available.

Material which can be affected by weathering shall be stored in appropriate

building or under covers and shade.

5.5 Workmanship

(a) Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine the concrete and shape
it to the required dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand
.the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete and shall
have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. The main architectural
theme is to retain the concrete as the finished facade material. The
Contractor therefore shall realize a special and perfect formWork. The
drawings set out details and locations of these special formWork. The
Engineer shall refuse any formWork and any part of the buildings, which has
been constructed with a non-approved formWork. The Engineer shall refuse
any concreting which will not be perfect or may not conform to the approved
model.
(b) Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for verticals reinforced concrete Work
unless required as such or permitted by the Engineer.
(c) Mud centering shall not be permitted without the prior approval of the
Engineer.
(d) FormWork shall be of wrought timber, steel, plywood, proprietary building
boards and such special materials, as may be shown on the drawings or
approved by the Engineer, which give the required finish to the surface of

5–2
 concrete. Wooden formWork shall be free from loose knots and shall be well
seasoned.
(e) The formWork shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on
the plans, and be so constructed as to remain sufficiently rigid during the
placing and compacting of the concrete, and shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent loss of liquid from the concrete. The design and Engineering of the
formWork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Where necessary, to maintain the specified tolerances, the
formWork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the
formWork due to the weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and due to
construction loads The Contractor shall establish and maintain in an
undisturbed condition and until final completion and acceptance of the
project, sufficient control points and bench marks to be used as references for
checking upon tolerances.
(f) Requirements for “facing materials” are given in the Section relevant to
‘Finishing of Formed Surfaces’. The maximum deflection of facing material
reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view shall be 1/240 of the span
between structural members.
(g) Where natural plywood forms finish grout cleaned-finish, smooth-rubbed-
finish, scrubbed- finish or sand-floated-finish is required. Forms shall be
smooth (faced with. plywood, liner sheets, or prefabricated panels) and true to
line, in order that the surfaces produced will require little dressing to arrive at
true surfaces. Where any as-cast finish is required, no dressing shall be
permitted in the finishing operation.
(h) Where as cast surfaces, including natural plywood-form-finish are specified,
the panels of material against which concrete is cast shall be orderly in
arrangement, with joints between panels planned in approved relation to
openings, building corner and other architectural features.
(i) Where panels for as-cast surfaces are separated by recessed or otherwise
emphasized joints, the structural design of the forms shall provide for locating
form ties, where possible, within the joints so that patches of tie holes will not
fall within the panel areas.
(j) Forms shall not be re-used if there is any evidence of surface wear and tear
or defect which would impair the quality of the surface finish. Forms shall be
thoroughly cleaned and properly coated before re-use.

5–3
(k) The formwork shall be designed so that the soffits of slabs and sides of
beams, columns, and walls may be removed first, leaving the forms to the
soffits of beams and their supports in position.
(l) Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents chamfer strips shall be
placed in the corners of forms to produce beveled edges on permanently
exposed surfaces. Interior corners on such surfaces and the edges of formed
joints will not require beveling unless required by the Contract Documents.
(m) Positive means such as wedges or jacks for accurate adjustment and for
proper removal of shores and struts shall be provided and all settlement shall
be monitored during concrete placing operation. Forms shall be securely
braced against lateral deflections.
(n) Where concreting of thin members is required to be carried out within
formWork of considerable depth, temporary openings in the sides of the
formWork shall be provided where necessary to facilitate the placing and
consolidation of concrete. Small temporary openings shall also be provided at
the bottom of the formWork for columns, walls and deep beams to permit the
cleaning out of debris and observation immediately before concrete is
deposited.
(o) Form ties shall be constructed so that the ends or end fasteners can be
removed without causing appreciable damages at the faces of the concrete.
After the ends or end fasteners of form ties have been removed, the
embedded portion of the ties shall terminate not less than 2 times diameter or
twice the minimum dimension of the tie from the formed faces of concrete to
be permanently exposed to view and in no case shall this distance be less
than ¾ inch. (20 mm). When the formed face of the concrete is not to be
permanently exposed to view, form ties may be cut off flush with the formed
surfaces. Through bolts may be permitted provided that they are greased to
allow for easy withdrawal and the holes. Subsequently made good. Through
bolts are not to be used on water retaining structures.
(p) At construction joints contact surface of the form sheathing for flush surfaces
exposed to view shall overlap the hardened concrete in the previous
placement by no less than 1 inch (25 mm). The forms shall be held against
the hardened concrete to prevent offsets or loss of mortar at the construction
joint so as to maintain a true surface.
(q) Wood forms for wall opening shall be constructed to facilitate loosening, if
necessary to counteract swelling of the forms.

5–4
(r) Wedges used for final adjustment of the forms prior to concrete placement
shall be fastened in position after the final check.
(s) FormWork shall be so anchored to shores or to other supporting surfaces or
members that upward or lateral movement of any part of the formWork
system during concrete placement will not occur.
(t) Runways or planks for moving labour and equipment shall be provided with
struts or legs and shall be supported directly on the formWork or upon the
structural member without resting on the reinforcing steel.
(u) All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any
accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign
material before placing fresh concrete.
(v) Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout or cement paste.
Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be removed
and replaced. Plywood and other wood surfaces not subject to shrinkage
shall be sealed against absorption of moisture from the concrete by either (1)
a field applied, approved form oil or sealer, or (2) a factory applied non-
absorptive liner. When forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it
shall be done prior to placing of the reinforcing steel. Excess coating material
shall not be allowed to stand in puddles in the forms nor allowed to come in
contact with the concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Care
shall be taken that such approved composition is kept out of contact with the
reinforcement. Where as-cast finishes are required, materials, which will
impart a stain to the concrete, shall not be applied to the form surfaces.
Where the finished surface is required to be painted, the material applied to
form surfaces shall be compatible with the type of paint to be used.
(w) For reinforced concrete, in no circumstances shall for until the concrete
attains strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be
exposed at the time of striking The strength referred to shall be that of
concrete using the same cement and aggregates, with the same proportions,
and cured under conditions of temperature and moisture similar to those
obtaining in the Work. Where possible, the formWork should be left for longer
time, as it would assist the curing. In normal circumstances (generally where
temperatures are above 20 0C/ (168 0F) and where ordinary cement is used,
forms may be struck after expiry of the following periods.

5–5
 Walls, columns and vertical sides of 48 hours or as may be decided
beams by the Engineer
Side of slab (shores of props left 2 days
under)
Beams soffits (shores or props left 12 days
under)
Removal of shores or props to slabs:
Spanning up to 13 ft. (4 meter) 12 days or as approved
Spanning over 13 ft. (4 meter) 16 days by the Engineer
Removal of shores or props to beams
Spanning up to 20 ft. (6 meter) 18 days or as approved
Spanning over 20 ft. (6 meter) 25 days by the Engineer

For rapid hardening cement 3/7 of the above period will be sufficient in all
cases except vertical sides of slabs, beams and columns which should be
retained for a minimum of 24 hours.

The number of shores or props, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to
be able to safely carry the full dead load of the slab and beams, as the case
may be.

Proper allowance shall be made for the decrease in rate of hardening of

concrete in cold weather and the above minimum duration must be increased
when the mean daily temperature is below 20 degree C.

(x) When repair of surface defects or finishing is required at early age, forms
shall be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist
damage from removal operation
(y) Top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete shall be removed as soon as the
concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Any needed
repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces shall be performed at
once and be followed by the specified curing.
(z) Wood forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as this can be
accomplished without damage to the concrete.
(aa) All formWork shall he removed without such shock or vibration as would
damage the reinforced concrete. Before the top plank and struts are removed,
the concrete surface shall be exposed where necessary in order to ascertain
that the concrete has sufficiently hardened. Proper precautions shall be taken
to allow for the decrease in the rate of hardening that occurs with all cement
in the cold weather.

5–6
(bb) When restoring or repropping is permitted or required, the operations shall be
planned in advance and shall be subject to approval. While reshoring is
underway no live load shall be permitted on the new construction

In no case during reshoring shall concrete in beam, slab, columns or any

other structural member be subjected to combined dead and construction
loads in excess of the load permitted by the Engineer for the developed
concrete strength at the time of reshoring.

Reshores shall be placed as soon as practicable after stripping operations

are complete but in no case later than the end of Working day on which
stripping occurs.

Reshores shall be tightened to carry their required loads without

overstressing the construction. Reshores shall remain in place at least until
tests representative of the concrete being supported have reached the
strength specified sub-Clause 5.23 hereof.

(cc) Floors supporting props or shores under newly placed concrete shall have
their original supporting props or shores left in place or shall be reshored. The
reshoring system shall have a capacity sufficient to resist the anticipated
loads and in all cases shall have a capacity equal to at least one half the
capacity of the shoring system above. The reshores shall be located directly
under a shore position above unless other locations are permitted.

The reshoring or re-propping shall extend over a sufficient number of stories

to distribute the weight of newly place concrete and construction live loads in
such a manner that the design superimposed loads of the floors supporting
shores or props are not exceeded.

(dd) It is generally desirable to give forms for reinforced concrete an upward

camber to ensure that the beams or slabs (specially cantilever slabs) do not
have a sag when they have taken up their deflection, but this should not be
done unless permitted by the Engineer.
(ee) No loads, other than man and light plant required in connection with the
actual Work in hand, shall be allowed on suspended floors until 28 days after
concreting where ordinary Portland Cement is used and 14 days when rapid
hardening Portland Cement is used.

5–7
 Chapter – 6

REINFORCEMENT

6.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of specifications consists of furnishing, cuffing,

fabricating, bending and placing steel reinforcement as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer. The scope of this section of specification is covered with
detailed specifications as laid down herein.

6.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British and ASTM Standards are relevant
to these specifications wherever applicable

6.2.1 Pakistan Standard

(a) PS 241 Tensile Testing of Steel.

(b) PS 244 Bend test for Steel
(c) PS 580 Rolled deformed Steel bars (intermediate grade) for concrete
reinforcement.
(d) PS 605 Rolled deformed steel bars (hard grade) for concrete
reinforcement.
(e) PS 606 Rolled deformed Steel bars (structural grade) for concrete
reinforcement.
(f) PS 607 General technical delivery requirement for steel.

6.2.2 British Standard

(a) BS 693 General requirements for Oxy-acetylene welding of mild steel.

(b) BS 785 Hot rolled bars and hard drawn wire for the reinforcement of
concrete.
(c) BS 1856 General requirement for the metal arc welding of mild steel.
(d) BS 4449 Hot rolled steel bars for reinforcement of concrete
(e) BS 4461 Cold Worked steel bars for reinforcement of concrete.
(f) BS 4466 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the
reinforcement of concrete.

6–1
6.2.3 ASTM Standards

(a) A 305 Minimum requirement for the deformations of deformed steel

bars for concrete reinforcement.
(b) A 615 Deformed billet steel bars for concrete reinforcement

6.2.4 ACI Standards

(a) ACI 315 Manual of standard practice for detailing reinforced concrete
structure.
(b) ACI 318 Building code requirements for reinforced concrete.

In addition to the above, the latest editions of other Pakistan Standards, British
standards, American Concrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testing and
Materials Standards and other standard as may be specified by the Engineer for
Special Material and construction are also relevant.

6.3 Material and Size of Bars

(a) Reinforcement for concrete shall conform to the respective Pakistan, British,
ASTM, or other Standards as specified in the Drawings and in the Contract
Documents or as may be specified by the Engineer.
(b) Unless otherwise specified, all plain reinforcing bars shall comply with the
requirements of PS 4449 for plain mild steel bars and shall have a minimum
characteristic strength of 40,000 psi.
(c) Unless otherwise specified, all deformed reinforcing bars shall comply with
the requirements of PS 4461 for deformed cold Worked new stock billet steel
bars and shall have a minimum characteristic strength of 60,000 psi.
(d) Reinforcement of all types is to be stored on Site in an approved manner so
as to avoid damage
(e) Steel wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to requirements of ASTM
Designation A- 185-64 or BS 4483. Standard Specifications for Welded Steel
Wire Fabric for concrete reinforcement. It shall be used where shown on the
Drawings.
(f) Reinforcement shall be free from all loose or flaky rust and mill scale, or
coating, including ice, and any other substance that would reduce or destroy
the tend. Reduced section steel reinforcement shall not be used.

6–2
6.4 Delivery & Storage

6.4.1 Delivery

Steel reinforcement bars shall be kept in bundles firmly secured and tagged.

6.4.2 Storage

The method of storage shall be approved by the Engineer. Reinforcing bars shall be
stored in racks or platforms above the surface of ground and shall be protected free
from scaling, rusting, oiling, coatings, damage, contamination and structural defects
prior to placement in Works. Bars of different diameters and grades of steel
reinforcement shall be kept separately.

6.5 Bar Bending Schedules

The Contractor shall prepare bar bending schedules of all the reinforcing steel bars
and these bar bending schedules shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
The Contractor shall obtain approval of the bar bending schedules before starting
actual bar bending Works.

6.6 Fabricating, Bending & Placing

(a) All metal for reinforcement shall be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, mud,
oil, grease, or other harmful matter immediately before the concrete is placed.
(b) Reinforcement is to be accurately placed as shown in the Drawings, and
secured against displacement by using 16 gauge Gl wire ties or suitable slips
at intersections and supported from the formWork by using concrete, metal or
plastic chairs and spacers or hangers of an approved pattern. Where
concrete blocks are used for ensuring the cover, they shall be made of mortar
not leaner than 1 part of cement to 2 parts of sand.

Where the concrete surface will be exposed to the weather in the finished
structure, the portions of all accessories in contact with the form Work shall
be galvanized or shall be made of plastic.

(c) Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with
the dimensions shown in the bar bending schedule approved by the Engineer.
(d) The cutting tolerance for all bars shall be ± 1 inch. (± 25 mm).
(e) Where an overall or an internal dimension of a bent bar is specified in the
schedule, the bending tolerance, unless otherwise stated, shall be as in
Table-6.1.

6–3
 Table – 6.1: Bending Tolerances

Dimensions of Bent Bars Tolerance

Up to &
Over Inches including Plus Inches Minus Inches
Inches
– 40 ¼ 1/4
40 80 ¼ 3/8
80 – ¼ 1

(f) Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances:

(g) Concrete cover to formed surfaces : ± 1/4” (± 6mm)
(h) Minimum spacing between bars : ± 1/4” (± 6mm)
(i) Top bars in slabs and beams
(A) Members 8 inch deep or less : ± 1/4” (± 6mm)
(B) Members more than 8 inch
but not over 24 inch deep : ± 3/8” (± 10mm)
(C) Members more than 24 inch deep : ± 1” (± 25mm)
(j) Crosswise members : spaced evenly within : 2” (50 mm)
(k) Lengthwise members : ± 2” (± 50mm)
(l) Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing
steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar
diameter or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting
arrangement of bars shall be subject to approval of Engineer.
(m) Vertical bars in columns shall be offset at least one bar diameter at lapped
splices. To ensure proper placement, templates shall be furnished for all
column dowels.
(n) Reinforcement shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure
the material.
No bars shall be bent twice in the same place, nor shall they be straightened
after bending.
Unless permitted, by Engineer reinforcement shall not be bent after being
partially embedded in hardened concrete.
(o) No splice of reinforcement shall be made except as shown on the Working
Drawings.
(p) Welding shall be permitted for, bars only under suitable conditions and with
suitable safeguards in accordance with BS 693, PS 1856, or AWS D12.1,
provided the type of reinforcement bar has the required welding properties.

6–4
 Tack welding may be used to fix in position bars that cross each other, only
with prior approval of the Engineer.
(q) Exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions is to be
effectively protected from corrosion Protection is also to be provided to
reinforcement partly built into concrete where the exposed part is to be built
into later concrete.
(r) No concreting is to be carried out until the reinforcement has been checked
and approved by the Engineer.
(s) Welding shall be done as in section ‘Structural Steel Works’
(t) All detailing shall be done as per ACI standards ACI-315 and AC1-318.
(u) Concrete clear cover for reinforcing steel shall be given in Table-6.2.

Table – 6.2: Concrete Clear Cover for Reinforcing Steel

Structural Members Minimum Cover
Concrete cast against and permanently exposed 3 inch (75 mm)
to earth
Concrete exposed to earth or weather:
Bar Dia > 3/4” (20mm) 2 inch (50 mm)
Bar Dia <5/6’ (16mm) 1-5/6 inch (40 mm)
Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact
with ground:
Slabs, Walls 3/4 inch
Beams, Columns: (Primary Reinforcement) 1-5/6 inch (40 mm)

All reinforcing steel shall be held firmly in place before and during the placing
of concrete by means of wires and supports adequate to prevent
displacement during the course of construction.

6–5
 Chapter – 7

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

7.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with the supply, manufacturers, transporting, placing, consolidating and
curing of plain & reinforced concrete and its constituents. Reinforcing steel does not
form part of this Section and is described in Chapter-6.

7.2 General

(i) Trades like electrical, mechanical, plumbing etc. shall be well coordinated.
Contractor shall take approval of coordinated shop drawings prior to concrete
pouring.
(ii) Suitable templates or instructions or both shall be provided for setting out of
items not placed in the forms. Embedded items and other materials for
mechanical and electrical operations shall have been completed, inspected,
tested and approved before concrete is placed.
(iii) For special concrete finish and for special methods of construction, formWork
Shop Drawings shall be designed and prepared by the Contractor, at his own
cost. Approval of shop drawings as well as that of actual samples of concrete
finish shall be obtained before Work is commenced.

7.3 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of the following Pakistan, British, ASTM, and ACl Standards are
relevant to these Specifications wherever applicable.

7.3.1 Pakistan Standards

(a) PS 232 Portland cement (ordinary & rapid hardening)

(b) PS 243 Natural aggregates for concrete
(c) PS 279 Abrasion of coarse aggregates by the use of Los Angeles machine.
(d) PS 280 Determination of aggregates crushing value.
(e) PS 281 Organic impurities in sand for concrete aggregate
(f) PS 282 Material finer than No. 200 PS test sieve in aggregates, method of
test for

7–1
 (g) PS 283 Soundness test, for aggregates by the use of sodium sulphate or
magnesium sulphate.
(h) PS 284 Sampling aggregates for concrete
(i) PS 285 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse
(j) PS 286 Description and classification of mineral aggregates
(k) PS 421 Sampling fresh concrete
(l) PS 422 Slump test for concrete
(m) PS 560 Making and curing concrete compression test specimen in the field.
(n) PS 612 Sulphate-resistant Portland cement type ‘A’ and sampling fresh
concrete in the laboratory.
(o) PS 716 Mixing
(p) PS 717 Compacting factor test for concrete
(q) PS 746 Definitions and terminology of cements
(r) PS 849 Making and curing concrete compression test cubes.

7.3.2 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

(a) C 33 Concrete Aggregates.

(b) C 40 Organic impurities in sand for concrete.
(c) C 87 Effect of organic impurities in fine aggregates on strength of
mortar.
(d) C 88 Soundness of aggregates.
(e) C 94 Ready mixed Concrete.
(f) C 109 Compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars
(g) C 117 Material finer than No. 200 (0.075mm) sieve
(h) C 123 Light weight pieces in aggregates.
(i) C125 Concrete and concrete aggregates.
(j) C 127 Specific gravity and absorption of coarse aggregate.
(k) C 128 Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate.
(l) C 131 Resistance to abrasion of small size coarse aggregate.
(m) C 136 Sieve or screen analysis of fine and coarse aggregate.
(n) C 142 Clay lumps and friable particles in aggregates.
(o) C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
(p) C 150 Portland cement
(q) C 156 Water retention by concrete curing material
(r) C 171 Sheet material for curing concrete.
(s) C 185 Air content or hydraulic cement mortar.
(t) C 188 Density of hydraulic cement.

7–2
 (u) C 191 Time of setting of hydraulic cement by vicat needle
(v) C 260 Air entraining admixture for concrete.
(w) C 289 Potential reactivity of aggregate.
(x) C 309 Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing
concrete.
(y) C 494 Chemical admixtures for concrete.
(z) C 535 Resistance to abrasion of large size coarse aggregates.
(aa) C75 Aggregate sampling.
(bb) C 994 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.
(cc) C 1190 Concrete joint sealer (hot poured elastic type).
(dd) C 1715 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving and
structural concrete.
(ee) D 1850 Concrete joint sealer (cold application type).
(ff) E11 Wire cloth sleeves for testing purposes.
(gg) E 96 Water vapour transmission of materials in sheet form.
(hh) E 154 Materials for use as vapour barrier under concrete
slabs.
(ii) E 337 Relative humidity by wet and dry bulk psychrometer

7.3.3 ACl (American Concrete Institute)

(a) Recommended practice for selecting proportions for normal

and heavy weight concrete.
(b) Quality control charts
(c) Specifications for structural concrete for building.
(d) Recommended practice for measuring, mixing, transporting
and placing concrete.
(e) Hot weather concreting.
(f) Recommended practice for curing concrete.
(g) Recommended practice for consolidation of concrete
(h) Manual of standard practice of detailing reinforcement
concrete structure.
(i) Building code requirement of reinforced concrete.
(j) Recommended practice for concrete formWork,

7.3.4 British Standards

(a) BS 12 Portland cement, ordinary and rapid hardening.

(b) BS 410 Test Sieves

7–3
 (c) BS 812 Methods for the sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sand
fillers.
(d) BS 822 Concrete aggregates from natural sources 1201
(e) BS 1881 Methods of testing concrete
(f) BS 3148 Tests for water for making concrete
(g) BS 3837 Expanded polystyrene boards
(h) BS 3869 Rigid expanded polyvinyl chloride for thermal insulation.
(i) Bs 4027 Sulphate – resisting Portland cement
(j) CP 8110 Structural use of concrete
(k) OP 114 Structural use of reinforced concrete in buildings

In addition, the latest editions of other Pakistan and British Standards, American
Concrete Institute Standards, American Society for Testing and Materials Standards
and other Standards as may be specified by the Engineer for special Materials and
Construction are also relevant.

7.4 Materials

7.4.1 Aggregates

Contractor shall run requisite/ physical and chemical tests of coarse and fine
aggregates and submit to the Engineer for approval

(a) The sources of supply of all fine and coarse aggregates shall be as specified
or approved by the Engineer.
(b) All fine and coarse aggregates shall be clean and free from clay, loam, silt
and other deleterious matter. If required, the Engineer reserves the right to
have them washed by the Contractor at no additional expense. Coarse and
fine aggregates shall be delivered and stored separately at Site. Aggregates
shall not be stored on muddy ground or where they are likely be become dirty
or contaminated. They shall be placed on sloped hard strata to ensure well
drained at all times.
(c) Fine aggregate shall be hard coarse sand, crushed stone or gravel
screenings and shall conform to requirements of PS 243 and/or BS 882 and
or ASTM C-33. Only fine aggregate of grading zones 1 to 3 (BS882) shall be
used.
(d) Coarse aggregate shall be crush stone of hard, durable material free from
laminated structure and conforming to PS 243 and/or PS 882 and/or ASTM
C-33, graded as follows for use in mass concrete as in foundations.

7–4
 Total Passing BS Sieve Percent by Weight
76.20mm (3 inch) 100
38.10mm (1-1/2 inch) 95 – 100
19.05mm (3/4 inch) 30 – 70
9.52mm (3/8 inch) 10 – 35
4.76mm (3/16 inch) 0– 5

Coarse aggregate for all cast-in-place concrete other than mass concrete as
for foundations shall be graded with the following limits;

Total Passing BS Sieve Percent by Weight

38.10 mm (1½ inch) 100
19.05 mm (3/4 inch) 95 – 100
9.52 mm (3/8 inch) 25 – 55
4.76 mm (3/16 inch) 0 – 10

(i) Wherever feasible, the nominal maximum size of aggregate for cast-in
place reinforced concrete slabs and other members shall be 3/4 inch.
If there are difficulties in placing such a concrete the maximum size
may be restricted to ½ inch. Provided the requirements for strength
are satisfied, as approved by the Engineer.
(ii) Except where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer that a
supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be
maintained over the period of the Work, the grading of the aggregates
shall be controlled by obtaining the 3/4 inch maximum nominal size,
the different sizes being stocked in separate stock piles and
recombined in the correct proportion for each batch at the batching
plant. The materials shall be stockpiled for a period before use so as
to drain nearly to constant moisture content (as long as Site and other
conditions permit, preferably for at least a day). The grading of the
coarse and fine aggregates shall be tested at least once for every 100
tons supplied, to ensure that the grading is uniform and same as that
of the samples used in the preliminary tests.

7.4.2 Cement

(a) The cement shall be fresh and of approved origin and manufacture. It shall be
one of the following as may be specified by the Engineer.

7–5
 (i) Ordinary or Rapid Hardening Portland cement complying with the
requirements of P.S.232 or BS 12 or ASTM C-150
(ii) Sulphate Resisting Portland/Cement complying with the requirements
of P.S.612 or BS 4027 or ASTM C-150.
(b) Unless otherwise specified. Ordinary Portland cement complying with the
requirements of BS: 12 shall be used.
(c) For all fair faced concrete it will be necessary to use approved cement with a
view to obtain a light shade concrete as approved by the Engineer.
(d) The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer at fortnightly intervals, test
certificates with the appropriate standard in respect of the samples of cement
from the Work Site. These tests shall be carried out in a laboratory approved
by the Engineer.
(e) Only one brand of each type of cement shall be used for concrete in any
individual member of the structure. Cement shall be used in the sequence of
receipt of shipment, unless otherwise directed.
(f) There shall be sufficient cement at Site to ensure that each Section of Work is
completed without interruption. If the cement is supplied by the Employer, the
Contractor should inform the Employer, of his requirements sufficiently in
advance of its use in construction.
(g) Cement reclaimed from cleaning of bags or from leaky containers shall not be
used.
(h) The Contractor shall provide and erect (at his cost) a suitable plain, dry, well
ventilated, weather proof and water proof shed of sufficient capacity to store
the cement.
(i) The cement shall be used as soon as possible after delivery and cement
which the Engineer considers has become stale or unsuitable through
absorption of moisture from the atmosphere or otherwise “shall be rejected
and removed immediately from the Site at the Contractor’s expense. Any
cement in containers damaged so as to allow the contents to spill or
permitting access of the atmosphere prior to opening of the container at the
time of concrete mixing shall be rejected and removed immediately from the
Site at the Contractor’s expense.
(j) The mixing together of different types of cement will not be permitted

7.4.3 Water

Water shall be tested in accordance with PS 3148 and shall be used only from an
approved source.

7–6
 The Contractor shall supply sufficient water for all purposes, including mixing the
concrete, curing and cleaning plant and tools. Where water can be shown to contain
any sugar or an excess of acid, alkali or salt, the Engineer may refuse to permit its
use.

7.4.4 Additive

All additives such as foaming and water proofing agents shall be from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer.

Air Entraining Admixtures conforming to ASTM C-260, and other Admixtures

conforming to ASTM C-494 shall be used subject to approval of the Engineer.

7.5 Nominal Concrete Mixes

7.5.1 Proportions of Mix

(a) Cement and Aggregates

The cement, fine aggregate and the coarse aggregate shall be weighed
separately. The proportions of cement to fine aggregate and coarse
aggregate shall be adjusted so as to provide the concrete of the required
crushing strength.

(b) The Contractor shall prepare Concrete Mix Design of various grades of
concrete for the approval of Engineer prior to starting concrete Works. He
shall regulate and arrange mixing of the ingredients of the concrete by weigh
batching. The cost of designing and testing the Concrete Mix shall be borne
by the Contractor.

(c) Water Cement Ratio

The quantity of water used shall be just sufficient to produce a dense
concrete of adequate strength and Workability for its purpose. For all external
Work and foundations the water/cement ratio should not exceed 0.55.

(d) Workability
The Workability shall be controlled by direct measurement of the water
content, allowance being made for any water in the fine and coarse
aggregates. The concrete shall be sufficiently Workable to be placed and
compacted, without difficulty, by the available means.

7–7
 Workability shall be determined by either the slump or compaction factor tests
as directed by the Engineer and these shall be performed in accordance with
the methods given in PS 422 and P.S. 177 or ASTM C-143. The slump or
compaction factor for each class of concrete shall be determined during the
preliminary test mixes and the value obtained shall not be modified without
the written consent of the Engineer. Unless otherwise permitted or specified,
the concrete shall be proportioned and produced to have a slump of 3 inch or
less if consolidation is to be by vibration. A tolerance of up to 1 inch above the
indicated maximum shall be allowed for individual batches provided the
average for all batches or the most recent 10 batches tested, which ever is
fewer, does not exceed the maximum limit. Concrete of lower than usual
slump may be used provided it is properly placed and consolidated.

7.5.2 Concrete Requirements

(a) Concrete made with Portland cement shall comply with the strength
requirements of Table-8.1 (Works Test).

Table-8.1: Strength Requirements for Portland Cement Concrete with

Aggregate Complying with BS 882.

Class of concrete (psi) Cube strength at 28 days (psi)

A 4,500
B 3,750
C 3,000
D 1,500
E 1,000

(b) All structural concrete shall conform to BS 5328-81.

(c) Unless otherwise stated, the types of concrete shall be classified on the basis
of compressive strength requirements.
(d) The Contractor shall provide Mix Design by weight for each class of concrete.
Manufacture 12 Nos. test cubes 6” x 6” x 6” in accordance with the Mix design
batching by weight and test 3 cubes each at 3,7,14 & 28 days intervals in the
presence of Engineer’s Representative and submit all relevant data and
results of tests for approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain
approval from the Engineer in writing for each Mix design before producing
the actual concrete for the Works.

7–8
 No payments for producing the Mix design, manufacture of test cubes and
testing shall be made. The Contractor shall include this cost in the relevant
item of concrete.

7.5.3 Batching

(a) All cement, including cement supplied in bulk, shall be batched by weight. A
bag of cement may be taken as 110 lbs (50 kg). with the prior approval of the
Engineer.
(b) Aggregates shall be batched by weight, due allowance being made for
moisture content. The apparatus for weigh-batching may be an integral part of
the mixer or a separate unit of a type approved by the Engineer. lt shall be
accurate within 2% and shall be checked for accuracy at least once a month.
(c) The quantity of additives i.e. foaming and water proofing agents etc. shall be
as prescribed by the manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer.
(d) Where the batching plant is of the type in which cement and aggregates are
weighed in the same compartment, the cement shall be introduced into the
compartment between two sizes of aggregates.
(e) Each batch shall be so charged into the mixer that some water will enter in
advance of the cement and aggregates. Water shall continue to flow for a
period which may extend to the end of the first 25 percent of the specified
mixing time. Controls shah, be provided to prevent batched ingredients from
entering the mixer before the previous batch has been completely discharged.

7.5.4 Mixing

The concrete shall be mixed in an approved bath mixer conforming to the

requirements of BS 305. It shall be fitted with the manufacturer’s plate stating the
rates, capacity and the recommended number of revolutions per minute and shall be
operated in accordance therewith. It shall be equipped with a suitable charging
mechanism and an accurate water measuring device.

(a) Mixing shall continue for the period recommended by the mixer manufacturer
or until there is apparently a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass
is uniform in colour, whichever period is longer. If it is desired to use a mixing
period of less than 1½ minute, the Engineer’s approval shall be obtained in
writing.

7–9
 (b) Controls shall be provided to ensure that the batch cannot be discharged until
the required mixing time has elapsed. At least three quarters of the required
mixing time shall take place after the last of the mixing water has been added.
(c) The interior of the mixer shall be free of accumulations that will interfere with
mixing action. Mixing blades shall be replaced when they have lost 10 percent
of their original height.
(d) Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which
has set shall not be re-tempered, but shall be discarded.

7.5.5 Transporting

 The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing to the place of final
deposit as rapidly as practicable by means which will prevent segregation or
loss of or addition to ingredients it shall be depoSited as nearly as practicable
in its final position so as to avoid re-handling or flowing. All skips vehicles, or
containers used for transporting the concrete shall be thoroughly clean.
 During hot or cold weather, concrete shall he transported in deep containers,
on account of their lower ratios of surface area to mass, which reduces the
rate of loss of water by evaporation during hot weather and loss of heat
during cold weather.

7.5.6 Placing

(a) Before placing of concrete, formWork shall have been completed, water shall
have been removed reinforcement shall have been secured in place;
expansion joint material, and other embedded items shall have been kept in
position; and the entire preparation shall have been approved.

No concrete is to be placed into the foundation trenches until the ground to

receive the same has been examined and approved by the Engineer for this
purpose.

(b) Concrete shall be depoSited continuously, or in layer of such thickness that

no concrete will be depoSited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to
cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the Section. If a
Section cannot be placed continuously, construction joints shall be located as
shown in the Contract Documents or as approved by the Engineer. Placing
shall be carried out at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated
with fresh concrete is still plastic. Concrete which has partially hardened shall
not be depoSited Temporary spreaders in forms shall be removed when the

7 – 10
 concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their services
unnecessary They may remain embedded in the concrete only if made of
metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained.
(c) The actual sequence of construction proposed by the Contractor shall he
subject to the Engineer’s approval before construction starts on any part of
the structure, and this sequence shall not be varied without the Engineer’s
approval.
(d) The concrete shall be placed as soon after it has been mixed as is
practicable. Once the concrete has left the mixer, no more water shall be
added, although the concrete may be mixed or agitated to help maintain
Workability. The concrete shall not be used if, through any cause, the
Workability of the mix at the time of placing too low for it to be compacted fully
and to an acceptable finish by whatever means available.

(e) The time between mixing and placing should be reduced if the mix is richer or
the initial Workability of the mix is lower than normal; if a rapid hardening
cement or an accelerator is used, or if the Work is carried out at a high
temperature or exposed to a crying atmosphere.

(f) The Contractor shall ensure that the delay between mixing and placing does
not exceed 45 minutes under any circumstances. Any concrete which does
not satisfy this requirement shall not be used.

(g) The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final position to
avoid re-handling. In no circumstances may concrete be railed or made to
flow along the forms by the use of vibrators. Concreting shall be carried on as
a continuous operation using methods which shall prevent segregation or loss
of ingredients.
(h) The free fall of concrete shall not be allowed to exceed 5 ft. (1.5 m) and
where it is necessary for the concrete to be lowered more than this depth, it is
not to be dropped into its final position, but shall be placed through pipes fed
by a hopper. When a pipe is used for placing concrete the lower end shall be
kept inside, or close to the freshly deposited concrete. The size of the pipe
shall be not less than 9 inches (225mm) diameter.
(i) The Workmen carrying concrete to the Site, and all other Workmen moving
about on the reinforcement before the concrete is placed, shall move only
along runways or planks placed for the purpose and no person shall be
allowed to walk on the reinforcement itself.

7 – 11
 (j) Prior to the laying of concrete on load bearing masonry walls, bearing plates
and at other points, as may be directed by the Engineer, the surface will be
brought to a true, hard, smooth, level surface using cement sand mortar in the
ratio of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand. Two layers of building paper will
then be laid flat to separate the concrete from the surface on which it is to be
laid.

7.5.7 Construction Joints

(a) Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints, the

arrangement of which shall be predetermined by the Engineer.
(b) Joints not shown on the drawings shall be so made and located as to least
impair the strength of the structure and shall need prior approval of the
Engineer. In general, they shall be located near the middle of the spans of
slabs and beams unless a secondary beam intersects a main beam at this
point, in which case the joint in the main beam shall be offset a distance
equal to twice the width of the secondary beam. Joints in walls and columns
shall not be at the underside of floor slabs or beams, and at the top of
footings or floor slabs. Beams, brackets, columns, capital haunches and drop
panels shall be placed at the same time as slabs. Joints shall be
perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
(c) All reinforcing steel shall be continued across joints. Key and inclined dowels
shall be provided as directed by the Engineer. Longitudinal keys at least 1½
inch. (40 mm) deep shall be provided in all joints in walls and between walls
and slabs or footings.
(d) When the Work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such
surface shall be roughened in an approved manner which will expose the
aggregate uniformly and will not leave laitance, loosened particles of
aggregate or damaged concrete at the surface. Feather edges will be
avoided.
(e) The hardened concrete of construction joints and of joints between footings
and walls or columns, between walls or columns and beams or floors they
support, joints in unexposed walls and all others not mentioned herein shall
be dampened (but not saturated) immediately prior to placing of fresh
concrete.
(f) The hardened concrete of joints in exposed Work, joints in the middle of
beams and slabs; and joints in Work designed to contain liquids shall be
dampened (but not saturated) and then thoroughly covered with a coat of

7 – 12
 cement grout similar in proportions to the mortar in the concrete. The grout
shall be as thick as possible on vertical surfaces and at least 150 mm thick on
horizontal surfaces. The fresh concrete shall be placed before the grout has
attained initial set.
(g) Where the concrete has not fully hardened, all laitance shall be removed by
scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristles and brushed, care being taken
to avoid dislodgment of particles of aggregate. The surface shall then be
coated with neat cement grout. The first layer of concrete to be placed on this
surface shall not exceed 6 inches (150 mm) in thickness, and shall be well
rammed against old Work, particular attention being paid to corners and
closed spots.

7.5.8 Expansion Joints

Expansion joints shall be provided wherever indicated on the Drawings. In no case

shall the reinforcement, corner protection angles, or other embedded items be run
continuous or through an expansion joint. All expansion joints shall be carefully
placed so as not to be displaced during concreting. The method of placing the
expansion joints shall be strictly in accordance with the Drawings and as approved by
the Engineer. All materials for use in the expansion joints shall have, prior approval of
the Engineer before placing order for supply.

7.5.9 Embedded Items

(a) The material, design and location of water stops in joints shall be as indicated
in the Contract Documents. Each piece of remolded water stop shall be of
maximum practicable length in order that the number of end joints will be held
to a minimum
(b) Joints at intersections and at ends of pieces shall be made in the manner
most appropriate to the material being used. Joints shall develop effective
water-tightness fully equal to that of the continuous water stop material, shall
permanently develop not less than 50 percent of the mechanical strength of
the parent Section, and shall permanently retain their flexibility
(c) Electric conduits and other pipes which are planned to be embedded shall
not, with their fittings, displace more than four percent of the area of the cross
Section of a column on which stress is calculated or which is required for fire
protection. Sleeves, conduits, or other pipes passing through floors, walls, or
beams shall be of such size or in such location as not to impair unduly the
strength of the construction; such sleeves, conduits, or pipes may be

7 – 13
 considered as replacing structurally in compression the displaced concrete,
provided that they are not exposed to rusting or other deterioration, are of
uncoated or galvanized iron or steel not thinner than standard steel pipe,
have a nominal inside diameter not over 50 mm and are spaced not less than
three diameters on centre except when plans of conduits and pipes are
approved by the Engineer embedded pipes and conduits other than those
merely passing through, shall not be larger in out side diameter than one
third the thickness of the slab, wall, or beams in which they are embedded nor
so located as to ‘ impair unduly the strength of the construction. Sleeve pipes,
or conduits of any material not harmful to concrete and within the limitations
of this Section may be embedded in concrete with the approval of the
Engineer provided they are not considered to replace the displaced concrete.
(d) All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining
Work or for its support shall be placed prior to concreting.
(e) All Contractors whose Work is related to the concrete or must be supported
by it shall be given ample notice and opportunity to introduce and/or furnish
embedded items before the concrete is placed.
(f) Expansion joint material, water stops and other embedded items shall be
positioned accurately and supported against displacement. Voids in sleeves,
inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable
material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids.

7.5.10 Pre-Cast Concrete

Pre-cast concrete units shall be fair faced, cast to the sizes and dimensions as
indicated on the Drawings. The concrete used for pre-cast units shall conform to the
specifications laid down for cast in situ reinforced cement concrete unless otherwise
required and directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be required to submit a sample of pre-cast unit for the approval
of the Engineer all pre cast units shall strictly conform to the approved sample.
Pre-casting platform of the size and at the location approved by the Engineer shall be
constructed. The concrete in one pre-cast unit shall be placed in one operation, in
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings.
The material and design of formWork and the method of pre- casting the units shall
be approved by the Engineer.

7 – 14
 The erection/installation and removal of the pre-cast units from the pre-casting
platform shall not be permitted until and unless they are properly cured to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

All pre-cast units shall be smoothly finished to the required lines, grades, angles etc.
Holes, grooves, pockets, hooks shall be provided as shown and/or as directed by the
Engineer. The units shall be properly stacked on a platform without causing any
cracks and damages. Curing of all the pre-cast units shall be done in accordance
with the relevant BSS/approval of the Engineer.

(a) Erecting Pre-cast Units

All the pre-cast units shall be transported and erected into position in a
manner as approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall submit his proposal in this regard and obtain approval
from the Engineer in advance.

The units shall be embedded or otherwise installed in their permanent

positions as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

(b) Lifting Beams

The Contractor shall use lifting beams at his own cost, for erecting pre-cast
members where the Engineer so directs. Lifting beams shall be supplied and
erected by the Contractor, at his own cost, at all points where lifting is
necessary for maintaining the plant but is inaccessible to mobile cranes or
alternatively, covered by overhead traveling cranes. The Contractor, however,
is to supply the trolleys and erect them on the lifting beams, and to test
operation of installed equipment.

7.5.11 Cement Concrete Pavements

For all concrete Work relevant Specifications of this Section shall apply

(a) Side Forms and Construction

Side forms shall be of steel or any other suitable material and of a design as
approved by the Engineer.

In general, only materials and methods that have proved their acceptability by
past performance will be considered. All form shall be constructed so that
they can be removed without hammering or prying against the concrete.

7 – 15
 Horizontal joints in the forms will not be permitted. Forms shall be thoroughly
cleaned and oiled with linseed/mineral oil or shall be given two coats of nitro-
cellulose lacquer each time they are used.

The forms shall be set on a thoroughly compacted base true to line and level
and firmly secured in position by appropriate methods. Conformity with the
alignment and levels shown on the Drawings shall be checked as and when
required by the Engineer. Where necessary corrections shall be made
immediately before placing the concrete; where any form has been disturbed
it shall be reset and rechecked.

Pavements shall be constructed in panels of sizes as shown on the Drawings.

The panels shall be laid alternately, the adjoining panels being concreted
when the side forms are struck and the jointing materials placed, inspected
and approved by the Engineer. Each panel is to be concreted in one
operation and no interruptions shall be permitted during the operation. The
concrete shall be tipped from the trolley slightly in advance of the Working
place and then shoveled into position. The spreading shall be carried out very
carefully. Compaction shall be done by means of vibro compactors or
approved surface vibrators. If a vibro compactor is used. it shall be operated
on the concrete and will not be allowed to strike or displace the forms. The
spreading and compacting of the successive layers shall proceed without
interruptions and as quickly as practicable so as to ensure that the slab is
monolithic throughout its depth.

The wearing surface shall be laid while the base concrete is still wet and
screeded to line and level. When the initial set takes place the surface shall
be troweld smooth with a steel trowel to provide a dense closed surface.

All the joints shall be carefully formed as shown on the Drawings or as

directed by the Engineer. The joint filler together with preformed groove shall
provide complete separation of adjacent slabs. The joints shall all be sealed
with bitumen as shown on the Drawings or/and as directed by the Engineer.

(b) Protection and Curing – General Requirements

Concrete shall be protected adequately from injurious action sun, rain, flowing
water and mechanical injury, and shall not be allowed to dry from the time it is
placed until the expiry of the minimum curing periods specified hereinafter.

7 – 16
 Water curing shall be accomplished by keeping the surface of the concrete
continuously wet by covering with water or with approved water saturated
covering, where wood forms are left in place for curing.

They shall be kept sufficiently damp at all times to prevent openings at the
joints and drying out of the concrete. All portions of the structure shall be kept
moist for the full curing periods, specified hereinafter.

When liquid membrane curing compound is used the surface of the concrete
shall be protected from traffic or other abrasive action that may break the
membrane, for the full period of curing. The membrane curing compound
shall be white colored and shall be approved by the Engineer and shall
comply with ASTM Designation C 309, type 2.

(i) Curing Periods

The curing period shall be at least 10 days, or as directed by the

Engineer

(ii) Removal of Forms

The Contractor shall exercise great care in avoiding damage to joints,

arises, dowel bars etc. while removing the forms. Under no
circumstances will the use of pry bars between the forms and
pavement be permitted. Side forms shall not be removed until at least
40 hours have elapsed from the time of completing the concreting of
the slab which they contain. In no case shall forms be removed until
the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit removal without
damage to the concrete. Concrete Work shall be protected from
damage during the removal of formWork and from injury resulting from
the storage or movement of material during construction.

(c) Finishing

All unformed surfaces shall be finished with a wood float except as otherwise
specified. Visible vertical surfaces shall have all projections and irregularities
removed. The entire surface shall be rubbed if required by the Engineer, with
a No. 16 carborundum brick, or other abrasive until even, smooth and of
uniform appearance, and shall be washed clean. Plastering of surface,
application of cement or other coating will not be permitted.

7 – 17
 All exposed corners shall be chamfered, 1 inch x 1 inch (25x25mm) unless
otherwise mentioned or shown in the plans or directed by the Engineer.
Concrete surface which will be covered with other materials shall be screeded
without floating.

(d) Spreading. Finishing and floating of concrete in pavements

(i) General Requirements

The striking off, compacting and floating of concrete shall be done by

mechanical methods, if approved by the Engineer. Where the
Engineer determines that it is impracticable to use mechanical
methods, manual methods of spreading, finishing and floating may be
used on pavement lines as indicated on the Drawings.

(ii) Mechanical Methods

The concrete shall be spread uniformly between the forms,

immediately after it is placed, by means of an approved spreading
machine. The spreader shall be followed by an approved finishing
machine equipped with two oscillating or reciprocating screeds. The
spreading machine or the finishing machine shall be equipped with
vibrating equipment that will vibrate the concrete for the full paving
width. Internal vibrators shall be used adjacent to the longitudinal edge
of the pavement. These vibrators shall be attached to the rear of the
spreading machine onto the finishing machine. Vibrators shall not rest
on new pavements or side forms or in contact with any dowel bars,
and the arrangement of power supply to the vibrators shall be such
that when the motion of machine is stopped, vibration shall cease. The
rate of vibration shall be not less than 8000 vibrations per minute. The
concrete shall be spread to full width before being struck off and
compacted so that the surface will conform to the finished grade and
cross-Section as shown on the plans and at the same time leave
sufficient material for the floating operation. The spreading & finishing
machine shall move over the pavement as many times and at such
intervals as may be required by the Engineer to ensure thorough
compaction.

Except, as otherwise specified, after the pavement has been struck off
and compacted, it shall be finished with an approved longitudinal float.

7 – 18
 The Contractor may use a longitudinal float composed of one or more
cutting and smoothing Floats, suspended from and guided by rigid
frame. The frame shall be carried by four or more visible wheels riding
on and constantly in contact with the forms.

The Contractor may use a longitudinal float which Works with a

sawing motion, while held in a floating position parallel to the road
centre line and passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the
other. Movements ahead, along the centre line of the road, shall be in
successive advances of not more than half the length of the float.

Instead of using other type of longitudinal float a single machine which

will affect satisfactory compaction, finishing and floating may be used.
This machine may be towed by a spreading machine: This
combination, finishing floating machine shall be equipped with screeds
and vibrators as hereinafter specified for spreading and finishing
machine Floating shall be accomplished by means of a non-oscillating
float held in a suspended position from the frame.

If any spreading. Finishing and floating equipment is not maintained in

full Working order or if the equipment as used by the Contractor
proves inadequate to obtain the results prescribed, such equipment
shall be improved or satisfactory equipment substituted or added at
the direction of the Engineer.

(iii) General Requirement

The concrete shall be spread uniformly immediately after it is placed
and shall be leveled and then struck-off to such an elevation that,
when properly compacted, the surface will conform to the required
grade and cross-Section. The strike board shall be moved forward
with a combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation
being such that neither end is raided from the side forms during the
process. While striking off, a sight excess of concrete shall be kept in
front of the cutting edge at all times. Prior to tamping, the concrete
along the forms shall be thoroughly spaded or vibrated. The entire
area of pavement shall be tamped or vibrated in a manner that will
ensure maximum compaction. The concrete shall be brought to the
required grade and shape by tile use of a tamper consisting of a heavy
plank whose length exceeds the width of the pavement by 300 mm or

7 – 19
 by the use of a mechanical vibrating unit spanning the full width of the
spread The tamper shall be constructed with properly trussed rods to
stiffen it and prevent sag and shall be shod with a heavy strip of metal
for a tamping surface. The tamper shall be moved with a combined
tamping and longitudinal motion, raising it from side form and dropping
it so that the concrete will be thoroughly compacted and rammed into
place. A small surplus material is compacted and rammed into front of
the tamper or vibrating unit and tamping or vibrating shall continue
until the true cross-Section is obtained and the mortar flushes slightly
to the surface.

(e) Expansion and Construction Joints

All the expansion and construction joints shall be carefully formed as shown
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The joint filler together with
the preformed groove shall provide complete separation of adjacent slabs or
building. The preformed chase shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, debris,
stones or other hard material.

All joints are to be filled with flexcell expansion joint filler, or an approved
elastic, compressible, durable, and rot-proof equivalent of sufficient rigidity to
enable it to be satisfactorily installed in the joint and resist deformation during
the passage of the concreting equipment. The filler is to be of the same
thickness as the joint width.

Construction joints shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

The assembly and method of constructing the expansion joints/construction

joints shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer

(f) Consolidation

(i) All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding or

forking so that the concrete is thoroughly Worked around the
reinforcement, around embedded items, and into corners of forms,
eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing,
pitting, or planes of weakness. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum
frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to
consolidate the concrete effectively. They shall be operated by
competent Workmen. Use of vibrators to transport within forms shall

7 – 20
 not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at points
approximately 1-1/2 ft. (1/2 meter) apart. At each insertion, the
duration shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete but not
excessive so as to cause segregation, generally from 5 to 15 sec. A
spare Vibrator shall be kept on the job Site during all concrete placing
operations. Where the concrete is to have an as-cast finish, a full
surface of mortar shall be brought against the form by the vibration
process, supplemented, if necessary, by spading to Work the coarse
aggregate back from the formed surface.
(ii) If there is any tendency for the mix to segregate during consolidation,
particularly if this produces excessive resistance, the mix proportions
shall be modified to effect an improvement in the quality of the
concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in conformity with the
provisions of Clause 5.
(iii) Vibrators shall not be allowed to touch the formWork or the reinforcing
bars during consolidation operation.
(iv) Mechanical vibrators shall he of a type suited in the opinion of the
Engineer to the particular conditions
(v) Over vibration or vibration of very wet mixes is harmful and should be
avoided.

(g) Curing and Protection

(i) Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected

from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures and
mechanical injury, and shall be maintained with minimum moisture
loss at a relative constant temperature for the period necessary for
hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. The materials
and methods of curing shall be subject to approval of the Engineer
(ii) For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, one of the following.
procedures shall be applied immediately after completion of
placement and finishing.

(A) Pending or continuous sprinkling.

(B) Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet.
(C) Application of waterproof sheet materials approved by the
Engineer.
(D) Application of other moisture-retaining covering as approved.

7 – 21
 Application of a curing compound conforming to ASTM C 309 type 2.
The compound shall be applied in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water
sheet which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the
concrete surface. It shall not be used on any surface against which
additional concrete or other material is to be bonded unless it is
proved that the curing compound will not prevent bond, or unless
positive measures are taken to remove it completely from areas to
receive bonded applications.
(iii) Moisture loss from surface placed against wooden forms or metal
forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping
the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal,
the vertical faces of concrete shall be cured until the end of the time
prescribed in sub-clause 5.13.4 by one of the methods of sub-clause
5.13.2.
(iv) Curing in accordance with sub-clause 5.13.1 & 5.13.2 above shall be
continued for at least 14 days in the case of all concrete except
concrete with rapid- hardening Portland Cement for which the period
shall be at least 3 days. Alternatively, if tests are made of cubes kept
adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, moisture
retention measures may be terminated when the average
compressive strength has reached 70 percent of the minimum
specified Works cube strength. If one of the first four curing
procedures of sub-clause 5.13.2 is used initially, it may be replaced by
one of the other procedures of that sub-clause any time after the
concrete is one day old provided the concrete is not permitted to
become surface dry during the transition.
(v) When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 410F then
temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 0F – 68
0F for the required curing period.
(vi) When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering insulation or
housing the concrete Work shall be made in advance of placement
and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without
injury to concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used
during the first 24 hours unless precautions are taken to prevent

7 – 22
 exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon
dioxide.
(vii) When necessary, provision for wind-brakes, shading for spraying,
sprinkling, ponding or wet covering with a light colored material shall
be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures
shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing
operation will allow.
(viii) Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the
concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be
kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 370F in any one
hour or 500F in any 24 hour period.
(ix) During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from
damaging by mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy
shock and excessive vibrations. All finished concrete surfaces shall be
protected from damage by construction equipment, materials or
methods by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running
water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as
to overstress the concrete. No traffic should be allowed on pavement
for at least 7 days after casting.

(h) Works in Extreme Weather

(i) Unless adequate protection is provided and approval is obtained,

concrete shall not be placed during rain. Rain water shall not be
allowed to increase the mixing water nor to damage the surface finish.
(ii) When the temperature of the surrounding air is expected to be below
41 0F during placing or within 24 hours thereafter, the temperature of
the plastic concrete, as placed, shall be no lower than 55 degree F for
Sections less than 300 mm in any dimension nor 50 0F for any other.
(iii) During hot weather, the temperature of the concrete as placed shall
met be so high as to cause difficulty from loss of slump, flash set, or
cold joints and should riot exceed 90 0F. When the temperature of the
concrete exceeds 90 0F precautionary measures approved by the
Engineer shall be put into effect. When the temperature of the steel is
greater than 122 0F steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayed
with water just prior to placing the concrete ingredients shall be cooled
before mixing, or flaked ice or well crushed ice of a size that will melt
completely during mixing may be substituted for all part of the mixing

7 – 23
 water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or cold joints
are encountered.

Other precautions recommended by ACl 305 shall also be adopted.

7.6 Test of Concrete Quality

(a) The Contractor shall provide samples of concrete for testing at the Engineer’s
direction. Proper facilities shall be provided for making and curing the test
specimens in accordance with PS 560 and PS 849. A competent person shall
be employed by the Contractor whose first duty shall be to supervise all
stages in the preparation and placing of the concrete. All test specimens shall
be made and Site tests carried out under his direct supervision.
(b) Test sample shall be taken at the mixer or as directed by the Engineer. The
test specimens shall be cured in accordance with PS 560, PS 849 and BS
1881. The strength shall comply with the standard of quality specified in table-
8.1.
(c) The five test cubes are to be tested for compressive strength as specified in
BS 1881. These tests shall be carried out at Site or in a laboratory approved
by the Engineer. Two cubes shall be tested at the age of seven days and
three at 28 days and the strengths determined are to comply with the
standard of quality specified. The laboratory tests shall be carried out by an
independent organization, such as Government Testing Laboratory or such
other undertakings approved by the Engineer. The original test reports
received from the above authorities should be submitted to the Engineer.
(d) For all grades of concrete, the appropriate strength requirement shall be
considered to be satisfied if none of the strengths of the cubes is below the
specified cube strength or if the average strength of the three cubes is not
less than the specified cube strength and the difference between the greatest
and the least strength is not more than 20% of the average.
(e) When the results of Works cube tests show that the strength of any concrete
is below the minimum specified the Engineer may give instructions for the
whole or part of the Work concerned to be removed and replaced at the
expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear the cost of any other
part of his, or any other Contractor’s Work, which has to be removed and
replaced as a result of the defective concrete. If any concrete is held to have
failed, the Engineer may order the proportions of that class of concrete to be
changed in order to provide the specified strength.

7 – 24
7.7 Finishing of Formed Surfaces

7.7.1 General

(a) After removal of forms, the surfaces of concrete shall be given one or more of
the finishes specified below in locations designated by the Contract
Documents.
(b) When finishing is required to match a small sample furnished to the
Contractor, the sample finish shall be reproduced on an area at least 100 sq
ft. in an inconspicuous location designated by the Engineer before proceeding
with the finish in the specified location.
(c) Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profile
grades, and dimensions are specified in clause 9. Tolerances for concrete
construction are defined as tolerances to be distinguished from irregularities
in finish as described herein. The finish requirements for concrete surfaces
shall be as generally specified in this clause and as indicated on the
Drawings. Finishing of concrete surfaces shall be performed only by
Workmen who are skilled in concrete finishes. The Contractor shall keep the
Engineer advised as to when finishing of concrete will be performed. Unless
inspection is waived in each specific case, finishing of concrete shall be
performed only in the presence of the Engineer. Concrete surfaces will be
tested by the Engineer where necessary to determine whether surface
irregularities are within the limits herein after specified, surface irregularities
are classified as abrupt or gradual. Offsets caused by displaced or misplaced
form sheeting or lining or Section, or otherwise defective form lumber will be
considered as abrupt irregularities, and will be tested by direct
measurements. All other irregularities will be considered as gradual
irregularities, and will be tested by use of a template, consisting of a straight
edge or the equivalent thereof for curved surfaces. The length of the template
2 meters for testing of formed surfaces and 3 meters for testing of unformed
surfaces.

7.7.2 As-cast Finishes

Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings the classes of finish shall
apply as follows:

(a) Rough form finish

7 – 25
 No selected form facing materials shall be specified for rough form finish
surfaces. The holes and defects shall be patched. Otherwise, surfaces shall
be left with the texture imparted by the forms.

(b) Fair face finish

Fair face finish applies to concrete formed surfaces, the appearance of which
is considered by the Engineer to be of special importance, such as surfaces
of structures prominently exposed to public inspection. Surfaces of concrete
structures requiring fair face finish as shown in the Drawings. Surface
irregularities, measured as described in sub-clause 7.2.1, ‘Rough form finish’,
shall not exceed 4 mm for gradual irregularities and 6mm for abrupt
irregularities, except that abrupt irregularities will not be permitted at
construction joints. Abrupt irregularities at construction joints and elsewhere
in excess of 6 mm and gradual irregularities in excess of 1/8 inch. (3mm) shall
be reduced by grinding so as to conform to the specified limits. Abrupt
irregularities at construction joints shall be ground on level of 1 to 20 ratio of
height to length.

Unless otherwise approved, repair of imperfections in formed concrete shall

be completed within 24 hours after removal of forms. The form facing material
shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. It may be
plywood, temperated concrete form grade hardboard metal, plastic paper, or
other approved material capable of producing the desired fair face finish. The
arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the
number of seams kept to the practical minimum. It shall be supported by
studs or other backing capable of preventing excessive deflection. Material
with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edge, patches, dents, or other defects
which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. The
holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed.

(c) Architectural Finish Concrete

Architectural finish to concrete formed surfaces as shown on the Drawings is

required by the Engineer where the architectural appearance of surfaces of
structures exposed to public view is of special consideration and importance.
The Contractor shall use approved special material for formwork and design
the forms in conformity with the specified architectural patterns, textures and
finishes in order to obtain first class architectural finish on formed concrete

7 – 26
 surface without any defect, irregularities, blemishes, imperfections and
encrustations.

Sample approvals of pre cast & in-situ concrete:

These samples will be reviewed and approved on the basis of colour,

dimensional accuracy, and finish of surfaces and general appearance. The
same requirements for sample approval will be required for both pre cast and
in-situ concrete exposed surfaces.

(i) Forms

The Contractor must maintain the forms unusually tight and braces to
prevent movement, mal-alignment and bleeding that will result in sand
streaks, honeycomb, fins, stain or unsightly appearance.

It wood forms are chosen to be used by the Contractor they shall .be
constructed of 3/4 inch. (20mm) minimum thickness plywood
constructed in a fashion to allow many re-uses with all surfaces sealed
with a polyurethane varnish.

Edges, surfaces and corners of forms shall be sealed to prevent loss

of any matrix or unequal absorption of water. Corners of wood forms
shall be filled with suitable compound and all contact surfaces sealed
with a polyurethane varnish.

Re-use of forms shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

(ii) Curing

Curing shall be done in shade (out of direct sunlight) and shall be for a
minimum period of 4 days.

(d) Finishing procedures

Finishing procedures for filling air void in smooth finished concrete developed
by a formed surface

While the concrete surface is still damp (not more than three days after
removal of forms), apply a thin coat of medium consistency neat cement
slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat within any pit or
blemishes in the parent concrete; avoid coating large areas of the finished

7 – 27
surface. Before slurry has dried or changed colour, apply a dry (almost
crumbly) grout comprised of one part cement, of the type and brand of
cement used in the original concrete, to one and one-half parts clean
masonry sand with a fineness modulus of approximately 2.25 and complying
with the gradation requirements of the ASTM Specifications C144. Mix proper
amounts of white cement and colouring with the parent mortar to produce a
satisfactory colour match with the parent concrete after hardening. Use
samples previously prepared.

Apply the finishing grout uniformly with damp (neither dripping wet nor dry)
pads of coarse burlap approximately 6 inch square used as a float. Scrub the
grout well into the pits to provide a dense mortar in all the imperfections to be
filled. Allow the mortar to partially harden, from one to two hours, depending
upon the weather. Avoid direct hot sunlight. If the air is hot and dry, keep the
concrete surface damp during this period using a fine fog spray. When the
grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the surface with the
edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout from the small pits of holes,
cut off all that can be removed with a trowel without delay; next allow the
surface to dry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean, dry burlap to
completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout shall remain after
this rubbing. Complete the entire cleaning and grouting operation for the grout
to dry after it has been cut with the trowel, so it can be wiped off clean with
the burlap.

On the day after the repair Work, the concrete surfaces should again be
wiped off clean with dry burlap to remove any inadvertent dust leave no built-
up surfaces on the parent surfaces. Employ, if possible a used piece of burlap
containing old hardened mortar to act as a mild abrasive. Use of find abrasive
stone if needed to remove any remaining built-up film without breaking
through the surface film of the original concrete. Such scrubbing should be
light and sufficient only to remove excess material without Working up a lather
of mortar or changing the texture of concrete. Following the final bagging or
stoning operation, provide a thorough wash down with stiff bristle brushes to
remove all extraneous materials and spray the concrete surface with a fine
fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least
three days after application of the pit repair grout.

(i) Rust Stains

7 – 28
 All rust stains are to be removed employing the following procedure:

The rust stain shall be soaked for 10 minutes with a solution of (0.055
lb.) 25gm of sodium citrate in (0.33lb) 150 gms water (brushing the
solution at short intervals is satisfactory). Then the surface is sprinkled
with crystals of sodium hydrosulfite and covered with a paste of
Fuller’s Earth and water. On a vertical surface, the paste is applied
with a trowel, with the crystals first sprinkled on the paste so they will
be in direct contact with the stain. The paste is allowed to dry for 10
minutes then scraped off and the treatment repeated if necessary.

(ii) Repairing of Formed Surfaces

It is the intention of Specification to require, forms, mixture of concrete

and Workmanship so that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will
require no patching. Any concrete which is not formed as required and
conforming to approve samples or for any reason is out of alignment
or level or shows a defective surface, shall be removed from the job
by the Contractor at his expense unless the Engineer grants
permission to repair the defective area. Permission to patch any such
area shall not be considered as waiver of the Engineer’s right to
require a complete removal of defective Work if the repair does not, in
his opinion, satisfactorily restore the quality and appearance of the
surface. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of acceptability of
appearance.

7.8 Repair of Surface Defects

7.8.1 General

(a) Any concrete failing to meet the specified strength or not formed as shown on
drawings, concrete out of alignment, concrete with surfaces beyond required
tolerances or with defective surfaces which cannot be properly repaired or
patched in the opinion of the Engineer shall be removed at Contractor’s cost.
The Engineer may reject any defective concrete and order it to be cut out in
part or in whole and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

7 – 29
 (b) All ties and bolt holes and all repairable defective areas shall be patched
immediately after form removal.

7.8.2 Repair of Defective Areas

(a) All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to
sound concrete. The area to be patched and an area at least 6 inch. (150
mm) wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water
from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of
approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand passing a No. 25 BS Sieve
and shall then be well brushed into the surface.
(b) The patching mixture shall be made of the same material and of
approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except that the
coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more
than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White Portland
cement shall be substituted for a part of the grey Portland cement on exposed
concrete in order to produce a colour matching the colour of the surrounding
concrete, as determined by a trial patch.
(c) The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling
and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to
stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until
it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.
(d) After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond
coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to
loose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The
mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to
leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface to permit initial
shrinkage it shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hour before being finally
finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for 7 days. Metal tools shall
not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed
(e) Where as-cast finishes are specified, the quantity of patched area shall be
strictly limited. The combined total of patched areas in as-cast surfaces shall
not exceed 6 sq ft. In each 100 sq ft of as-cast surface. This is in addition to
form tie patches, if the project design permits ties to fall within as-cast areas.
(f) Any patches in as-cast architectural concrete shall be indistinguishable from
surrounding surfaces. The mix formula for patching mortar shall be
determined by trial to obtain a good colour match with the concrete when both
patch and concrete are cured and dry. After initial set, surfaces of patches

7 – 30
 shall be dressed manually to obtain the same texture as surrounding
surfaces.
(g) Patches in architectural concrete surfaces shall be cured for 7 days. Patches
shall be protected from premature drying to the same extent as the body of
the concrete.

7.8.3 Tie and Bolt Holes

After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, the tie and bolt holes shall be filled
solid with patching mortar.

7.8.4 Proprietary Materials

If permitted or required by the Engineer, proprietary compounds for adhesion or as

patching ingredients may be used in lieu of or in addition to the foregoing patching
procedures. Such compounds shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations with prior approval of the Engineer.

7.9 Concrete Construction Tolerance

Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawings for any Individual
structure or feature thereof maximum permissible deviations from established lines,
grades and dimensions shall conform to the following. The Contractor is expected to
set and maintain concrete limits. These allowable tolerances shall not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for correct fitting of indicated materials. Those
tolerances are not cumulative.

(a) Variation from the plumb (or the specified better for inclined walls)
(i) In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, and walls and in arises.
(A) In any 10 ft. (3 meter) of length or height: 1/4” (6 mm)
(B) In any storey or 20 ft. (6 meter) maximum: 3/8” (10 mm)
(C) Maximum for the entire length or height: 1” (25 mm)
(i) For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves and other
conspicuous lines.
(A) In any bay or 20 ft. (6 meter) maximum 1/4” (6 mm)
(B) Maximum for the entire length or height 1/2” (13 mm)

(b) Variation from the level or from the grades indicated on the drawings.
(i) In floors, ceilings, beams soffits and in arises.
(A) In any 10 ft. (3 meter) of length 1/4” (6 mm)
(B) In any bay or 20 ft. (6 meter) maximum 3/8” (10 mm)

7 – 31
 (C) Maximum for the entire length 3/4” (20 mm)
(ii) For exposed Iintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines.
(A) In any bay or 20 ft. (6 meter) maximum 1/4” (6 mm)
(B) Maximum for the entire length 3/8” (10 mm)

(c) Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and
related position of columns, walls and partitions.
(A) In any bay or 10 ft. (3 meter) maximum 1/2” (13 mm)
(B) Maximum for the entire length 1” (25 mm)

(d) Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves,

Floor and wall openings +1/4” (+6mm)

(e) Variation in cross-Sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the

thickness of slabs and walls.
(A) Minus 1/4” (6mm)
(B) Plus 1/2” (13mm)

(f) Footings
(i) Variation in dimensions in plan Minus
(A) Minus 1/2” (13 mm)
Plus (plus variation applied to concrete only, not to reinforcing bars or
dowels).
(ii) Misplacement or eccentricity
2 percent of the footing width in the direction of
misplacement but not more than (applies to
Concrete only, not to reinforcing bars or dowels). 2” (15 mm)
(iii) Reduction in thickness Minus 5 percent of specified thickness

(g) (i) Variation in Steps

(A) Rise 1/8” (3 mm)
(B) Tread 1/4” (6 mm)
(ii) In consecutive Steps:
(A) Rise 1/16” (1.5 mm)
(B) Tread 1/8” (3 mm)

(h) Tolerances for Pavements

(A) Departure from established alignment ± 1/2” (413mm)

7 – 32
 (B) Departure from established longitudinal
grade on any time ±1/4” (±6mm)
(C) Departure from transverse template
contour except at transverse joints. ± 1/8” (3mm)
(D) Departure from transverse template
contour at transverse joints,
width of one traffic lane ±1/8”(+3mm)

(i) Pavements for parking areas

The tolerances are twice the values listed for pavements.

7.10 Acceptance of Structure

7.10.1 General

(a) Completed concrete Work which meets all applicable requirements will be
accepted subject to the other terms of the Contract Documents.
(b) Completed concrete Work which fails to meet one or more of the
requirements and which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be
accepted subject to the other terms of the Contract Documents.
(c) Completed concrete Work which fails to meet one or more of the
requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted
or rejected as provided in these Specifications or in the Contract Documents.
In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining Work
complies with the requirements.

7.10.2 Dimensional Tolerances

(a) Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines smaller than permitted by the
tolerances of clause 9 shall be considered potentially deficient in strength and
subject to the provisions of sub clause 9.4
(b) Formed surfaces resulting in concrete outlines larger than permitted by the
tolerance of clause 9 may be rejected and the excess material shall be
subject to removal. If removal of the excess material is permitted, it shall be
accomplished in such a manner as to maintain the strength of the Section and
to meet all other applicable requirements of function and appearance.
Permission is required if excess material is to be removed in accordance with
this clause.

7 – 33
 (c) Concrete members cast in the wrong location may be rejected if the strength,
appearance or function of the structure is adversely affected or if misplaced
items interfere with other construction.
(d) Inaccurately formed concrete surfaces exceeding the limits of Clause 9 or of
Clause 5.1 of Section Formwork’ shall be removed and replaced and those
that are exposed to view, may be rejected and shall be repaired or removed
and replaced if required.

7.10.3 Appearance

(a) Architectural concrete with surface defects exceeding the limitations of Sub-
clause 5.1 of Clause 5 of the Section, ‘Formwork’ shall be removed and
replaced.
(b) Other concrete exposed to view with defects which adversely affect the
appearance of the specified finish may be repaired only be approved
methods.
(c) Concrete not exposed to view is not subject to rejection for defective
appearance.

7.10.4 Strength of Structure

(a) The strength of the structure in place will be considered potentially deficient if
it fails to comply with any requirements which control the strength of the
structure, including but not necessarily limited to the following conditions.
(i) Concrete strength requirements not considered to be satisfied in
accordance with clause 6 hereof
(ii) Reinforcing steel size, quantity, strength, position or arrangement at
variance with the requirements as listed under specification of
‘Reinforcement’ or in the Contract documents.
(iii) Concrete which differs, from the required dimensions or location in
such a manner as to reduce the strength.
(iv) Curing less than that specified.
(v) Inadequate protection of concrete from extremes of temperature
during early stages of hardening and strength development.
(vi) Mechanical injury, construction fires, accidents of premature removal
of formwork likely to result in deficient strength.
(vii) Poor Workmanship likely to result in deficient strength.
(b) Structural analysis and/or additional testing may be required when the
strength of the structure is considered potentially deficient.

7 – 34
 (c) Core tests may be required when the strength of the concrete in place is
considered potentially deficient.
(d) Core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain or if structural analysis
does not confirm the safety of the structure, load tests may be required and
their result evaluated in accordance with British Standard, CP 110 or ACI 318.
(e) Concrete Work judged inadequate by structural analysis or by results of a
load test shall be reinforced with additional construction if so directed by the
Engineer or shall be replaced, at the Contractor’s expense.
(f) The Contractor shall pay all costs incurred in providing the additional testing
and/or analysis required by this Section.
(g) All costs of additional testing and/or analysis which is made at the Employer
request and which is not required by these Specifications, or by the Contract
Documents shall be borne by the Contractor

7.11 Vapour Barrier

(a) Vapour barrier shall be polyethylene building film, the film shall be 200 micron
thick.
(b) The quality of material shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use in the
Works.
(c) Vapour barrier shall be laid in position wherever shown on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
(d) The material shall be supplied in rolls and laid by rolling over the prepared
surface at the levels and position in the areas shown on the Drawings. Where
joint is necessary at the side or end of a sheet, this shall be a double weld
folded joint made by placing the edges together and folding over twice
continuously taking the top edge prior to concreting. The Contractor shall
protect the film sheets from damages during laying and subsequent
operations and shall replace at his cost all damaged film sheets to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
(e) Manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions along with the sample of
material shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

7.12 PVC Water Stop/Hydrofoil

7.12.1 Material

All PVC water stops/hydrofoil shall be central bulb type from a manufacturer
approved by the Engineer. The specific gravity of PVC water stop/hydrofoil shall not

7 – 35
 be less than 1.37 & full stretch Break cut intensity when tested at normal temperature
shall not be less than 1878 Psi.

The material shall have a modulus of rigidity of 853 Psi at 50 0F & 10544 Psi at
680F.

7.12.2 Placing & Connections

In general all PVC water stops/hydrofoil shall be placed in the centre of the structural
member. Each piece of the water stop-hydrofoil shall be of maximum practicable
length. An ordinary sharp knife saw or any other sharp tool can be used to cut the
water stop. Joints at inter Sections and at ends of pieces shall be made in the
manner most appropriate to the material being used. Joints shall develop effective
water tightness fully equal to that of the continuous water stop material and shall
permanently retain their flexibility. For straight line connection melting method of
connection can be used by pressing two water stops intended for connection against
a heated iron or copper sheet. When they are melted, the two are combined.

After joining, the water stop should be allowed to cool.

For all other connections such as T-type or L-type, the welding method of joining
should be used. Welding rod of same material as the water stop shall be used. The
welding rod & the water stop shall be heated & melt at the same time, by means of
heated air jetting from the hot jet gun.

7.13 Measurement and Payment

7.13.1 Material

Measurement and payment for concrete, reinforcement, PVC water Work will be
made in accordance with the provisions of this clause specified hereinafter.

Concrete will be measured for the number of cubic feet acceptably placed complete
in all respect as per Drawings and in strict accordance with this Section of
specification.

Measurement for steel reinforcement will be made of number of kilograms

reinforcement steel acceptably placed on the basis of the lengths of bars installed in
accordance with the approved Drawings or bar schedules or as directed, converted
to weight for the size of bars listed by the use of unit weights per linear foot as given
in the following table:

7 – 36
 Bar Size Unit Weight Pounds (lbs) Per Foot
¼“ 0.167
3/8” 0.376
½“ 0.668
5/8” 1.043
¾” 1.502
7/8” 2.044
1” 2.670
1 1/8” 3.775
1 ¼” 4.172
1 3/8” 5.049

Steel in laps and embedment indicated on the Drawings or as required by the

Engineer will be paid for at the steel unit price. No measurement for payment will be
made for the steel consumed in providing supports and for the additional steel in
laps, which are authorized for the convenience of the Contractor.

Polyvinyl chloride and/or metal water stopper of the size gauge as shown on the
Drawings will be measured for the number of linear feet acceptably placed in the
Work. In computing the quantities, no allowance will be made for laps.

7.13.2 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made in accordance with the unit prices in the Bill of Quantities for
the various items in accordance with the specifications and shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, shuttering, equipment and labour and for
performing all operation necessary to complete the Work.

Description Unit

(A) Provide and lay concrete Cft

(B) Furnish and Fix Reinforcing Steel Kg
including Cutting, Placing and
Binding complete

(C) Furnish and Install Water Stopper

(i) PVC [Link]
(ii) Stainless Steel [Link]

7 – 37
 Chapter – 8

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS

8.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered by this Section, consists of supply of all material, labour, plant,
equipment and appliances including welding, bolts, nuts, washers, anchor bolts,
embedded parts etc, fabrication, erection and painting in accordance with the
specifications and as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer.

8.2 Drawings

Design Drawings shall be prepared by the Engineer and supplied to the Contractor.
These shall contain main dimensions, sizes of members, typical details of joints.

Workshop drawings shall then be prepared by the Contractor from the design
drawings supplied and submitted to the Engineer for approval. Fabrication shall not
be commenced until approval of Workshop drawings has been obtained from the
Engineer.

8.3 Material

Except otherwise stated in the drawings, the material specifications shall conform to
the following. Wherever necessary the Contractor may use equivalent alternative
material subject to approval of the Engineer.

8.3.1 Structural Steel

Structural steel for structures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A-36 or
equivalent

8.3.2 Steel Forging

Steel forging shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A235.

8.3.3 Steel Casting

Steel casting shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A27.

8.3.4 Welding

Welding Electrodes for manual shielded metal arc welding shall conform to AWS A
5.1 latest edition or the A 5.5 latest edition. Equivalent locally manufactured
electrodes may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.

8–1
 Common Bolts, Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers Bolts and Nuts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 307.

8.3.5 High Strength Bolts

High strength carbon steel bolts including nuts and washers shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A325 latest editions and of AISI B18.2

8.3.6 Washers

Cut Washers shall be of structural grade steel and shall conform to the dimension of
the manufacturer’s regular standard for plain washers for the size of bolts used.

8.3.7 Cast Iron

Shall conform to the requirements of latest edition of ASTM A 48.

8.4 Fabrication

8.4.1 Straightening of Material

Rolled material, before being Worked upon must be straightened within tolerances,
by ASTM specifications A6 Straightening, necessarily shall be done by mechanical
means or by the application of a limited amount of localized heat. The temperature of
heated areas, as measured by approved methods, shall not exceed 1100 0F for
A514 steel or 1200 0F for other steels.

8.4.2 Cutting

As far as possible, cutting must be done by shearing. Oxygen cutting shall be done
where shear cutting is not possible and shall preferably be done by Machine. All
edges shall be free from gauges, notches or burs. If necessary the same shall be
removed by grinding.

8.4.3 Holes Punching Drilling.

Holes shall be punched where thickness of the material is not greater than the
diameter of bolt +3 mm. Where the thickness of the material is greater the holes
shall either be drilled or sub-punched and reamed to size. The die for all sub-
punched holes and the drill to all sub-drilled holes shall be at least 1.58 mm smaller
than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt. Holes for A514 steel plates over 13
mm thick shall be drilled.

8.4.4 Welding

8–2
 (a) General
The execution and inspection of welding will be done in accordance with the
provisions of the American welding society code for welding in Building
construction, D1.0. No welding for piping/electrical supports shall be made
transversely to any tension flanges of trusses, beams or columns.

(b) Automatic sub-merged Arc Welding

For all built-up members, i.e. sections fabricated from plates and flat bars or
compound rolled sections, plate and box girders, where long continuous,
welding is to be done, should be executed by Automatic submerged Arc
Welding process in accordance with relevant AWS specifications.

(c) Maximum and minimum size and lengths of fillet welds shall be in accordance
with AISC specifications.

Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint
or any other foreign matter except mill scale which withstands vigorous wire
brushing.

(d) Tolerances
A variation of one (1) mm is permissible in the over all length of members with
both ends finished for Contact bearing. The bearing surfaces prepared to a
common plane by mining.

Members without end finished for contact bearing which are to be framed to
other steel parts of the structure shall have a variation from detailed length
not greater than 3 mm.

8.5 Surface Preparation / Painting

8.5.1 Surface Preparation

All structural steel material i.e. rolled steel sections, plates, pipes, flat bars,
chequered plates shall be cleaned free from loose scale, rust, burrs slag, etc. by
means of sand blasting.

8.5.2 Painting

(a) Immediately after surface preparation all material shall be given one prime
coat of rust preventive paint.
(b) After fabrication one shop coat of prime paint and then one coat of enamel
paint shall be applied.

8–3
 (c) One final coat of enamel paint shall be applied after erection of all
components.
(d) The type of primer and enamel paints to be applied shall be as specified on
the drawings.
(e) All other requirements for the specified paint system shall be in accordance
with the paint manufacturer’s specification recommendations.
(f) The Contractor shall use the best quality of the type of paint specified and
shall get the same approved by the Engineer.
(g) Steel Work/Surfaces not to be painted
(i) Steel Work to be encased/embedded in concrete or surface in coated
with contact with concrete or grout shall not be painted, but shall be
given a cement wash after sand blasting.
(ii) Machined finished surfaces shall not be painted but shall be coated
with rust preventive compound, (approved by the Engineer)
immediately after finishing. Such surfaces shall also be protected with
wooden pads or other suitable means for transportation. Unassembled
pins, keys, and bolt thread shall be greased and wrapped with
moisture resistant paper.

8.6 Inspection and Tests

(a) Manufacturer’s Work Test Certificate for all material used shall be furnished
by the Contractor for Engineer’s scrutiny and approval.
(b) Rolling tolerance of all shapes and profile according to AlSC shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the American Society for Testing and
Materials Designation A.6. These shall be checked by the Contractor before
being Worked upon and shall be rejected if found not within limits.
(c) The Contractor shall arrange for analysis and test of all material rolled locally
at a testing laboratory selected by the Engineer.
(d) Inspection of Welding
The inspection of welding shall be performed in accordance with the
American Welding Society specifications, as directed by the Engineer.
(e) Rejection
Materials or Workmanship not in reasonable conformance with the provisions
of these specifications shall be rejected at any time during the progress of the
Work or the completion and erection at site.
8.7 Miscellaneous Steel Works

8.7.1 General

8–4
 The Work covered shall include furnishing, fabricating, installing and painting
miscellaneous steel Work include the following:

(i) Steel windows/ventilators

(ii) Steel louvered doors
(iii) Steel rollup shutter
(iv) Gl flashing
(v) Steel gate and steel fence
(vi) Steel ladders/rungs.
(vii) Steel gratings
(viii) Moulded steel sheet door frames
(ix) Steel railing/fencing
(x) Steel grill
(xi) Steel wire gauze

All steel fabricated items shall conform to the drawings, details and instructions of the
Engineer. Contractor shall submit detailed shop/erection drawings of the above listed
items to the Engineer for approval. Drawing, material, fabrication, surface preparation
shall conform to the applicable requirements of relevant clauses of these
specifications. Any proposed deviation due to field conditions and availability of local
material shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

8.8 Measurement and Payment

8.8.1 Measurement

All items relating to steel Work will be measured in units specified in BOQ for the
Work satisfactorily completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the
Engineer.

8.8.2 Payment

Payment will be made in accordance with the unit prices in the BOQ of various
items in accordance with the specifications and shall constitute full compensation
for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour and for performing all operations
necessary to complete the Work.

8–5
 Chapter – 9

BRICK MASONRY

9.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with furnishing and installing brick masonry in position including Portland
cement and sand for mortar & masonry, complete in strict accordance with this
Section, of the specifications and applicable drawings and subject to the terms and
conditions of the Contract.

9.2 Materials

(a) Portland cement for mortar shall conform to the applicable requirements
specified in the Section “Plain and Reinforced Concrete”.
(b) Sand for mortar shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall conform to the
applicable requirements for sand specified in the Section “Plain and
Reinforced Concrete”.
(c) Water used in the manufacture of bricks and in the preparation of mortar shall
be free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and
other impurities, and will be tested and approved by the Engineer.

9.3 Mortar

(a) Mortar for first class block masonry, except where otherwise directed by the
Engineer, shall consist of one part Portland cement to six parts of damp loose
mortar sand by volume and sufficient water to produce proper consistency for
the intended use. Where directed by the Engineer for increased Workability,
hydrated lime putty, approved by the Engineer, shall be added to the mortar
but shall not exceed 25 percent, by volume of the dry cement.
(b) Methods and equipment used for mixing mortar be such as will accurately
determine and control the amount of each separate ingredient entering into
the mortar and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Mortar shall
be mixed only in sufficient quantities for immediate use and all mortar not
used within 30 minutes after addition of water to the mix shall be rejected.
Retempering of mortar shall not be allowed. The mixers shall be thoroughly
cleaned and washed at the end of each day’s Work.

9–1
9.4 Brick

(a) All bricks, except otherwise specified, shall be of first class quality made from
good brick earth, free from saline deposit and shall be hand moulded. They
shall be thoroughly burnt without being vitrified, shall be regular, uniform in
shape and size with sharp and square edges, parallel faces and of deep red
or copper colour. First class bricks shall be homogeneous in texture and shall
emit a clear ringing sound when struck, and shall be free from flaws, cracks,
chips, stones and modules of lime. First class brick in an oven dried condition
shall not absorb more than 1/5 of its weight of water when immersed one hour
in water at 21 to 27 degrees centigrade and shall show no signs of
efflorescence on subsequent drying. The average compressive strength of
five representative first class bricks shall be not less than 2000 psi and not
less than 1500 psi for any individual brick.
(b) All bricks shall be manufactured by the Trench Kiln Method or other standard
methods approved by the Engineer. The earth used in manufacturing bricks
shall be carefully selected and shall be free from objectionable quantities of
lime, gravel coarse sand, roots, or other organic matter. Salts shall not
exceed 0.3 percent and calcium carbonate shall not exceed 2.0 percent.
(c) The moulds used in the manufacture of bricks shall be thoroughly sanded
before each use and shall be sufficiently larger than the size of the bricks
being manufactured to allow for shrinkage in drying and burning. Over-size,
irregular and worn moulds shall be destroyed. Each finished brick for brick
masonry shall be 9 inch by 4-1/2 inch by 3 inch in size and shall weigh
between 3.2 to 4.2 kilograms. All bricks shall have a “frog” 1/4 inch deep on
one face.
(d) Samples of the bricks shall be submitted to the Engineer with test reports for
his approval. Bricks of approved samples shall only be used in the Works. If
at any time during the progress of the Work, use of sub-standard material is
found by the Engineer, such Work shall be rejected and the Contractor shall
replace the rejected Work at his cost

9.5 Placing

(a) The methods and equipment used for transporting the brick and mortar shall
be such as will not damage the brick not delay the use of mixed mortar Brick
shall not be placed during rains sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash the
mortar from the brick. Mortar already spread which becomes diluted by rain
shall be removed and replaced before continuing with the Work. All brick to

9–2
 be used in brick masonry shall be moistened with water for three to four hours
before they are used by a method which will ensure that each brick is
thoroughly and uniformly wetted. All bricks shall be free from water adhering
to their surface when they are placed in the brick masonry.
(b) Bricks shall be laid “frog” upward with mortar joints and in English and
Flemish bond as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Both
bed and vertical joints shall be 1/4 inch in thickness completely filled with
cement mortar as specified herein, and each brick shall be bedded by firmly
tapping with the handle of the trowel. All horizontal joints shall be parallel and
all vertical joints in alternate courses shall be directly over one another.
Excess mortar at the outer edges shall be removed and joints drawn straight
with the edge of a trowel and a straight edge. All anchors and similar Work
required to be embedded in the brick masonry shall be installed as the Work
progresses. At the completion of the Work all holes or defective mortar joints
shall be cut out and pointed.
(c) Where shown on the drawing the exterior faces of the walls shall be finished
by striking the joints as the Work proceeds. The joints shall be struck by
raking the green mortar after the brick Work has been laid and finishing the
joint with a pointing tool. Horizontal joints shall be struck to form a weathered
joint and vertical joints shall be struck with a V notch. Care shall be taken that
the striking tools do not develop a cutting edge as the object of striking the
joint is to compress the mortar into the joints.
(d) The exposed faces of all brick masonry shall be thoroughly cleaned and left
bare with struck joints as specified above.

9.6 Curing and Repair

(a) All brick masonry shall be water cured and shall be kept wet for at least seven
days by an approved method which will keep all surfaces to be cured
continuously wet. Water used for curing shall meet the requirements of the
Specifications for water used in the manufacture of bricks.
(b) If, after the completion of any brick masonry Work, the brick is not in
alignment or level, or does not conform to the lines and levels shown on the
Drawings, or shows a defective surface, it shall be moved and replaced by
the Contractor at his expense unless the Engineer grants permission, in
writing, to patch or replace the defective area

9–3
9.7 Scaffolding

Contractor shall provide safe scaffolding of adequate strength for use of Workmen at
all levels and heights at his own expense. Scaffolding which is unsafe in the opinion
of the Engineer shall not be used until it has been strengthened and made safe for
use of Workmen. Cost of scaffolding etc., shall be included by the Contractor in the
unit rate for masonry items.

Damage to masonry from scaffolding or from any other cause shall be repaired by
the Contractor at his own cost.

9.8 Tolerances

All brick Work shall be erected plumb and true to line and level with maximum
variation in any storey height or any length of wall being one mm in one meter. The
maximum tolerance in the length, height or width of any single masonry unit shall be
+ 1/8 inch.

9.9 Damp Proof Course

9.9.1 Walls – Horizontal Application

All damp proof course unless otherwise specified shall consist of class ‘C’ cement
concrete 2 inch thick shall be laid at required levels as per drawings and instructions
of the Engineer. The D.P.C shall be tamped, consolidated, leveled and edges and
corners made to the requirements of the relevant drawings including finishing and
curing complete. After the DPC has dried apply two coat of bitumen 10/20 grade @
20 lb/100 sq ft.

9.9.2 Walls – Vertical Application

A damp proof course shall be applied if shown on the drawings, on wall below plinth
shall consists of cement sand plaster (1:6) ¾” thick shall be applied on walls below
plinth on interior and exterior faces as shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. After a curing period of 3 days hot bitumen 10/20 grade be applied on
dried surface of mortar @20 lb/100 [Link]. in two coats.

9.9.3 Floors

A damp proof course if shown on the drawings shall be applied under the floors in
the same way as specified under wall horizontal application.

9–4
9.10 Measurement and Payment

9.10.1 BrickWork

[Link] Measurement

Measurement for brick Work shall be made in number of cubic feet of brick Work
provided within the limits as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

[Link] Payment

Payment for brickWork shall be made at the Contract unit price per cubic feet.
Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
labour including all incidentals necessary to complete the Work.

9.10.2 Horizontal Damp Proof Course and Vertical Damp Proof Course

[Link] Measurement

Measurement for damp proof courses shall be made in per square feet of Work
provided within the limits as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

[Link] Payment

Payment for damp proof courses shall be made at the Contract unit price per square
feet stated in the BOQ. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all
materials, equipment and labour including all incidentals necessary to complete the
Work.

9–5
 Chapter – 10

CARPENTRY AND JOINERY

10.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered under this Section of Specifications consists of providing all
material, labour, plant, equipment, appliances and performing all operations
connected with the fabrication and erection of all woodwork, mill Work, construction
assembly, surface finish treatment and building in of all cabinet type items, supports
etc. of wood or metal and incidentals, associated woodwork appurtenances,
procuring and applying preservatives, installation of Finish Hardware in connection
with finish woodwork as per details shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The scope of this Section is covered with detailed specifications as laid
down herein.

10.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following British and ISO Standards are relevant to these
specifications wherever applicable.

10.2.1 ISO (International Organization for Standardization)

1891 Bolts, screens, nuts and accessories-Terminology and nomenclature

1097 Plywood - Measurement of dimensions of panels

1098 Veneer ply wood for general use-General requirements

2427 Veneer ply wood with rotary cut veneer for general use-Classification by
appearance of panels with outer veneer of beech

2429 Ply Wood Veneer ply wood with rotary cut veneer for general use-
Classification by appearance of panels with outer veneers of brand leaved
species of tropical Africa

3804 Ply wood- Determination of dimension of test pieces

3805 Plywood-Determination of density

3806 Ply wood-Determination of moisture content

6442 Door leaves-Measurement of defects of generatness

6443 Door leaves-Measurement of dimensions and of defects of squareness

6444 Door leaves-Test of behavior under humidity variations

10 – 1
10.2.2 BSI (British Standards Institution)

459 Wooden doors

1186 Quality of timber and workmanship in joinery
1127 Hinges
1331 Builder’s hardware for housing
1567 Wood door frames and linings nails
1202 Nails
1203 Specifications for synthetic resin adhesive for plywood
1204 Synthetic resin adhesives for wood
1282 Guide to choice, use and application of wood preservatives
1494 Fixing accessories for building purposes
1579 Connectors for timber
3842 Treatment of ply wood with preservatives

10.3 Materials

10.3.1 Timber

(a) All wood shall Consist of cedrous deodar (referred in the document as
deodar) having density of 500-600 kg/m3.
(b) Wood local known as Partal to be used in framing where specified.

[Link] General Characteristics

All the timber shall be in accordance with the requirements of BSI No: 1186, quality
of timber and workmanship in joinery. The whole of the timber shall be from the heart
of sound and fully grown tree, uniform in substance, straight in fiber, first class quality
properly seasoned, free from large or loose dead knots, open shakes and excessive
sapwood. The scantlings of all timbers shall be bright, sound and square edged. The
moisture content of timber shall not be more than ten (10) percent.

[Link] Preservation of Wood

Prior to installation of all finish wood Works in their respective positions,

preservatives shall be applied to safeguard the wood Work against fungus, termite
and bores.

The preservatives shall be of the best available quality of solignam oil (clear) as
approved by the Engineer. The method of application shall be strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. The treatment and application of all the
preservatives shall comply with the requirements of BSCP 98:1964.

10 – 2
[Link] Adhesive
The adhesives shall conform to the requirements of BSI No. 745 “Animal Glues for
Wood” or as directed and approved by the Engineer.
[Link] Nails and Screws

All nails and screws shall comply with requirements of BSI NO 1202 and BSI
NO 1210 respectively.

[Link] Ply Wood

(i) The plywood shall comply in all respects with BSI No. 1455:1963. All the
plywood shall only be obtained from manufactures approved by the Engineer.

Plywood used for doors, paneling and other similar Works shall be to the
thickness and size as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The grade shall be first quality and the face and back shall be free from end
joints, dead knots, overlaps, patches and other similar detects the surfaces
shall be free, smooth for painting or polishing.

(ii) The veneer shall be of the required thickness and quality including base
veneer and shall be impregnated with an approved adhesive and machine
compressed. Such machine pressed veneered wood shall be fixed on all
sides of the inner core wood (soft wood of approved quality) after it has been
treated with water resistant hot setting glue.

10.4 Samples

All samples of the material used for the Work under this Section of Specification shall
be approved by the Engineer and same type of material shall be used throughout the
Work. If the Engineer desires to get the material tested, this will be done by the
Contractor at his own cost from a laboratory approved by the Engineer.

10.5 Fabrications

10.5.1 General

Unwrought’ timber shall be used. Sawing shall be done true to the size and
dimensions to finally meet the requirements of specified sizes and dimensions of the
finished Work.

All framing shall be joined as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
All joints shall be secured with sufficient number of nails. The Contractor shall

10 – 3
 perform all necessary mortising, tonguing, grooving, matching, tonguing, housing,
rebating and all operations required for the correct jointing. The Contractor shall also
provide all metal plates, screws, nails and other fixing material that may be ordered
by the Engineer for the proper execution of the joinery Work. Fabrication that develop
defects due to bad workmanship or unsound materials not conforming to these
specifications and the directions of the Engineer, shaI1 be cut out and replaced at
Contractor’s own expense before the expiry of the maintenance period.

10.5.2 Doors

(i) Verify design and size of doors required for each opening. Door thicknesses
shall be 40 mm (124 inch.) unless otherwise indicated.
(ii) Fabricate flush wood doors in accordance with the following requirements.

(iii) Cores

Edging of doors and shutters shall be of wood as shown on the drawings and
cores shall be Partal wood (solid core) planed to a smooth uniform thickness.
All doors and shutters shall have Deodar wood lipping on all edges as per
details shown on the drawing.

(iv) Face Panels

(a) Door facing on each side of door shall consist of plywood have total
minimum thickness of 1/8 inch before sanding.
(b) Door plywood shall be bonded to each other, and to core unit with
approved adhesive and machine compressed.

10.6 Protection of Materials

All materials and assembled units shall be protected from weather and stored in such
a way as to prevent decay and attack by fungus and termites.

10.7 Wooden Doors & Door Frames

10.7.1 Materials

(a) First class Deodar wood as approved by the Engineer shall be used for the
door frames and full/half glazed and paneled shutters.
(b) The plywood and veneering shall be of selected best quality as approved by
the Engineer.

10 – 4
10.7.2 Exterior and Interior Door Frames

All exterior and interior door frames shall be constructed 18 SWG M.S sheet or of
wood as shown on the drawings.

The door frames shall be secured in place by means of mild steel anchors
welded/screwed in place and built into the masonry as it is being constructed7There
shall be one such anchor near the top and bottom of each jamb hut not over 900 mm
intervals between the top and bottom anchors.

10.7.3 Exterior and Interior Wooden Doors

The Engineer shall unless otherwise shown or specified, of the paneled type, flush
and type as shown on the Drawings or as direct the exterior and interior wooden
door.

All the door shall conform to the following requirements:

Paneled doors shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Part I of

British Standard Specification No. 459 with the additional requirements that panels in
exterior openings shall be assembled with waterproof glue, glued tacked in place.
Flush door shall comply with BSI 459 Part-2 and shall consist of solid core 40mm
(1½ inch.) thick shutters as shown on drawings.

10.7.4 Door Shutters

The shutters will be fixed to the frames with approved quality hardware schedule.

(a) All doors, shutters shall be fabricated in a workman manner strictly to the
correct sizes and shapes as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
(b) The door shutters shall have solid core as shown on the Drawings. It shall be
built in Sections, properly jointed and glued together, both sides being
covered with plywood of the required thickness and approved quality. The
surfaces shall be prepared for painting or polishing.
(c) The arrangements of inner core for solid shutters shall be approved by the
Engineer. It shall be so adjusted that circulation of air is free and
uninterrupted. Minute holes shall be provided in edges at suitable places to
admit and exit air.
(d) Each door shall be constructed so as to permit the installation of hinges,
knobs and locks in the position shown on the Drawings.

10 – 5
 (e) Completed doors shall be sound, rigid and free from defects and warp. All
edges shall have Deodar wood tipping and shall be aligned and smooth,
joints shall be close fitting, hard wood dowelled or mortised framed and of
strength to maintain the structure properties of the member connected. All
adjoining faces and edges shall be flush and smooth. Edges shall be
rectangular and solid

10.7.5 Fitting, Hanging and trimming

All the doors shall be fitted, hung and trimmed as hereinafter specified and as
indicated on the Drawings.

Doors shall have a clearance of 4 mm at sides and top unless otherwise directed by
the Engineer and shall have 5 mm clearance at bottom. Doors shall be hung and
trimmed with hardware as specified. All the locks shall be installed at the same
height and shall be located at height as directed by the Engineer.

10.7.6 Hardware

Hardware shall be of approved quality and first class finished material. The
Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Engineer for quality, shape and
pattern of all the hardware materials by providing samples and shall provide and fix
only the approved hardware materials.

Hardware shall be carefully and securely fitted. Upon handing over the Work,
hardware shall be demonstrated to operate freely. Keys shall be placed into
respective locks and upon acceptance of the Work keys shall be tagged and
delivered to the Employer.

10.7.7 Quality Assurance

(a) Tolerances: Doors shall be fabricated to following tolerances

(i) Size: Plus or minus 1.6 mm overall dimensions

(ii) Maximum Warp 3 mm
(iii) Squareness Maximum diagonal difference 3 mm ( between length of
diagonal measured on face of door from upper right corner to lower
left corner and length of diagonal measured from upper left corner to
lower right corner.)

10 – 6
10.7.8 Submittals

(a) Provide shop drawings showing door types details and locations, referred to
the door type and hardware group shown on door and hardware schedules.
(b) Provide certificates stating that doors were constructed with timber of the
species specified having moisture content and meeting equilibrium and
relative requirements.
(c) Submit samples of face veneers for selection of colour and pattern.

10.7.9 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

(i) Keep products dry, stack products off ground on level platforms, fully
protected from weather, including direct sunlight.
(ii) Identify type, size and location of each door in order to permit installation at
correct location.

10.7.10 Installation

(a) Install doors at correct openings and assure smooth swing and proper closer
with frames.
(b) Install finishes hardware in accordance with manufacturer directions.

10.8 Kitchen Cabinets/Wooden Cabinets/Wardrobe/

Side dresser/Shelves/Seats

All cabinet/wardrobes/dressers/Shelves/Seat including fittings, fixtures and hardware

shall be supplied of approved manufacturer and shall be of best quality fabricated by
using materials and details as shown on the drawings.

10.8.1 Installation

All cabinets, wardrobes and shelves/seat shall be installed in position by the skilled
workmen specialized in the job. Works shall be executed in accordance with
drawings and the Engineer’s instructions.

The Contractor shall inspect delivered cabinets, wardrobes seats and shelves and
related, parts for indication or location, size required by field measurements, finishing
hardware and similar preliminary Works. Verify locations for installation, required
floor and wall finishes, painting and all other related Work. Cabinets/wardrobe,
shelves and seats shall exactly flush the floor and wall surfaces. Cut and fit
accurately scribe strips at wall surfaces and firmly attach to bases. Secure wall
cabinet to blocking. Concealed fasteners all joints surfaces shall be smooth and

10 – 7
 even. Doors and other moving parts shall exactly fit in the frame. Refit as necessary
to ensure proper and easy operation. Ref: if necessary, all cabinet wardrobes and
shelves hardware, test for proper operation remove for painting and other finishing
and properly replace in position with all fittings and accessories.

All Work shall be thoroughly protected from damage at all times by suitable methods
approved by the Engineer. Adjacent Works shall similarly be protected from damage.
Any damage or disfigurement shall immediately made good at Contractor’s expense.

(a) Cabinet Work will be coordinated with Employer supplied items (if any) such
as cooking range etc.
(b) Kitchen cabinet Work, generally all framing will be in treated Deodar wood
with portions’ etc., in best quality commercial plywood. All exposed surfaces
will be covered by approved laminates. Exposed edges, if any, will be
covered by polished Deodar wood lipping. Where approved counter tops for
kitchen will be specified thick selected marble on painted M.S. framing.

Best quality hinges, metallic drawer guides (with bearing) and handles will be
used. Samples and shop drawings to be approved by Engineer.

10.8.2 Wardrobes

Wardrobes (and similar Works) will be made of deodar wood. Internal partitions will
be as shown on the drawings. Shutters will have a (deodar wood) louvered front
backed by laminated plywood. All louvers and exposed deodar wood edges/faces will
be polished. Best quality hinges metallic drawer guiders (with bearing) handles locks
catches etc., will be used. Shoe rack (inside wardrobe) will consist of 13 mm dia
(hollow) chrome plated M.S. rods. Samples and shop draw to be approved by the
Engineer.

10.9 Defective Work

In the event of non-conformance to specification and drawings, the wood Works shall
be rejected by the Engineers and the Contractor shall remove and replace the
rejected Work by new Work of same specifications.

10.10 Surface Preparation

The surfaces of all wood Works shall be prepared in the manner as directed by the
Engineer for polishing and painting.

10 – 8
10.11 Mack-Up Sample

After approval of shop drawings and tests etc., the Contractor shall submit at his own
cost one mock-up sample of each type of wood Works complete with all
fittings/fixtures accessories prior to the actual fabrication of the bulk.

The samples shall be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Works after
installation of at least 80% of the Works.

10 – 9
 Chapter – 11

GLAZING

11.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labour,
equipment, tools, appliances, scaffoldings and providing glass gaskets, sealants,
compound and other materials required for performing all operations in connection
with the installation and setting of all types of glass, glazing and glass blocks
complete, in every respect in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. The scope of this section of Specifications is covered with detailed
Specifications as laid down herein

11.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following British Standards are relevant to these specifications

wherever applicable.

11.2.1 BSI (British Standards Institution)

(i) Glass for glazing

(ii) Security glazing Part I & II
(iii) CP.152 Glazing

11.3 General

(a) Glazing sealant shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the

particular application.
(b) Spacer shims (distance pieces) shall he plasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC).
Thickness shall be equal to space shown on drawings between glass and
rebates, bead or cleat. Depth shall give not less than ¼ inch cover of glazing
sealant.
(c) Contractor shall submit samples for each type of glass, minimum 4 ft x 4 ft. in
size with protective edges. Samples of glazing sealant minimum 0.1 litre
specified types shall be submitted Samples of minimum of three glass blocks
shall also be submitted
(d) Contractor shall submit 1 foot long sample each type of glazing gasket.
(e) Contractor shall also submit printed materials manufacturers installation
instructions for specified glazing gaskets, compounds sealants and

11 – 1
 accessories including description of required equipment and procedures and
precautions to be observed.

11.4 Delivery Storage and Handling

(a) Contractor shall deliver materials in manufacturers original, unopened

containers clearly labeled with manufacturer’s name and address, material,
brand, type, class and rating as applicable.
(b) Contractor shall store the materials in original unopened containers with
labels intact/protected from ground contact and from elements which may
damage glass.
(c) Contractor shall handle the materials in a manner to prevent breakage of
glass and damage to surfaces.

11.5 Materials

11.5.1 General

Glass shall be free from all blemishes, bubbles, distortions and other flaws of any
kind and shall be properly cut to fit the rebates so as to have a uniform clearance of 1
.6 mm round the panes between the edges of glass and the rebates. All glass shall
be best quality from reputable manufacturer (USA/Sweden) as approved by the
Engineer.

11.5.2 Glass

(a) Tinted/Plain Glass Local)

Glass for windows and ventilators and louvers shall be of specified thickness
of approved quality.

11.5.3 Glazing Sealants and Compounds

Contractor shall provide colour material to match frame in which glass is installed.
Provide only compounds known to be fully compatible with surfaces which they will
contact as follows:

(i) Two component polysulfide glazing sealant.

(ii) One component acrylic glazing sealant
(iii) Acrylic-latex glazing sealant consisting of modified latex rubber and acrylic
emulsion, non-hardening, non- staining and non-bleeding.
(iv) Cleaners, Primers and sealer as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
11.5.4 Accessories

11 – 2
 (a) Glazing Sealant

It shall be tape or ribbon of polymerized butyl or mixture of butyl and

polyisolbutylene compounded with inert fillers and pigments, solvent based,
95 percent solids thread or fabric reinforced, paint able, non- staining.

(b) Setting Blocks

It shall be chloroprene (Neoprene) 70 to 90 durometer hardness, compatible

with sealant used, channel shaped and of the necessary height for proper
perimeter clearance.

(c) Channels. Gaskets and Spacer’s

It shall be choloroprene (Neoprene), 40 to 50, durometer hardness

compatible with sealant used.

11.6 Installation of Glazing

(i) Glazing shall comply with the recommendations of glass and glazing
materials manufacturers.
(ii) Examine each piece of glass and discard and replace glass with edge
damage or face imperfection. All glazing shall be wind tight and fully water
tight on completion.
(iii) Clean glazing channels and other framing members indicated to receive
glass. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever electrometric sealants are to
be used. Apply primer and sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by
the sealant manufacturer and as shown on the drawings.
(iv) Trim and clean excess glazing materials from surrounding surfaces
immediately after installation and eliminate stains and discolorations.
(v) Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions to obtain high early bond strength internal cohesive strength and
surface durability.
(vi) While glazing operation is in progress care shall be taken to avoid breakage
or damage to the glass and adjoining glazing. The Contractor shall make
good at his own cost, all glass broken by his workmen while cleaning or
carrying out other operations. On the completion of the glazing Work, all glass
that has been set by the Contractor shall, if it becomes loose, within the
maintenance period, be re fixed at Contractor’s expense.

11 – 3
 (vii) No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paint and other
stains have been removed from the surface of the glass ad checked by the
Engineer for water tightness.

11.7 Protection and Cleaning of Glazing

(a) Remove all smears, labels and excess glazing sealant, leave clean inside and
outside tree from scratches. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
protection of installed glass. Before final acceptance, damaged or broken
glass shall be removed and replaced with new glass at no additional expense
to the Employer.
(b) All glass surfaces shall be washed clean both inside and outside within two
weeks prior to final acceptance by the Employer.

11 – 4
 Chapter – 12

WATER PROOFING & BUILT-UP ROOFING

12.1 Scope of Work

The Works under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and in performing all operations in any floor
and at any height in connection with installation of insulation, water-proofing and built-up
roofing, including water proof treatment to foundations and basement structures
complete in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and the applicable
drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract.

12.2 Submittal

(a) Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing layout and all the details for
construction.
(b) Samples of all materials proposed for use under this section shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval.

12.3 Materials

(a) Bitumen 10/20 grades.

(b) Polyethylene building film visqueen standard or approved equal. The film shall be
0.008 inches thick.
(c) Cement and aggregates shall be in accordance with specifications Section 206
for “plain and reinforced concrete”.
(d) Mud mortar composed of stiff clay mixed with an equal bulk of chopped rice
husk/bhoosa
(e) Brick tile conforming to specifications section 4200.

12.4 Delivery Storage and Handling

Materials shall be protected from damage during loading shipment delivery and storage
non-staining materials shall be used for blocking and packing.

12.5 Preparatory Work

(a) All scuppers and roof drains shall be placed and metal flashing, cant strips
flanges etc. shall be provided in time to be installed along with the roofing
assembly.

12 – 1
 (b) All surfaces, to be treated shall be dust free and dry. Application of roof finishes
shall not start unless the preparatory Work has been inspected and approved by
the Engineer.

12.6 Application of Roofing

(a) Roofing shall not be applied during rain or while surfaces are damp, it shall be
applied only to surfaces that are clean and dry.
(b) Mopping of surface with bitumen shall be performed so that the surface shall be
completely covered. Coats of bitumen shall be as specified in drawings. All
bitumen shall be applied with mops except that the hot surfacing application shall
be poured from a dipper.
(c) Polythene sheet shall be laid in position wherever shown in drawings. Where
joint is necessary at the side or end of the sheet, this shall be a double weld
folded joint made by placing the edges together and folding over twice
continuously taking the top edge prior to plastering or screeding. The Contractor
shall protect the sheets from damages during laying and subsequent operation
and shall replace at his own cost all damaged sheets to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
(d) Mud mortar/concrete screed of specified thickness as indicated on drawing shall
be laid in slope.
(e) Brick tiles of specified size laid over prepared base to be grouted and flush
pointed with cement sand mortar.

12.7 Water Proofing & Built Up Roofing

The water proofing treatment to reinforced cement concrete roof slabs shall be done as
specified and as indicated on the drawings.

12 – 2
 Chapter – 13

CEMENT PLASTER

13.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing~ all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances, and materials and in performing all operations in
connection with providing and installation of cement plaster, and specified external
rendering complete in strict accordance with this section of the Specifications and
applicable drawings and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract. The
scope of this Section of Specifications is covered with detailed Specifications as laid
down herein.

13.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following Pakistan, British & ASTM Standards are relevant to these
Specifications wherever applicable.

13.2.1 Pakistan Standards

PS 232 Ordinary Portland Cement

13.2.2 ISO (International Organization for Standardization)

R 597 Definitions and terminology of cement

R 679 Method of testing strength of cements, compressive and flexural strength of
plastic mortar (Rilem - (embureau method)
P 680 Chemical analysis of cement & main constituents of Portland Cement
R 681 Chemical analysis of cements-mixer Constituents of Portland cement
R 682 Chemical analysis of cements - determination of sulphur as sulphide

13.2.3 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Material)

C 144 Aggregate for Masonry mortar

C 631 Bonding Compounds for interior plastering

13.2.4 BSI (British Standards Institution)

812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sands and fillers
1199 Sands for external renderings Internal plastering with lime and Portland
cement and floor screeds
1369 Metal lathing (steel) for plastering

13 – 1
 5262 External rendered finishes
5492 Internal plastering

13.3 General

(a) Except as may be otherwise shown on surfaces specified, all plaster Work,
both internal and external shall be Ordinary Portland Cement plaster of the
required thickness as shown on the drawings.
(b) Plastering shall not commence until all electric conduits, drainage and
sanitary pipes, inlets to tanks, brackets, clamps, doors and window frames
and all sorts of inserts and embedded items are fixed in position. It shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to make sure that all such Work is carried
out by other Contractors before starting of plaster Work. Chiseling and
repairing of cement plaster shall not be permitted without the approval of the
Engineer.
(c) Sample of materials shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval prior
to use in the Works.

13.4 Material

(a) Cement for plaster shall be Ordinary Portland Cement (BS 12 or PS 232) or
Sulphate Resisting Cement (BS 4027 or P.S. 612) as specified and shall
conform to requirements specified in the section ‘Plain and Reinforced
Concrete.
(b) Sand for plaster shall comply with the requirements of BS 1199, BS 1200 or
the Pakistan Standard “Sand for Plaster” as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Water for plaster shall conform to requirement specified in the section for
“Plain and Reinforced Concrete”
(d) All materials and workmanship for plaster not explained in these
Specifications, shall comply with the requirements of relevant BS CP 211 and
CP 221 as directed by the Engineer.
(e) External rendered finishes should comply with appropriate clauses of BS 882.

13.5 Proportioning and Mixing

(a) Measurement of materials by volume shall be by containers of known

capacity to maintain consistent proportions. No lumpy or caked material shall
be used. Mixing equipment boxes and tools shall be clean. Materials shall be
proportioned as specified on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

13 – 2
 Mixing shall be continuous until all ingredients are evenly distributed and
thoroughly mixed.
(b) Only limited water shall be added for proper workability and such quantity of
mortar shall be prepared which can be consumed in thirty minutes after
preparation. Preparation of mortar in bulk quantity for use during the entire
day or for any other time more than that stipulated above is expressly
prohibited. Retempering shall not be permitted and all mortar which has
begun to stiffen shall be discarded.
(c) Plaster ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed either by hand on a clean
cement concrete platform or by a mechanical mixer, as directed by the
Engineer.
(d) Water Proofing Plaster 3/4" inch (20 mm) thick 1:4 cement sand plaster mixed
with approved water proofing agent.

13.6 Preparation of Surface

(a) Concrete surface to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all grease, form
oil and other surface impurities which will otherwise adversely affect the
adhesion of plaster to the surface concerned. The surface of all concrete
ceilings, beams and columns shall be lightly hacked by approved means to
give the required key for plastering.
(b) All masonry surfaces to be plastered shall be cleaned to remove all matter
which will otherwise adversely affect the adhesion of plaster to the surface
concerned. The surface shall be washed with clean water and kept damp for
24 hours before further treatment, the surface thus prepared shall be treated
uniformly with cement and sand slurry. The slurry to be used shall be one part
cement to one part sand by volume with water added to make a stiff. Spatter
dash of slurry shall be applied on surface to receive plaster and be left to cure
for three days.

13.7 Application of Plaster

(a) The plaster shall not have wavy surface and shall be perfectly in plumb. The
edges and corners shall represent a straight line. The plaster shall be kept
wet continuously for at least ten (10) days. No extra payment shall be allowed
for jambs, junctions, corners, edges, round surfaces or plaster required due to
any unevenness in the Work done by the Contractor. The plaster Work is to
cover all conduits, pipes etc fixed in the walls and ceiling. Wherever specified,
metal lath shall be nailed firmly before plastering is commenced. The plaster

13 – 3
 surface shall be tested frequently with a 10 ft. (3 meter) straight edge and
plumb bob.
(b) Plaster containing cracks, blisters, pits, discolouration or any defects shall not
be acceptable. Any plaster giving hollow sound or loose plaster shall be
removed and replaced with plaster in conformity with these specifications and
as additionally directed by the Engineer. Contractor shall cut out and patch
all defective Work at his own cost. All damaged plaster shall be patched as
directed by the Engineer. Patching plaster shall match appearance of and
shall be finished level with adjoining plaster.

13.8 Cleaning and Protection

(a) Rubbish and debris shall be removed as necessary to make way for Work of
other trades and as directed by the Engineer. As each room or space is
completed all rubbish, debris, scaffolding and tools should be removed to
leave the room clean.
(b) Prior to plastering all aluminum Windows, finished metals should be covered
by sheet of plastic or tarpaulin to protect it from damage.
(c) Protect finished, plaster from injury by any source. Contractor shall also
protect walls, floors and Work of other trades from plaster materials.

13.9 Tolerances
Surfaces of plaster Work shall be finished with a true plane to correct line and level
unless otherwise specified and with walls reveals plumb and square.

Maximum permitted tolerances shall not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 6 ft (2 meter)
variation from plumb or level in any exposed line or surface and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)
variation between planes of abutting edges or ends.

13.10 Measurement and Payment

13.10.1 Measurement

Measurement shall be made of actual area in square foot in accordance with this
section of specification or as directed by the Engineer.

13.10.2 Payment

Payment shall be made for the number of square foot of surface area cement
plastered at the contract unit price per square foot and shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including all
incidentals necessary to complete the Work in strict accordance with this section of
specification.

13 – 4
 Chapter – 14

MARBLE WORK

14.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of Specifications, consists of providing all material,
labour, plant, equipment, appliances and performing all operations required for
providing and installing marble natural stone slab and tile finishes in floor and special
aglow marble stone in floor & skirting, where shown on the drawings, complete in
strict, accordance with this Section of the Specification and the applicable Drawings.

14.2 Submittals

Submit three range samples 12” x 12” in size of each type of marble showing colour,
grade, finishing and texture for approval.

14.3 Delivery, Storage and Handling

Materials shall be protected from damage during loading, shipment, delivery and
storage. Non-staining materials for blocking and packing shall be used. Stack marble
units at Site in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as required to
prevent staining, scratching, etching or breakage.

14.4 Materials

14.4.1 General

(a) The marble/stone Work of all types should be consistent in type, colour range
and texture.
(b) Provide slabs or tiles of specified sizes in floor and wall areas as shown on
drawings.
(c) Provide marble /stone of specified thickness. Saw-cut the back surfaces that
are meant to be concealed in finished Work.
(d) Provide irregular shaped units, staircase units and skirting base units to the
profiles of required with sharp true and matched at joints, polish exposed
edges.

14.4.2 Marble/Stone Type

All marble/stone types are to be selected and approved by the Engineer for
quality, colour and texture as:

14 – 1
 (a) Marble of local origin, first class quality and high class finish acceptable to the
Engineer.
(b) Stone: As approved by the Engineer.

14.4.3 Beds and Backings

Where applicable, standard cementations screed and mortar beds and backings,
mixed and proportioned by volume shall be as follows:

Grey Ordinary Portland Cement 1 part

Sand 4 parts
Water Clean, fresh and free from deleterious substances

14.4.4 Adhesives, Grouts and Sealants

Proprietary adhesives, joint grouts and sealants of approved type as required and
recommended by the manufacturer for specific application shall be used. The colour
of the joint grout and the sealants shall match with the colour of stone/marble.

14.5 Execution

14.5.1 Flooring, Skirting and Stairs

The Work should be executed as follows:

(i) Apply cement slurry coat over surfaces of concrete substrate immediately
prior to placing setting bed. Limit area of application to avoid premature dying
out. Install setting bed of required thickness and set marble/stone units before
initial set occurs. Apply a thin layer of cement paste to bottom of each unit.
Set temperature and level units immediately. Set units in required pattern with
uniform joint widths.

(ii) Joints as soon as possible after initial set. Force grout into joints, strike flush
and tool slightly concave.

(iii) Remove mortar and grout from surfaces while still moist and as the Work
progresses.

(iv) Do not permit traffic on finished surface during setting and for a minimum of
24 hours after final pointing of joints.

14 – 2
14.5.2 Repair and Cleaning

The repair and cleaning activities shall be carried out as follows:

(i) Remove and replace marble/stone units which are broken, chipped, stained
or otherwise damaged. Where directed, remove and replace units which do
not match adjoining stonework or are not in line and level as shown on
Drawings. Provide new matching units, install and point joints to eliminate
evidence of replacement. Repair defective and unsatisfactory joints to provide
neat, uniform appearance.
(ii) Clean stonework not less than 6 days after completion of Work, using clean
water and bristle brushes. Do not use wire brushes, acid or caustic type
cleaning agents or other cleaning compounds which may be detrimental to
the marble/stone finish or joint grout.

14.5.3 Protection

The protection shall be done by providing covers, boards, supports and all other
necessary materials to protect finished Work from collapse, deterioration,
discolouration or damage during installation and until Contract completion.

14.5.4 Polishing

The finished surface shall be provided with two applications of approved wax polish
or as approved by Engineer.

14 – 3
 Chapter – 15

FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES

15.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of the Specification consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances and materials and performing all operations in
connection with the installation of cement concrete floors and floor finishes including
bases, skirting and Dado, complete in strict accordance with this Section of the
Specification and the applicable Drawings.

15.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following Pakistan, ISO, British & ASTM Standards are relevant to
these Specifications wherever applicable.

15.2.1 Pakistan Standard

P.S. 232 Ordinary Portland cement

15.2.2 ISO (International Organization for Standardization)

R 680 Chemical analysis of cements Main constituents of Portland cement

FR 681 Chemical analysis of cements Minor constituents of Portland cement

15.2.3 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

C 482 Bond strength of ceramic tile to Portland cement

C 648 Breaking strength of ceramic tile
C 650 Resistance of ceramic tile to chemical substances
C 798 Colour permanency of glazed ceramic tile
E 84 Surface burning characteristics of building material

15.2.4 BSI (British Standards Institutions)

882 Pt.2 Course and fine aggregates from natural sources

1199 Sands for external renderings, internal plastering with lime and Portland
cement and floor screeds
1201 Pt.2 Aggregates for granulithic concrete floor finishes
1281 Glazed ceramic tiles and tile fittings for internal walls
5442 Classification of adhesives used Construction Pt-1 Adhesives

15 – 1
 203 Tile flooring
204 In-situ Floor Finishes
209 Pt.1 Care and Maintenance of floor surface, wooden flooring

15.3 Material

15.3.1 Cement

Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement conforming to BS 12 or PS 232.

15.3.2 Sand

All fine sand shall be as specified or approved by the Engineer and stored on
properly constructed paving or as directed by the Engineer. The grading shall
conform to BS 882 Grading Zone 1 and 2 of which the gradation limits are as follows:

Percentage (by weight) passing

BS Sieve Grading Zone 1 Grading Zone 2
3/8” (9.53mm) 100
3/16’ (4.765mm) 90 – 100 90 – 100
No. 7 60 – 95 75 – 90
No. 14 30 – 70 55 – 90
No. 25 15 – 34 35 – 59
No. 52 5 – 20 8 – 30
No. 100 0 – 10 0 – 10

15.3.3 Coarse Aggregate:

Coarse aggregate shall be obtained from approved source crushed, angular in shape
and shall have granular, crystalline or smooth surface free from friable, flaky and
laminated pieces, mica and shale. It shall not contain matters injurious to concrete.
All coarse aggregate shall conform to BSS NO.882 and shall be graded as follows:

BS Sieve % Passing by weight

1” (25.40 mm) 100
3/4” (19.05 mm) 90 – 100
3/8’ (9.53 mm) 20 – 55
3/16’ (4.765 mm) 0 – 10

The aggregate shall be stored on properly constructed paving or as directed by the

Engineer.

15 – 2
 There shall be a physical partition between the stockpiles of coarse and fine
aggregate. If required, aggregates shall be washed and screened to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. Sieve analysis of all the aggregates to be used in the Works shall be
carried out as and when required by the Engineer.

Any aggregates not found to be of the specified/approved standard shall be rejected

by the Engineer and all such rejected material shall be removed from Site without
delay.

Floors sub-base or base constructed with rejected aggregates shall be dismantled

and rebuilt at the expense of the Contractor.

15.3.4 Water

Water used for mixing concrete, curing or any other operation of the Works specified
herein shall be fresh, clean and free from organic or inorganic matters in solutions or
in suspension. Only water of the approved quality shall be used for all constructional
purposes:

15.3.5 Ceramic tiles

Ceramic tiles shall be local, best quality white or any other colour. The size of tiles
shall be as specified and shall conform to BS 1281 as per samples. The Engineer
can select different colour and designs of the approved tiles for use in different
locations, if not specified.

15.3.6 Terrazzo Tiles

Terrazzo tiles shall be first grade mechanically compressed type conforming to PS-
531. Tiles shall be of specified sizes with a topping of 10 mm thickness composed of
1:2 cement marble chips, the base being 1:2 cement mortar. The colour quality and
size of chips shall be as per Engineer’s approval.

15.3.7 Cleaning Compound

The compound used for all cleaning of terrazzo shall be an approved neutral
chemical cleaner free from acid and alkali or any other material that will affect the
colour or otherwise damage the terrazzo and shall not affect the conductivity of
terrazzo floors.

15.3.8 Vitrified Clay Tile

15 – 3
 Vitrified clay tiles of specified size shall be first quality of local manufacture approved
by the Engineer.

15.4 Cement Concrete Flooring

The materials for C.C flooring shall be same as already specified under Clause 3,
“Materials”.

15.4.1 Composition of Concrete

Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, sand, coarse aggregate and water,
all well mixed and brought to the proper consistency. The Contractor shall mix the
ingredients as specified. The proportions of the various ingredients shall be
determined from time to time during the progress of the Work and tests shall be
made of samples of the aggregates and the resulting concrete. The mix proportions
and appropriate water cement ratio will be determined on the basis of the production
of concrete having required workability, density, impermeability, durability and
required strength.

15.4.2 Mixing Concrete

The concrete ingredients shall be mixed in a batch mixer for not less than 1½
minutes after all ingredients, except the full amount of water, are in the mixer. The
Engineer reserves the right to increase the mixing time when the charging and mixing
operations fail to produce a concrete batch in which the ingredients are uniformly
distributed and the consistency is not uniform. The concrete shall be uniform in
composition and consistency from batch to batch except when changes in
composition or consistency are required. Water shall be added prior to, during and
following the mixer charge. Excessive over mixing requiring addition of water to
preserve the required concrete consistency will not be permitted. The concrete
ingredients shall be mixed by volumetric measurement in purpose made boxes
approved by the Engineer.

15.4.3 Construction

The base course of the floor shall comprise of brick ballast of 2 inches (approx. 50
mm) mesh size. The base course shall be thoroughly compacted by suitable power
rammers to the total consolidated thickness as shown on the Drawings. The
interstices shall be filled with smaller size brick. The base course shall be blinded
with sand and the whole surface watered. Over the well compacted base course, a

15 – 4
 layer of concrete of the required grade and thickness shall be laid, in panels of the
sizes as indicated on the Drawing or as approved by the Engineer.

After the C.C bed has been cured, as directed by the Engineer, it shall be roughened
and well watered before floor finishing is laid. The floor finish shall comprise of
cement concrete of required grade and shall be laid in panels to the required
thickness as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The concrete
after laying will be thoroughly rammed and mortar worked up to the top and
smoothed with a steel trowel. The edge of each section into which the floor is
divided should be defined by wooden screeds of the approved width and of a depth
equal to the depth of the floor concrete.

Freshly placed concrete floor and completed floor portions as finished shall be
protected to prevent loss of water by covering with damp hessian, damp sand or
other approved material, and shall be kept constantly damp for a period of four days.
The concrete shall be allowed to dry out slowly over a period of three days after wet
curing is completed.

15.5 Installation of Tile Flooring

The Contractor should note that all tiles before installation should be sorted out in a
proper way acceptable to the Engineer, no under/ over sized and damaged tile
should be used.

When setting out the tiles, care shall be taken to establish the correct elevation for
the floor. A gauge rod shall be used, indicating the overall measurement of a given
number of tiles with specified joint width to reduce cutting.

After the floor has been machine finished, it should be covered with white, non-
staining sand or rags to protect it while other Work is being done. After removal, the
floor shall be thoroughly scrubbed.

15.5.1 General

(a) The base shall be prepared by laying cement concrete of specified grade and
of thickness as specified or as shown on the drawings.
(b) The curing period of the setting bed shall be as directed by the Engineer. As
large area of setting bed shall be spread at one time as can be covered with
tiles before the mortar has set. Surplus mortar shall be removed. The
thickness of setting bed in any space shall not be less than ½” (12.5 mm).

15 – 5
 (c) Floor and wall surfaces to receive the tiles shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
dirt, dust, oil and other objectionable matters. Tiles shall be laid out from the
centre line of each space in an outward direction and the pattern should be
made symmetrical with a minimum number of cut tiles.
(d) Joints between the tiles shall be of uniform width. Tiles shall be cut with a
suitable cutting tool and rough edges shall be rubbed smooth. Tiles shall be
laid to the straight edges.

15.5.2 Terrazzo Tiles

The terrazzo tiles will be laid to the required lines, levels and grades over a setting
bed of cement sand mortar comprising of 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand by
volume.

After seven days, the terrazzo tile floors shall be machine ground to a true even
surface using various grades of abrasive stores as required and directed by the
Engineer. After the first grinding the floor shall be grouted with the same colour
composition as used for its manufacture. The grout shall be of the consistency of
thick cream and shall be brushed over the floor to fill in the joints and after 72 hours
the grouting coat shall be removed by grinding till a smooth and even surface is
obtained. Areas and portion of the floor inaccessible for the grinding machine shall
be ground and rubbed by hand. The final gloss shall be given by polishing the
surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

15.5.3 Ceramic Tiles

The ceramic tiles shall be laid to the required lines, levels and grades over a setting
bed of cement sand mortar comprising of one part of cement and 4 parts of sand by
volume and the joints filled with neat white or grey cement including vertical and
horizontal covers. The tile floor shall be kept wet for at least 72 hours and no traffic
should be allowed on the tiles during curing period.

15.5.4 Cement Concrete/Vitrified Tiles

The cement concrete and vitrified clay tile shall be laid to the required, lines, levels
and grades over a setting bed of cement sand mortar comprising of 1 part of cement
and 4 parts of sand by volume.

15.6 Terrazzo Flooring Cast in Situ

15.6.1 Mix

15 – 6
 The terrazzo mixes shall be composed by weight as follows:

Plain terrazzo for all floors and bases indicated as terrazzo and not otherwise
specified, shall be composed of one part cement, white or grey, and 2 parts of marble
chips of the sizes and colours hereinafter specified.

15.6.2 Preparation for Terrazzo

The grade and thickness of concrete as shown on the Drawings shall be laid as
under bed to receive terrazzo. The surface of the bed shall be roughened for bonding
with the terrazzo finish. If the surface is too smooth it shall be roughened with a
toothed chisel and prior to laying the terrazzo the bed shall be cleaned of all dirt, oil
re-ease and extra loose material.

15.6.3 Division Strips

Terrazzo floors and bases shall be divided by glass/marble strips. The division strips
between fieldwork and borders shall have exposed tops in full width of the strips. The
division strips shall be set immediately after the spreading of the underbid, the strips
being partially embedded therein, securely anchored to the sub-floor and grouted
solid.

All division strips shall be set, straight to lines and to the proper level to ensure that
the tops of the strips will show uniformly after grinding and smoothening operations
are completed and joints and intersections shall be fitted tight. Strips shall be braced
to prevent bulging during the placing of terrazzo.

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the divisions in field Work of large areas
shall not exceed 3 feet x 3 feet and in small areas shall not exceed 2 feet x 2 feet.

Edging strips shall be placed at door ways between terrazzo and types of flooring
and along the edges of all terrazzo bases or borders and adjoining other types of
floor finishes or floor covering. The edging strips at door ways shall be placed in line
with the step face of doors. All edging strips shall be anchored and grouted solid in
the under bed or to the concrete sub-floor and braced to prevent bulging as specified
for division strip.

15.6.4 Laying Terrazzo

(a) The sub-surface shall be swept clean, thoroughly moistened, but not
saturated, and slushed with a coating of neat cement grout. The under bed

15 – 7
 consisting of specified cement concrete screed shall be spread and brought
to a level not less than 1/2 inch. (12mm) below the finished floor level the
dividing strips shall be installed in the green under bed. The terrazzo mix shall
be spread, tamped and rolled into a compact mass not less than specified
thickness. After rolling additional aggregate mix shall be sprinkled over the
surface to fill up all depression to take up excess moisture and to permit the
terrazzo to be trowel led to a level, dense and even surface, slightly above the
finish line of floor. This level shall allow for the surface grinding necessary to
expose the area of aggregate, and to produce smooth leveled floor free or
waves and depressions.

(b) Seasoning

The completed terrazzo shall be allowed to season for 6 days during which
time it shall be kept moist and free of traffic. The curing shall be accompanied
by (1) covering with approximately 1 inch (25 mm) thickness of sand; or (2)
sprinkling with water at every 10 hour interval.

(c) Surface

Following the curing period, the terrazzo shall be machine ground to a true,
even surface using a No. 24 grit followed by a No. 80 grit or finer abrasive
stone. After the first grinding, the floors shall be thoroughly grouted with the
same cement and colour composition as specified for the matrix of the
terrazzo mix. The grout shall be of the consistency of thick cream, and shall
be brushed over the floor to eliminate all pits and thoroughly fill the surface for
final grinding.

(d) Finishing

Not less than 72 hours after application, the grouting coat shall be removed
by grinding. In the later stages of grinding, the grit stones or other abrasive
used in the grinding machine shall be of a grain or fineness that will give the
surface smooth finish. Small areas, inaccessible portions and corners which
cannot be reached by the grinding machine shall be ground and rubbed by
hand.
(e) Protection

The walls and all surfaces of the finished Work of other trades shall be
properly protected from damage and spoiling during the process of grinding
and washing of the terrazzo. After the finish grinding has been completed and

15 – 8
 the surface treatment applied, the terrazzo Work shall be covered arid
protected with material, approved by the Engineer until completion of the
Work of all other trades.

(f) Cleaning and Coating

Prior to placing the protective covering, the terrazzo floor shall be approved
by the Engineer. After the Work of all other trades has been completed and
the protective covering removed, all terrazzo Work shall be washed with
cleaning where necessary to remove any stains or cement smears. The
terrazzo shall be allowed to dry thoroughly and shall be given a sealing
application of preservative material. The sealing material shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, leaving all terrazzo Work in
clean condition as approved by the Engineer.

(g) Dado/Skirting

The ingredients of Dado/skirting shall be one part of cement and two parts of
marble chips varying from Nos. 0-2. Skirting shall be laid over a base of
plaster of specified thickness. The thickness of dado/skirting layer shall be as
specified. The surface shall be ground and polished to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

15 – 9
 Chapter – 16

PAINTING

16.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all materials,
plant, labour, equipment, appliances and performing all operations in connection with
surface preparation, mixing, painting concrete Works, gates, frames, walls, ceilings
and all such surfaces as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Engineer.
The scope of this Section of Specification is covered with detailed Specifications as
laid down herein.

16.2 Applicable Standards

Latest editions of following British Standards are relevant to these specifications

wherever applicable.

16.2.1 BSI (British Standards Institution)

245 Specification for mineral solvents (white spirits and related hydrocarbon
solvents) for paints and other purposes
2521 Lead-based priming paint for woodwork
2523 Lead based priming paint for iron and steel
2569 Sprayed metal coatings
4800 Paint colours for building purposes
CP.231 Painting of building
CP 3012 Cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces

16.3 General

(a) Except as otherwise specified, all painting shall be applied in conformity with
BS CP 231 “Painting of Building” as applicable to the Work.
(b) The Contractor shall repair at his own expense all damaged or defective
areas of shop-painted metal Works and structural steelwork. Metal surfaces
against which concrete to be placed will be furnished shop-painted and shall
cleaned prior to being embedded in concrete.
(c) Except as otherwise specified, all concrete and plastered surfaces are to be
painted.
(d) The Engineer will furnish a schedule of colours for each area and surface. All
colours shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

16 – 1
 (e) Colours of priming coat and body coat where specified, shall be lighter than
those of finish coat. The Engineer shall have unlimited choice of colours.
(f) Samples of all colours, and finishes shall be prepared in advance of
requirement so as not to delay Work and shall be submitted to the Engineer
for approval before any Work is commenced. Any Work done without such
approval shall be redone to the Engineer’s satisfaction, without additional
expense to the Employer. Samples of each type of paint shall be on separate
1 ft. x 1 ft. x 1/8 inch tempered hard board panels. Manufacturer’s colour chart
shall be submitted for colour specifications and selection.

16.4 Materials

(i) All materials shall be acceptable, proven, first grade products and shall meet
or exceed the minimum standards of approved manufacturers.
(ii) Colours shall be pure, non-fading pigments, mildew-proof sun-proof, finely
ground in approved medium. Colours used on plaster and concrete surfaces
shall be lime-proof. All materials shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
(iii) Approved quality Distemper paint shall be used for painting where specified
on the drawings as directed by the Engineer.
(iv) The plastic emulsion/weather shield paint or similar as approved by the
Engineer shall be used where specified on the drawing as directed by the
Engineer.
(v) All material shall be delivered to Site in their original unbroken containers or
packages and beef the manufacturer’s name, label, brand and formula and
will be mixed and applied in accordance with his directions.

16.5 Delivery Storage and Container Sizes

Paints shall be delivered to the Site in sealed containers which plainly show the type
of paint, colour (formula or specifications number) batch number, quantity, and date
of manufacture, name of manufacturer and instructions for use. Pigmented paints
shall be supplied in containers not larger than 20 liters. All materials shall be stored
under cover in a clean storage space which should be accessible at all times to the
Engineer. If storage is allowed inside the building, floors shall be kept clean and free
from paint spillage.

16.6 Surface Preparation

(a) All oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale and any other foreign substance
shall be removed from the surface to be painted, polished and white washed

16 – 2
 by the use of a solvent and clean wiping material. Following the solvent
cleaning, the surfaces shall be cleaned by scrapping, chipping, blasting, wire
brushing or other effective means as approved by the Engineer.
(b) In the event the surfaces become otherwise contaminated in the interval
between cleaning and painting, re cleaning will be done by the Contractor at
no additional cost.
(c) All the surfaces to be painted shall be free from dust, dirt, fungus, lichen,
algae etc. Oil paint, varnish and lime wash should always be removed by
scraping and washing.

No Work in this section shall be allowed until all surfaces or conditions have
been inspected and approved by the Engineer.

16.7 Application

(i) All paint and coating materials shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition at the
time of application. All Work shall be done in a workman like manner, leaving
the finished surface free from drips, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. All
paints shall be applied under dry and dust free condition unless approved by
the Engineer. Paint shall not be applied when the temperature of the metal or
of the surrounding air is below 7 degrees centigrade. Surfaces shall be free
from moisture at the time of painting.

All primary paint (Alkali Resistance) shall be applied by brushing. The first
coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning. When paint is
applied by spraying, suitable measures shall be taken to prevent segregation
of the paint in the container during painting operation.

Effective means shall be adopted for removing all free oil and moisture from
the air supply lines of the spraying equipment.

Each coat of paint shall be allowed to dry or harden thoroughly before the
succeeding coat is applied. Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible
after installation shall be completely painted prior to installation.

Material to be used in one hour only should be mixed. Over-thinning will not
be permitted. After the first coat the surfaces will be soaked evenly four or five
times and the second coat shall be applied after leaving for at least overnight.

(ii) Where shown on Drawings all exterior finishes shall be painted with weather
resistant paint in approved colour as per manufacturer’s specifications.

16 – 3
 (iii) Plastic emulsion paint of the approved make and shade shall be applied to
surfaces as shown on Drawings or as specified by the Engineer.
(iv) Polyvinyl Distemper of the approved make and shade shall be applied to
surfaces as specified.

(v) Polishing

After fine sanding by a skilled operator, one coat of clear polish should be
rubbed in by hand using a cloth or pad, be allowed to dry and buffed up with
worn fine sand paper or steel wool to remove raised grain. A second coat of
clear polish should then be applied.

16.8 Job Conditions

(a) Observe manufacturer’s recommended minimum and maximum temperature

but do not apply paint or finish to any surface unless ambient temperature is
10 0C or above and less than 43 0C. Non painting shall be done above 90%
relative humidity.
(b) Adequately protect all finished Work.
(c) Remove and replace all items of finish hardware, device plates, accessories,
lighting fixtures or other removable items.
(d) In no case shall any finish hardware or other finished item that is already fitted
into place be painted, unless otherwise specified.

16.9 Quality Assurance

All paint for any one surface shall be top quality, of one manufacturer of the
specified. Deep tone accent colours shall be used and the unavailability of final coat
colours may be the basis for rejecting materials for any one surface.

16.10 Measurement and Payment

16.10.1 Measurement

The measurement shall be made in square foot of the actual surfaces completed and
approved.

16.10.2 Payment

Payment shall be made for number of square foot of the actual surface painted
measured as provided above at the Contract unit price per square foot for the
respective item and shall constitute full compensation for all materials, equipment,
labour, including all incidentals necessary to complete the Work.

16 – 4
 Chapter – 17

DAMP PROOF COURSE

17.1 Scope of Work

The Damp Proof Course shall be horizontal and vertical as shown on the Drawings and
specified in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ).

17.2 Horizontal

17.2.1 Walls

The horizontal D.P.C. shall consist of 1-1/2" thick, Class-C cement concrete with two
intervening layers of polythene sheet and two (2) sand blinded coats of S.I.B. (Specified
Industrial Bitumen) grade 10/20.

17.2.2 Floors

Same as in walls except bitumen layers to be laid on 1/2" - 3/4" blinding screed (1:6) to
even out surface of Class-E hard core.

17.3 Vertical

The vertical D.P.C. shall consist of 3/4" thick 1:3 cement sand mortar with 5% pudlo and
two (2) sand blinded coats of hot S.I.B.

17.4 Material Requirements

All materials i.e. cement, sand aggregate, water polythene sheet and bitumen shall
conform to the specifications given in respective section.

17.5 Construction Requirements

(i) The Contractor shall lay the D.P.C. only when the level, quality of masonry Work,
etc. is approved.

(ii) The concrete Work of D.P.C. shall conform to the relevant specifications given in
this section for the execution of these items.

(iii) Horizontal D.P.C. shall extend to the full width of the wall i.e. up to the external
faces. No portion of doors opening, etc. shall be left while laying D.P.C. The
period of curing of concrete shall be not less than 72 hours. Every care should be
taken that concrete is not left dry during this period. The Work of laying Damp
Proof Course shall be carried out as follows unless otherwise described in BOQ:
(iv) Placing 1-1/2" thick layer of Class-C cement concrete.
17 – 1
(v) Laying 2 coats of hot bitumen S.I.B. 10/20 grade @ 20 lbs per sq ft. (each coat)
over entire width and lengths of concrete after the concrete has been properly
cured for at least 72 hours, and sand blinding where specified.
(vi) Laying of polythene sheet of 500 gauge over entire width and length of concrete
after the concrete has been treated with 2 coats of hot bitumen.

The application of bitumen coating in case of vertical D.P.C. shall be same as

mentioned above.

17.6 Measurement and Payment

17.6.1 Measurement

Measurement will be made per [Link] of superficial area or surface damp proofed
as per this section of specification and accepted by the Engineer.

17.6.2 Payment

Payment will be made for the number of sq. ft of superficial area damp proofed at
the Contract Unit Price and will include full compensation for furnshing and
placing all materials and for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Work prescribed in BOQ.

17 – 2
 Chapter – 18

TERRAZZO FLOORING

18.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this section consists of making terrazzo floor in conformity with
British Standard Code of Practice CP 204. In situ flooring, Part-I "General" and Part-
3, “Terrazzo Flooring” as applicable to the Work shown on the drawings and
specified in the Bill of Quantities.

18.2 Material Requirements

Cement, Sand, Aggregate for concrete and Water shall conform to relevant
specifications.

Marble Chips: shall be crushed marble, and shall be best quality white or coloured,
having an abrasive hardness of not less than 16 and the size shall vary from No. 4 to
8 or as specified.

Dividing Strips: shall be marble strips of 12 mm x 1½”or glass strips 5mm thick and 1-
1/2" (38mm) wide or as specified in Bill of Quantities.

Marble powder of clean approved quality.

18.3 Samples

All materials used for Terrazzo Work as well as samples for terrazzo floor shall be
approved and the same type of material will be used throughout the Work. If the
material is to be tested, the Contractor will do so at his own cost from an approved
laboratory.

18.4 Construction Requirements in Situ Terrazzo Flooring

The floor shall consist of a wearing surface of consistency and net thickness as
specified in Bill of Quantities, laid over 1:2:4 concrete base of the specified thickness.
The net thickness specified for wearing surface shall be that obtained after grinding
and polishing. 1:2:4 concrete shall be mixed and laid in the manner specified for
cement concrete four, using a minimum quantity of water for workability.

The cement concrete shall be leveled with a trowel and straight edge, consolidated
and finished with steel trowels to an even but rough surface. The top layer of cement

18 – 1
marble chips mixed in the proportion of 1:2 (1 part of cement mixed with 10% marble
powder and 2 parts of marble chips) shall be laid over it within 24 hours. The cement
and marble chips must be mixed dry in such quantities as are sufficient for a unit of
one specified shade. Water shall be added to only such quantities as can be mixed
thoroughly and consumed in less than 30 minutes, the quantity of water being the
minimum for workability. Mixing must be done on water tight platform and any mix not
used within 30 minutes shall be discarded and removed from Site. A layer of cement
and marble chipping mixture should be well trowel led into the surface of the base
concrete before filling to the top level of the screeds. The layer should be well
compacted and all voids shall be filled in. A layer of neat cement, of the specified
colour shall then be well trowel led into the surface leaving a plain smooth surface.

Floors shall be laid in panels of about 4.0'x4'-0 (1.2 x 1.2 meter) or of size as shown
on the drawings. Dividing strips of aluminum/brass/glass as specified shall be
provided and fixed to exact levels making an allowance for grinding. Aluminum strips
shall not be less than 3mm thick and of width equal to the total thickness of cement
concrete base and Terrazzo Topping.

Three days after laying the top layer must be evenly and smoothly machine ground
with carborandum blocks of coarse, medium and fine grades so as to ensure that all
marble chippings are evenly exposed all over the surface. If marble chips are not
evenly exposed the Contractor shall pull down the surface and relay it at his own
cost. After the first grinding, the floor shall be thoroughly grouted with the same
cement and colour composition as specified for the terrazzo mix. The grout shall be
of the consistency of thick cream and shall be brushed over the floor to eliminate all
impressions and thoroughly fill the surface for final grinding. The surface after
grinding shall be left undisturbed and cured for 2 or 3 weeks, after which it shall be
cleaned of dirt and dust by rubbing gently with pumice stone or washing soda in
sufficient water. Three days after the surface has been cleaned it shall be rubbed
hard with 1:10 solution of oxalic acid using felt. The surface shall then be cleaned
and washed with plenty of water. After the surface has dried a final gloss shall be
given by polishing the surface. The walls and all surfaces of the finished Works of
other trades shall be properly protected from damage and spoiling during the process
of grinding and washing of the terrazzo. After the finish grinding has been completed
and the surface treatment applied, the terrazzo Work shall be covered and protected
with approved material until completion of the Work of all other trades.

18 – 2
18.5 Terrazzo Dado and Skirting

The marble chips and cement shall conform to specification for floor. Mixing shall be
done in the same manner and proportion. The plastered surface over which the
dado/skirting is to be applied shall be well roughened and watered, cement mortar of
specified ratio shall then be plastered over this well roughened surface to indicated
thickness. Before the base course has set the layer of terrazzo mixture shall be well
trowel led into the surface of the base to a thickness which after grinding shall result
in the finished thickness as per Bill of Quantities. A layer of neat cement of the
specified colour shall then be well trowel led into the surface leaving a plain smooth
surface. After the period specified for floors above, the Contractor shall start finishing
as for floors specified above. Terrazzo skirting shall be provided around all terrazzo
floors unless shown otherwise. Skirting and dado shall be straight, level and in
plumb. Intersections at floors shall be straight and flush.

18.6 Terrazzo on Stairs

The stair risers and treads shall be finished according to exact sizes including the
terrazzo topping making allowance for grinding of terrazzo. The nosing shall be flush
with the terrazzo toppings, and shall be protected by aluminum angles as specified or
shown on Drawings. The angles shall be firmly secured, by means of counter sunk
brass screws and cast together with the step.

18.7 Measurement and Payment

18.7.1 Measurement

Measurement will be made per [Link] of superficial area as per this section of
specification and accepted by the Engineer.

18.7.2 Payment

Payment will be made for the number of sq. ft of superficial area at the Contract Unit
Price and will include full compensation for furnshing and placing all materials and for
all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Work
prescribed in BOQ.

18 – 3
 Chapter – 19

CEMENT CONCRETE FLOORING

19.1 Scope of Work

The Work covered under this Section of specifications consists of furnishing all
labour materials and equipments and performing all operations in connection with the
carrying out of the Work of P.C.C. flooring, including all related items such as
wearing surfaces, bases skirting etc., in strict accordance with the requirements of
Drawings and schedule of floor finish and subject to the terms and conditions of the
Contract Documents.

19.2 General

The Contractor shall strictly follow and adhere to written instructions as mentioned on
drawings and specifications. Floor finishes shall be laid true to the line and level. Any
Work covered under this section of the specifications, not conforming to the
requirements of the specified quality and workmanship will be rejected and the
Contractor shall be required to remove and replace such Work as directed at his own
cost.

19.3 Material Requirements

(i) Cement sand coarse aggregate shall conform to the specification given in
Section-I "Materials".

(ii) Division Strips

Division strips shall be 1½" deep x 5mm thick plate glass or as specified,
embedded and fixed with cement mortar in base concrete to a required depth,
level, plumb, line, angle, panel, shape to meet the requirements.

19.4 Base

The base shall be either dry brick ballast or sand or lean concrete Class-E or as
specified in BOQ item and as shown on the drawings.

19 – 1
19.5 Construction Requirements

19.5.1 Preparation of Base

[Link] Floor

The surface of the base concrete shall be brushed with a stiff broom just before it
hardens to remove all laitance and loose aggregate and at the same time to roughen
the surface to improve the bond. The hardened base shall be thoroughly cleaned,
wetted preferably over night, the surplus water removed and a grout of cement and
water brushed into the surface just ahead of the application of the topping.

[Link] Dado/Skirting

The plaster on the portion of the wall to be provided with skirting or dado shall be left
in a rough state by brooming or by using wire brushes of approved type so as to
provide a bond between this base plaster and the dado or skirting. The surface of the
wall shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and shall be thoroughly wetted to control
the suction. Only so much mix shall be mixed with water that could be utilized within
30 minutes. This mix of cement sand shall be applied to the wall and trowel led hard
to a smooth surface, proper in line both vertical and horizontal. Finishing for the
cement sand skirting shall conform to specifications for plaster Work " Section 16 ".

[Link] Panels

Before laying the cement concrete flooring, the surface of the base shall be divided
into panels of required sizes as shown on drawings. Panels shall be made of glass
screeds or as specified. The top of the screed shall conform to the specified level of
the finished floor surface.

[Link] Mixing and Placing

Mixing and placing of concrete shall be in accordance with specification given under
heading "Concrete Work"

Concrete may be conveyed in any suitable manner from the place of mixing provided
there is no segregation or loss of any ingredients, and provided it is placed in its final
position before initial setting takes place, that is within 30 minutes of addition of water
to the mix. The concrete will be laid in a manner so as not to cause the aggregate to
separate from the mortar. The concrete shall be rammed and thoroughly
consolidated until the mortar creams up to the surface.

19 – 2
 The concrete will be laid in alternate panels, each panel not exceeding the area, as
directed. Dividing Strips of glass as specified shall be provided wherever shown on
drawings.

19.6 Finishing

Immediately after consolidation, the surface shall be leveled with a wooden trowel.
Excessive troweling in the early stage shall be avoided. The surface shall be tested
with a straight edge to detect undulations, which, if found, shall be eliminated. The
finer stuff in the concrete which has come to the surface with the stroking shall be
quickly but carefully smoothed with the steel trowel. When the concrete has
hardened sufficiently, troweling shall be done with steel trowel. No dry cement or a
mixture of dry cement with sand shall be sprinkled on the surface for hardening the
surface.

19.6.1 Concrete Floor (Smooth) with Topping

Color topping shall consist of a pigment which shall be added to cement on trial basis
till the required shade is obtained. Thickness of the colour topping shall be 1/8" thick.

An approved sample specimen of the topping of required shade shall be available at

the Site before proceeding with the entire Work.

After approval of the trial specimen, adequate quantity of the mixture of pigment and
cement shall be prepared for sufficient Work to avoid any variation in shade.

After wooden troweling of the base, topping shall be applied to the specified
thickness and spread out evenly by a wooden float, after waiting for a few minutes to
bring it to a little drier stage, steel troweling shall be applied with pressure till a
smooth finish in achieved.

19.6.2 Concrete Floor (Roughened)

After the floor surface has been leveled with a wooden trowel, and the concrete has
hardened sufficiently it shall be roughened with expanded metal mesh, wire brush or
a broom. A sheet of expanded metal mesh shall be pressed evenly on the concrete
surface to achieve the required pattern. Rough surface using wire brush or broom
shall be achieved by stroking the green concrete surface with smooth and even
strokes as per the required pattern.

19.7 Curing

19 – 3
 Curing shall be done as per specifications given under section "Portland Cement
Concrete".

19.8 Measurement and Payment

19.8.1 Measurement

Measurement will be made number of square feet of flooring acceptably placed

complete in all respects as per drawings and in strict accordance with this section of
specification or as directed by the Engineer.

19.8.2 Payment

Payment will be made for the number of sq. ft of flooring measured as above at the
Contract Unit Price and will include full compensation for furnshing and placing all
materials and for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Work prescribed in BOQ.

19 – 4
 Chapter – 20

EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

20.1 Scope of Work

The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant,
labour, equipment, appliances, and materials and performing all operations in
connection with excavation, trenching and back filling for water lines and
appurtenances in strict accordance with this Section of the Specifications and the
applicable plans, and subject to the terms and Conditions of the Contract.

20.2 Clearing and Grubbing

The Sites of all excavations shall be cleared of all shrubs, plants, bushes, large roots,
rubbish and other surface materials. All such materials shall be removed and
disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. All trees and shrubbery that
are designated by the Engineer to remain shall be adequately protected and
preserved in an approved manner.

20.3 Excavation

20.3.1 General

All excavation of whatever substance encountered shall be performed to the depths

indicated or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for
backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a sufficient distance from the
banks of the excavation to avoid overloading and to prevent sides from caving. All
excavated material unsuitable or not require such a manner that street passage is
not blocked by excavated material. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to
prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations, and any water
accumulated therein shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods.
Unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer, excavation shall be open
cut.

20.3.2 Trench Excavation

Unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Engineer not more than 500 feet of
any trench in advance of the end of the pipeline already laid shall be opened at any
time, unless otherwise directed permitted by the Engineer not more than 1000 feet of
any one trench shall be worked on at a time . The banks of the pipe trench shall be

20 – 1
 as nearly vertical as practicable. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be dug
after the trench bottom has been prepared. The pipe, except for joints, shall rest on
the prepared bottom for its length. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such
length, depth, and width as required for properly making the particular type of joints.
Stones shall be removed to avoid point bearing. Whenever wet or otherwise
unstable material that is incapable of properly supporting the pipe as determined by
the Engineer is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such material shall be
removed to the depth required and the trench backfilled to the proper grade with
coarse sand, or other suitable approved granular material. Such replacement of
unsuitable material will be paid for at the Contract unit price for that item of work.
Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a maximum cover, over the top of the pipe, of
30 in. from the existing ground surface or finished grade whichever is closer except
that trenches for pipe laid in lanes and alleys of narrow traveled way (average width
of 8 feet or less between structures) shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover,
over the top of the pipe, of 18 in from the existing ground surface or finished grade
whichever is closer.

20.3.3 Excavation for Appurtenances

Excavation for appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 in. but not more
than 24 in., between the outer surface and the embankment or timber that may be
used to hold and protect the banks. Any over depth excavation below such
appurtenances that has not been directed by the Engineer, will be considered
unauthorized and shall be refilled with compacted sand, gravel or concrete, as
directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Employer.

20.3.4 Maintenance of Excavation

All excavation shall be properly maintained while they are open and exposed.
Sufficient suitable barricades, warning lights, flood lights, signs, and similar items
shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for any
damage due to his negligence.

20.3.5 Removal of Water

The Contractor shall build all drains and do ditching, pumping, well pointing, bailing,
and all other work necessary to keep the excavation clear of ground water, sewage
and storm water during the progress of the work and until the finished work is safe
from injury. All water pumped or drained from the work shall be disposed of in a

20 – 2
 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and necessary precautions against flooding shall
be taken.

20.3.6 Sheeting and Bracing

If ordinary open cut excavation is not possible or advisable, sheeting and bracing
shall be furnished to the work and to provide working conditions which are safe. The
Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, shoring, wall braces, timbers and
similar items, necessary for the safety of the work, the general public and adjacent
property. Sheeting shoring and bracing shall be removed as the work progresses
and in such a manner as to prevent damage to finished work and adjacent structures
and property. As soon as withdrawn, all voids left by the sheeting and bracing shall
be carefully filled with sand and compacted. The Contractor shall be fully responsible
for the safety of work in progress, for the finished work, the workmen, and the public
and adjacent property.

20.3.7 Protection of Facilities

Existing subsurface facilities likely to be encountered during the execution of work

require special precaution for the protection, such as sewers, drain pipes, water
main, conduits and electric cables and the foundations of adjacent structures. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the damage of any such facility and shall repair
the same at his expense whether or not this facility has been shown on the plans.

20.3.8 Surplus Materials

All surplus materials shall be disposed of at locations approved by the Engineer. The
disposal of surplus material shall not interfere with other works and shall not
damage or spoil other material. When it is necessary to haul earth or rock material
over street or pavement, the Contractor shall prevent such material from falling on
the street or pavement.

20.3.9 Cutting Pavement

In cutting or breaking street surfacing, the Contractor shall not use equipment which
will damage the adjacent pavement. Existing paved surfaces shall be cut back
beyond the edges of the trenches to form neat square cuts. The road ballast, brick
pavement, and other materials shall be placed on one side and shall be preserved
for re-instatement when the trench is filled. Wherever necessary or required for the
convenience of the public or individual residents, at street crossings and at private
driveways, the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary bridges over unfilled

20 – 3
 excavations. All such bridges shall be maintained in service until backfilling has
been completed. The Contractor shall keep the road crossings manned 24 hours per
day. During night time, enough red lights shall be provided to warn traffic. If detour
is necessary, the Contractor shall make proper detour for the traffic and shall install
signs 1 meter by 1.2 meter in size indicating the detour.

20.4 Backfilling

(a) The trenches shall not be completely backfilled until all required pressure
tests are performed and until the water lines as installed conform to the
requirements of Specifications. Where in the opinion of the Engineer,
damage is likely to result from withdrawing sheeting, shoring; the same shall
be left in place and cut off at a level 12 in below ground surface. Sheeting left
in place at the direction of the Engineer will be paid for at the Contract unit
price/approved rate for that item of work. Trenches shall be backfilled to the
ground surface with selected excavated material or other material that is
suitable for proper compaction. Trenches improperly backfilled shall be
reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and com-
pacted to the specified density. The surface shall be restored to its original or
better condition. Pavement and base course disturbed by trenching
operations shall be replaced.
(b) Lower Portion of Trench: Backfill material shall be deposited in 6 in.
maximum thickness layers and compacted with suitable hand tampers to
ninety five percent of maximum density until there is a cover of not less than
12 in over the water lines. The backfill material in this portion of trench shall
consist of sandy clay or other approved materials free from stones and
humps.
(c) Remainder of Trench: The remainder of the trench shall be backfilled with
material that is free from stones larger than 6 in. in any dimension. Backfill
material shall be compacted to 90 percent of maximum density for cohesive
soils and 95 percent of maximum density for others.

20.5 Borrow

Where suitable material for backfill is not available in sufficient quantity from required
excavations, suitable material shall be obtained from approved sources at the
Contractor's responsibility. The necessary clearing and grubbing or borrow areas,
disposal and burning of debris there from, the developing of sources including any

20 – 4
 access roads for hauling and the necessary right-of-way, and the satisfactory
drainage of the borrow shall be considered as incidental items to borrow excavation.

20.6 Grading

After the completion of all backfilling operations, the Contractor shall grade the work
areas to the lines, grades and elevation shown on the plans. Finished grading shall
not be done until the installation of all water lines has been completed and tested.
The top surface after completion shall be “in level “to the adjacent existing surface.
Prior to final acceptance, all damage due to settlement shall be repaired by and at
the expense of the Contractor.

20.7 Testing Density of Soil in Place

The Engineer will make tests using the calibrated sand cone method/core cutter
method to determine the density of soil in place. If soil in place fails to meet the
specified degree of compaction the areas represented by the failing tests shall be
removed, replaced and compacted to the specified density in the manner directed by
the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Employer.

20.8 Measurement

The measurement shall be made for the actual quantity of the work done in cubic
foot. The maximum width of the trenches allowed for payment for various pipe sizes
will be as shown on the plans.

20.9 Payment

The unit rate tendered in the priced Bill of Quantities for excavation of trenches for
water supply lines shall be considered as full compensation for the work specified in
this Section and shall include all excavation, backfilling, compacting, constructing
and removing all temporary arrangements, pumping and dewatering disposal of
surplus materials, removal of soft soil from bottom of trenches, removing the surface
material and all incidentals to complete this work in all respects.

20 – 5
 Chapter - 21
PIPING WORKS – GENERAL

21.1 Scope Of Work

The section outlines the general requirements and procedures for all types of
piping works including pipe appurtenances. All the relevant provisions of this
section shall apply to the Chapter 22.

21.2 Samples And Tests

The samples of all the pipes, fittings, specials and accessories, to be
provided for the piping works, shall be approved by the Employer and same
type of material shall be used during the work. If the Employer desires to get
the material tested, this will be got done by the Contractor, at his own
expense, at the site or from a laboratory, approved by Employer, as the case
may be.

21.3 General Requirement

a. All the specified materials, piping, fittings, specials, and accessories shall
be of the high quality, free from defects, such as breaks, flaws, or other
imperfections.

b. Where required, the joists, beams, slabs and walls, through which the
pipe must pass, shall be drilled in such a way that the building will not be
structurally weakened.

c. Various materials and works, covered elsewhere in these Specifications,

where used for the execution of the piping works, shall comply with the
requirements of the relevant Sections.

21.4 Protection
The Contractor shall take care to protect the work from any damage, of
whatsoever nature, during the construction period. In case of any damage
done, to the work, the Contractor shall remove, replace, or rectify such work

21-1
 at his own cost, without any additional compensation.

21.5 Painting
Except where otherwise specified, all ferrous metal surfaces except working
parts, machinery, galvanized surfaces and other surfaces not normally
painted, shall receive one coat of rust inhibitive metal primer or red lead paint
and two coats of finish painting, with enamel paint, of approved color.

21.6 Installation Of Piping Works

21.6.1 General

a. Pipe and accessories shall be handled in such a manner as to ensure

their delivery to the desired location in sound, undamaged condition. Pipe
shall be carried into position and not dragged.

b. The interior of pipe and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign

matter before installation and shall be kept clean during laying operations
by plugging or other approved method.

c. Before installation, the pipe shall be inspected for defects. Material found
to be defective before or after laying shall be replaced with sound material.

d. Rubber gaskets that are not to be installed immediately shall be stored in a

cool dark place and protected against the direct rays of the sun.

e. Pipe cutting shall be done in a neat and workman like manner without
damage to the pipe. Unless otherwise authorized by the Employer or
recommended by the manufacturer, cutting shall be done with a
mechanical cutter of approved type.

f. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped,
and anchored, as shown or as directed.

21-2
21.6.2 Pipe Placing And Laying In Trenches

a. Pipe and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means
of derrick ropes, belt slings, or other suitable equipment. Under no
circumstances shall any of the piping materials be dropped or dumped
into the trench.

b. The full length of each section of pipe shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed,
wit recesses excavated to accommodate bell, coupling and joints.

c. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable
for the work Water shall be kept out of the trench until the materials in the
joints have hardened.

d. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe, fittings, and valves
shall be securely closed so that no trench water, earth, or other
substances will enter the pipes or fittings.

21.7 Inspection And Testing Of Piping Works

a. When a length of pipe has been laid and jointed the Employer shall be
informed so as to enable him to make an inspection of the length, and no
such length shall be covered up until the Employer has given his approval
in writing.

b. All pipes shall-be tested in the presence of the Employer after the pipes
have been laid and jointed and before any filling or concrete protection is
placed.

c. Any defective work, revealed by the tests, shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Employer, at the Contractor's expense and the tests
repeated until satisfactory result is obtained.

21-3
21.8 Pavement Restoration
The contractor shall temporarily restore paved surfaces, which have been cut
under this contract, as part of the work under the excavation items and at no
extra cost to the Employer. The permanent pavement restoration work will not
form part of the work under this contract.

21-4
 Chapter - 22
PRESSURE PIPELINES AND
APPURTENANCES

22.1 Description

a. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing all types of pressure pipelines
and appurtenances for carrying water, wastewater and rainwater, in accordance
with these specifications and to the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on
the Drawings and/or as directed by the Employer.

b. All the relevant provisions of Section 19.1 shall apply to this section.

c. Fittings, in this section, in general, shall mean to include bends, tees, wyes,
crosses, reducers/tapers and plugs/blanks.

d. Specials, in this section, in general, shall mean to include sluice or gate valve,
check valve, air relief valve and fire hydrants.

22.2 Materials Specification

The materials, covered therein, shall conform to the provisions, referred in Chapter
21 and the following requirements.

22.3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipes and Fittings

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipes shall conform to the requirements of BS 3505:1968,
for the specified class. The test and working pressures for various classes of pipes
should be as under

Class Test Pressure Working Pressure

meter (feet) meter (feet)
B 90 (300) 60 (200)
C 135 (450) 90 (300)
D 180 (600) 120 (400)
E 225 (750) 150 (500)

22.4 Check Valve

The cast iron check valves shall be of cast iron body, with swing type gunmetal

22-1
 door, conforming to the requirements of BS 5153. Ends of valves shall be suitable
for the type of pipe to which the valves will be connected.

22.5 A i r Relief Valve

The cast iron relief air valve, of specified inlet size, shall be of small orifice, large
orifice or double orifice type, as specified. Inlet of valve shall be flanged or
threaded, to suit the type of pipe, on which it is to be installed.

22.6 Pipeline Installation

22.6.1 General Requirements

Connections between different types of pipes and accessories shall be made with
transition fittings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

22.6.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipelines

a. Except where otherwise specified, Class B pipes shall be used for PVC pressure
pipelines.

b. Except where otherwise specified, PVC fittings (socket and spigot type) shall be
used, on PVC pipeline works.

c. Except where otherwise specified, PVC pipes shall be of socket and spigot type,
.to furnish push-on type joints, with rubber ring for sealing, in accordance with
recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.

[Link] Valve Chambers

In all underground installations, valves shall be housed in valve chambers. Earth fill
shall be carefully tamped around each valve chamber, to the satisfaction of
Employer.

22.7 Thrust Blocks

a. Where specified, plugs, dead ends, tees and bends, on pipelines, shall be
provided with concrete thrust backing blocks.

b. Thrust blocks shall be placed between solid ground and the fitting to be
anchored.

22-2
 c. Except where otherwise specified the concrete, for thrust backing blocks, shall
be of cast-in-situ Portland cement concrete, Class D.

d. Where no reaction backing blocks are provided at fittings, like plugs, dead ends,
tees, wyes and bends, of the pressure pipelines; all the joints, within at least a
distance of 33' (10 m) from the fittings (excluding the pipelines along main legs
of the tees or wyes), shall be able to safely withstand the maximum estimated
tension.

22.8 Flushing Of Pipelines

a. Flushing shall be carried out in all types of pressure pipelines, meant for carrying
potable water, wastewater and rainwater.

b. The Contractor shall provide all the facilities for flushing the pipeline. Water for
flushing the line shall be obtained by the Contractor from the potable water
supply system.

c. All the arrangements for getting, storing and pumping of the flushing water and
disposal of the waste flushing water, shall be subject to the approval of
Employer.

d. Flushing of line shall be done section by section. For each valved section of
pipeline, the Contractor shall make a temporary hose connection between the
water pipeline and the pipeline under test. Water shall be pumped from the
existing system to the section flushed. The pipeline shall be flushed by keeping
all the branching pipes open.

e. The pipeline shall be flushed at a minimum flushing velocity of 1 mps (3.2 fps).

f. Flushing shall be continued until clean water starts flowing through the other end.

22.9 Leakage Test

a. Leakage test shall be required to be carried out in all types of pressure pipelines,
meant for carrying potable water, wastewater and rainwater.

22-3
b. Flushing of the pipe line shall be followed by a leakage test, with all joints left
exposed. Leakage test shall be performed by keeping the end of the pipe line
closed by proper plugs, blocked to resist 150 percent of the test pressure.

c. Before the testing of pipeline, the Contractor shall ensure that concrete backing
blocks have been provided, where necessary. The test shall be performed only
after all concrete work in contact with pipe to be tested has set for a minimum, of
24 hours.

d. The pipeline shall be filled with water. While filling the pipeline, ail valves and
openings shall be kept open and water shall be filled in slowly. When the pipe
line is completely filled with water and all air expelled, water shall be pumped into
the pipe line to the specified test pressure, which shall be maintained for at least
2 hours.

e. Each and every joint shall be inspected for leaks.

f. If visible leakage takes place in any joint, then a displacement leakage test shall
be performed. A measured quantity of water shall be pumped into the pipe line
and the test pressure be maintained for two hours.

g. No piping installation will be accepted until the leakage is equal or less than the
number of imperial gallons per hour as determined by the following formula:

L = 0.00045 ND (P)0.5
Where
L = Leakage, in imperial gallons per hour N =
Number of joints D = Nominal diameter of pipe,
in inches P = Average test pressure during test,
in psi

h. in the event of the pipe line failing the leakage test, the Contractor shall locate
and repair the defective pipe, fitting or joint at his expenses.

i. After repairs of the line, the Contractor shall retest the line. The line will not be
accepted until it passes the leakage test.

22-4
 j. Except where otherwise specified or directed by the Employer, the test pressure,
for water pipelines, shall be 45 meters (150 feet).

22.10 Retesting For Pipeline In Trenches

a. Retesting for leakage shall be required to be carried out in those potable water,
wastewater and rainwater carrying pressure pipelines that are laid in trenches.

b. After the pipe trench has been backfilled, the entire line shall be subjected to a
leakage test as a whole unit.

c. The Contractor shall repair the line if it fails to pass the leakage test
requirements specified herein before. The test shall be repeated and repairs
affected until the pipe line passes the leakage test.

22-5
 Chapter – 23

VALVES, FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES

23.1 Work Included

This Section describes the requirement for fabricating, furnishing, testing, installation,
commissioning including all labour, equipment, materials and incidentals needed for
construction of all valves, fittings and appurtenances. All the valves and fittings shall
be of the class mentioned in BOQ and relevant drawings. Pipeline valves, fittings and
appurtenances will include but not be limited to the followings:

(a) Non return valves

(b) Swing type,non slam non return valves
(c) Foot valves
(d) Flexible couplings
(e) Manually operated gate valves
(f) Double acting auto air release valves
(g) Dismaintling joints
(h) Flanges
(i) Blind flanges
(j) Jointing
(k) Bends, tees, reducers, gaskets, fittings, weldolets, rungs, manhole covers etc
(l) Chambers for valve / stations, hydrants,washouts etc.
(m) Coating and lining of fittings / specials

23.2 Reference Codes and Standards

All the valves and fittings shall be of mentioned in BOQ and relevant drawings,
conforming to the relevant codes and standards as given below.

23.2.1 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless
A193 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature
Variation Service
A194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High
Temperature Service

23 – 1
23.2.2 AWWA (American Water Works Association)

C203 Coaltar Enamel Protective Coatings for Steel Water Pipe

C208 Dimensions for Steel Water Pipe Fittings
C500 Gate Valves 3 inch thru 26 inch
C504 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves
C509 Resilient Seated Gate Valves
M 11 AWWA Manual - Steel Pipe

23.2.3 ANSI (American National Standard Institute)

B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.47 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B16.104 Stainless Steel Seated Ball Valves

23.3 Submittals

Before commencing Work and prior to purchase of valves, fittings and other
equipment, the Contractor shall submit the following items for review by the
Engineer.

(a) Four sets of complete shop drawings, manufacturer's data and installation
instructions for valves and related accessories.
(b) Prior to placement of cement concrete blocking, the method of forming and
procedure for placement of concrete shall be submitted.
(c) Certificate of compliance stating that the material used and construction of
fittings, and valves conform to all requirements of the Specifications.
(d) Certificate of testing of fittings and valves including test data to show that all
tests specified have been performed and all requirements have been met.
(e) Catalogue data for all valves, accessories, and fittings showing illustrations
and schedule of parts to facilitate assembly and disassembly.
(f) Equipment manufacturer's recommended spare parts and tools list, operation
and maintenance information.
(g) Samples of materials as required by the Engineer.
(h) Joint detail drawing and joint assembly procedures.
(i) Temperature-pressure ratings of fittings, valves and piping accessories.
(j) Manufacturer's recommended specifications for transporting, handling,
loading, unloading, stock piling and storage of the products.

23 – 2
 (k) A description of the external corrosion protection coating materials being
provided for the valves, fittings and appurtenances. The submittals shall
include manufacturer's information sheets covering cleaning, priming and
coating procedures for shop application of the valves and fittings coatings and
field application of the joint coating or wraps.

23.4 Product Handling

All products, valves, fittings and appurtenances shall be transported to the Site in
manufacturer's original protective packaging and shall be unloaded singly from trucks
or lorries, unless cranes are used. All the products shall be inspected at the Site for
damage and for compliance with Specifications. Any products that are damaged or
found not to be in accordance with the Specifications shall be immediately repaired
or replaced.

All products shall be handled and stored as recommended by manufacturer to

prevent damage and deterioration.

The Contractor shall deploy handling equipment such as lifting beams, reinforced
canvas slings, protective padding, struts, cradles, etc., required to install products
without damaging hardware or linings and coatings.

Each unit shall be Site stored, stacked and handled into its position in the trench only
in such manner, and by such means, that affords total protection for it from damage.
Site stacking of valves and fittings shall be such that the valves and fittings will not be
damaged in any way. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be taken as the
minimum requirement. All Site storage areas shall be shaded.

Products shall be protected against damage and the ambient conditions both during
transport, Site storage and immediately up to the time the products are installed.
Precautions shall be taken to protect the Pipework from mechanical damage and the
effects of sunlight and heat, until the backfilling operations have been completed.

Full consideration shall be given to safety aspects when locating, planning and
constructing stacking areas.

23.5 Operation and Maintenance Manual

Three copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted for approval
of the Engineer for each type of equipment supplied under this Contract.
(a) Swing, non slam type non return valves

23 – 3
 (b) Air Valves (Double acting automatic)
(c) Sluice Valves

23.6 Products - General

All goods and products covered by these Specifications shall be procured, when
available, from local manufacturers, provided these products meet the Specifications.
Procurements of all goods and products manufactured out-of country must be
approved by the Engineeer.

The material and equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be of the
specified size, new and free from defects. Where two or more units of the same class
of equipment are required, these units shall be products of the same manufacturer.
Storage and handling of all materials shall be done such that at all times they are
protected against loss or damage.

All valves and fittings shall be of the pressure class and size as shown on the
Drawings and/or specified.

23.7 Chambers for Stations

Brick masonry chambers for valves stations of the type and size as shown on the
drawings. Shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with
this Specification.

23.8 Valves

23.8.1 General

All valves shall open by counter clockwise rotation of the valve stem. Unless
otherwise indicated in Specifications or on the Drawings, all valves shall be flanged.
Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit the easy removal of
parts for repairs. Buried Section of valves shall have same external protection as the
underground pipework with which they are to be used.

23.8.2 Non-Slam Swing Type Check Valve

The design of the check valves shall be of the swing check type. Alternatively, where
shown on the Drawings and/or defined in Specification, check valves may be non-
slam axial flow type or duo-check type.

Proper sealing has to be foreseen in order not to allow water contaminating materials
having contact with the drinking water such as oil, grease, lubricants or other.

23 – 4
No corrosive parts shall have direct contact with the drinking water. Where higher
abrasion is expected due to moving parts with direct contact to the water, such parts
shall be of stainless steel or similar (details to be approved by the Engineer) non-
corrosive materials.

Swing type check valves shall be provided with limit stops to prevent discs from
remaining in the open position and damping device to prevent the valve from
slamming. Where required, hand operator shall be provided enabling the valve to be
locked in open or closed position, with indication of position.

For pneumatic test of seat seal, "bubble tight" tolerance for the test liquid used shall
be in accordance with DIN 3230, leakage rate 3.

(a) Body

The body shall be in corrosion resisting steel, carefully designed so as to

keep pressure drops to a minimum. A wide opening on top of the body shall
permits easy inspection and maintenance.

The body-to-cap flange shall be circular. The body shall be threaded for a
renewable seat and an integral over-travel stop shall be incorporated for the
disc.

Two threaded bosses shall be incorporated to ensure correct alignment of the

hinge pin.

(b) Cap

The cap shall be in corrosion resisting steel. The connection sealing surfaces
shall be raised face or ring joint to suit the valve rating.

(c) Hinge Pin

The hinge pin shall be part of the trim, in forged stainless steel and machined
from ground bar. The hinge pin shall be centered in the body by two threaded
plugs and sealed by metallic gaskets. The pin shall be easily removable for
maintenance of the valve.

(d) Seat Ring

23 – 5
 The ring shall be in forged stainless steel and is part of the trim. Its outer
diameter shall be threaded and its bore notched to ease installation and
dismantling.
(e) Disc

The disc shall be part of the trim and in corrosion resisting steel. On the back
face there shall be a threaded spigot for attachment to the hinge arm by a nut
and split pin.

(f) Hinge

The hinge shall be in corrosion resisting steel.

(g) Seal

The seal shall be EPDM or viton subject to approval of the Engineer.

23.8.3 Double Acting Air Release Valve

Number and location of air release valves are estimated onland and will be finalized
by the Engineer during laying of the pipeline.

The air valves of the transmission line shall be of the combined air-release / air-
vacuum type. They shall be able to release small air pockets accumulating in the
pipeline as well as larger volumes to be released during line fill. Moreover they shall
be designed to allow air entering the pipeline during emptying and in case negative
pressures occur in order to prevent vacuum from forming in the pipeline. For the
mentioned service conditions two openings with different orifices shall be foreseen.

Materials used in the valves shall meet the following requirements:

Body: Cast steel ASTM A 216, Gr. WCB or equivalent, internal epoxy lining as
specified above
Float(s): Stainless steel, Grade 316
Seat: Stainless steel with Perbunan or equivalent
Screws: Stainless steel, grade 316

Easy replacement of components must be possible. Maintenance requirements shall

be reduced to a minimum. No contaminating substance may come into contact with
the drinking water (oil, grease, lubricants, etc.).

23 – 6
 Valves shall have an NPT pipe plug above the inlet flange to allow relief of internal
pressure and to drain the unit during maintenance. Size of orifice shall be confirmed
according to pipeline hydraulic requirement.

Air valve shall meet the requirements of AWWA Manual M11.

23.8.5 Sluice / Gate Valve

Sluice / Gate valve shall be metal seated, cast steel conforming to the requirement of
ANSI B16.34 Class 300. The valve seats shall be made of stainless steel, ASTM -
A240 type 316L. Both seats shall have difference of hardness around HB50. The
gate valve shall be internally epoxy lined to avoid contact of any metalic part with
potable water.

The disc shall be of the one-piece-type with parallel faces in order to have tight outlet
seating without excessive stem thrust and with minimum load on the stem head.

Seat-rings shall be interchangeable. A suitable device shall maintain a constant seat-

disc contact to assure an immediate seal. No lubrication of seating surfaces is
allowed.
The bonnet shall be equipped with a backseat for proper body and disc post
alignment when the valve is open.

Ball bearing yoke sleeves shall be provided.

The stem shall be protected by a guard against weather and entry of dirt, which shall
also function as a stem indicator.

Number and location of drain valves are estimate only. Final number and location will
be firmed up and approved by Engineer after detailed survey of the line route is
carried out by the Contractor.

23.9 Fittings

23.9.1 General

The manufacturer shall furnish all fittings and special pieces required for closures,
bends, air valves and other fittings shown on the Drawings, or as set out in the
Specifications. All openings in the pipe for fittings, manholes, taps etc. shall have the
interior and exterior surfaces coated and lined with the same materials and
construction as the pipe to which connected. The type of fittings and details covering
the design of fittings and specials shall be furnished by the manufacturer and shall be

23 – 7
 subject to approval of the Engineer. The fittings and specials shall comply in all
respects with the requirements of AWWA C208 or equivalent with modifications as
herein set forth.

23.9.2 Pipe Fittings

Welded steel pipe fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM

A540 or A 542 with dimensions conforming to AWWA C 208.
23.9.3 Bends

The bends shall be butt-welded type and shall meet requirements set out in AWWA
standard C208 or equivalent. All bends shall be factory made except where approved
otherwise by the Engineer.

23.9.4 Special Bends

Pipes that are cut, rotated and butt welded to produce special bends shall have
buttstrap of 6 x 100 mm plate welded over the joint. The welding shall be tested with
X-ray and any welds found defective shall be repaired according to API 1104.

23.9.7 Bolting Materials

Bolting materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 193, Grade B-7 for
bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 2H for nuts.

23.9.8 Gaskets

Flange Gaskets shall be 1.5 mm thick cloth-inserted rubber, and full face.

23.9.9 Steel For Special Fittings

Steel shall meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM A 542. Fabrication shall
conform to the requirements of AWWA C 200.

23.9.10 Flanges and blind flanges

Flanges and blind flanges shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B16.47 and
B16.5 Class 150 or 300 as shown on the Drawings. The flange and blind flange
material shall be ASTM A105.

23 – 8
23.9.11 Mechanical Coupling and Dismantling Joints

Mechanical couplings for pipelines shall be heavy-duty, 1 piece followers. Middle

rings shall not be less than the thickness of the steel pipe and the length shall be a
minimum of 250 mm.
23.10 Jointing

Jointing for all pipeline valves shall be flanged or mechanical joints as shown on the
Drawings and conforming to AWWA C-200.

23.11 Testing

23.11.1 General

The Manufacturer shall have available all means required, all materials, machinery,
inspection equipment to carry out testing operations in his workshop.

Water to be used shall be specified by the Manufacturer's Test Procedure which has
to be submitted to the Engineer prior to testing.

The tests shall be carried out on non lined/painted parts, the seats and the ball or
gate shall be thoroughly cleaned. No grease shall be left on those parts which
involve the seats.

All blanking devices used for the hydraulic or pneumatic test shall not be prejudicial
to the soundness of the valve ends.

Test data and pressure shall be recorded during the entire testing time.

The diagrams shall clearly show all information helping to identify them, particularly,
for each test they shall show:

(a) the nominal diameter, the rating and the identification tag of the valve
(b) the test type
(c) the duration
(d) the signature (clearly readable) of the person in charge of the test.

The Manufacturer shall test all valves in accordance with the requirements of API
Standard 6D and of this Specification.

23.11.2 Test Procedures

(a) Radiographic Testing

23 – 9
 Radiography shall be performed in accordance with API 1104, or approved
equivalent standard using exposure techniques and processing procedures
resulting in a film free of surface defects.

Prior to the commencement of radiography, the Contractor shall, in presence

of the Engineer, prepare a set of test films serving as the standard for quality
sensitivity and interpretation.

Radiography testing shall be performed prior to hydrostatic testing.

(b) Ultrasonic and Magnetic Particle Testing

Prior to commencement of testing the Contractor shall, in the presence of the

Engineer, perform calibrating tests to verify proper operation of the equipment
and the ability of the operator to detect defects.

The specimens for calibrating test shall have known defects such as cracks,
laminations and bonding defects, inadequate fusion or penetration,
inclusions, respectively machined notch and holes. These test specimens
shall have the same wall thickness as the Sections to be tested.

(c) Mechanical and Chemical Testing

All tests and testing procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable
standards.

In addition to the testing and certification requirements defined in the material

specifications, Inter-granular Corrosion Test as specified in ASTM A 743 / A
743 M test shall also be carried out.

The requirements for material certification in accordance with the standards

shall be summarized in the Contractor Test and Inspection Procedure, and
shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

23.11.3 Test Requirements

(a) Hydrostatic Test of the Body

The test, performed at the pressure corresponding to 1.5 times the valve class
or rating shall be carried out in the "open" position and with blanked ends.
No leakage or pressure drop shall be noticed during test conditions
maintained for 30 minutes. Should any defect be noticed, the Contractor shall

23 – 10
 determine their importance and upon approval of the Engineer such defects
can be repaired.

A new test shall be carried out on the body after repair, and all the previous
tests shall be performed again.
(b) Hydrostatic Test of the Seal

The test shall be carried out in the "closed" position, and one side open to the
atmosphere, dry and clean. The pressure shall correspond to the rating of the
valve class.

The test shall be carried out from both sides. During test conditions,
maintained for 30 minutes, no leakage, or pressure drops shall be noticed.
The Contractor, if possible, shall attempt to eliminate the cause, if any
leakage should be noticed; a new test will be carried out soon after.

(c) Hand and Motor Operator Verification

Each valve shall be tested on hand and motor operation under hydraulic
pressure. Such pressure shall be equal to the maximum operating pressure
corresponding to the valve class.

The valve shall be easily opened and closed without any excessive efforts
(both for the operator and for the materials).

(d) Internal Lining

The internal lining shall be tested in the same way as the epoxy lining for
Station Piping.

23.11.4 Number of Valves to be Tested

The number of valves to be tested from each lot in the presence of the Engineer shall
be as follows:

(a) DN up to 400 mm N=Q

(b) For DN larger than 400mm All valves
N= Number of valves to be tested, rounded up to the next integer
Q= Quantity of valves in the lot

23 – 11
23.12 Inspection

The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before installation.
Any products that are damaged or not in accordance with the Specifications shall be
repaired or removed from the Site and replaced, as directed by the Engineer.

23.13 Fittings Installation and Protection

Pipe fittings and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the drawings.

Heat Shrink Sleeve Coating System shall be applied to pipe fittings / specials, as
recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.

Cement mortar lining shall be applied on pipe fittings / specials as detailed in the
Specificaitons and approved by the Engineer.

Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE) coating and lining shall be applied on all, pipe fittings /
specials as per AWWA C213 or equivalent, detailed in the Specificaitons and
approved by the Engineer.

23.14 Protection of Valves and Fittings

Mating surfaces such as flange faces, shall be protected to prevent rust before
installation.

Installation of coated items shall not take place until sufficient set has occurred in the
coating to allow handling of the coating without damage. Minor coating damage
occurring during installation may be repaired in place with the approval of the
Engineer.

No backfill or concrete pour around any coated items shall take place until sufficient
curing of the coating or coating repair has occurred.
At the time of installation of the valves and fittings any damage of manufacturer's
protection finishes shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Flexible couplings and dismantling joints exposed in chambers shall be coated with
liquid epoxy or fusion bonded epoxy as recommended by the manufacturer.

23.15 Field Testing

23 – 12
 All piping and valve systems shall be field tested hydrostatically for leakage. The test
pressure shall be 1.5 times the rating of the system, determined/approved by the
Engineer.

Pressure piping systems for drain valves and wash-out assemblies shall be tested at
pressures as specified in the respective Sections.

23.16 Painting

After completion of inspections and tests and after acceptance by the Engineer, the
valves shall be painted / coated except for machined parts.

Before painting, the Contractor shall dry up all internal and external parts of the valve
and grease all parts to be lubricated.

Waterproof plugs shall be used to blank the valve inlets and external parts of the
valve inlets in order to protect the seats and the ball or gate against paint infiltration.
Only appropriate plastic end-covers shall be used, since wood will be deformed by air
humidity.

Non machined valve parts, located completely above grade, shall be protected by
two layers of anti-rust paint.

Non machined valve parts located underground and up to +0.20 m above grade shall
be protected by three epoxy-tar coats with a 200 microns thickness each.

The application shall be performed on clean, rust and grease free surfaces,
thoroughly dried up.

The subsequent coats shall be applied only when the previous one is thoroughly dry.

The paint selected by the Contractor is subject to approval by the Engineer prior to
application.
Painting and/or coating shall consider valve location (i.e. underground, aboveground
or in shaft). The Contractor shall submit specifications for painting and coating
materials and application procedure for approval.

Required colours for equipment and pipework painting shall be according to Project
Procedures, which will be advised to the Contractor prior to shop and/or Site painting.
Workmanship, colour-code and paint thickness shall be subject to approval by the
Engineer.

23 – 13
23.17 Marking

The marking of the valve shall be as follows

Each valve shall be fitted with a name plate of stainless steel that contains the
following information as a minimum in English language, unless otherwise directed
by the Engineer.

(a) Manufacturer's name and trademark

(b) Nominal size
(c) Identification number
(d) Pressure rating
(e) Weight
(f) Year of production

In addition, each valve shall have the following information stenciled on one end
using synthetic resin paint:

(g) Manufacturer's name

(h) Item number
(i) Pressure rating.

23.20 Measurement and Payment

The payment for stations (Valves & Valve stations)

(a) Measurement

Measurement shall be made, separately for each type and size shown on the
Drawings, as the number of acceptably constructed stations comprising of
chambers including valves, flowmeters, firehydrants etc. and fittings in
transmission mains and distribution mains.

(b) Payment

Payment will be done for the number of stations measured as above at the
Contract unit price for the item. The payment shall be deemed to cover cost of
excavation, backfilling, disposal of surplus material, concrete, reinforcement,
formwork, benching, pipe supports, outfall structures and soak ways, step
irons, cover slabs, ductile iron covers, stone pitching protection, restoration of
surroundings surfaces and all Work related to the item. The payment shall

23 – 14
also be deemed to cover costs of valves and fittings including bends,
reducers, pipe pieces with puddle flanges, pipes, dismentalling joints and all
other Works related to the items.

23 – 15
 Chapter - 24

Electrical Works

24.1 Scope of Work

The Work under this Section consists of supplying, installing, testing and commissioning
of all material and accessories of the complete Light fixtures,LT cables, Earthing system,
Conduits & Pipes, Switches, Sockets , and all other electrical equipment’s and systems
including pumps and all other as specified herein and/or shown on the drawing and
given in the Bill of Quantities (BOQ). The Contractor shall discuss the electrical layout
with the Engineer and coordinate at Site with other services for exact locations and
positions of the light fixtures.

24.1 LT Cables

The cable manufacturer shall be certification holder of ISO-9002 and shall be approved
by the Engineer. The main cables shall be PVC insulated, and overall PVC sheathed,
600/1000 Volt grade, designed, manufactured and certified in accordance with IEC-
60502 or other equivalent international standards.

For lighting system the cables shall be single or multicore as required with stranded
copper conductors and polyvinyl chloride heat and moisture-resistant insulation of the
thickness listed in IEC or British Standard.

The route of the cables shall be as shown on the drawing. Any change in route required
due to site conditions shall be made in relation with other service layout and with the
approval of the Engineer.

The submersible cable form motor to control panel shall be rubber insulated and
neoprene sheathed or as recommended by pump manufacturer.

24.2 Material Requirements

The cable shall be suitable for operation at conductor temperature upto 70oC under
normal conditions.
Conductors shall be of high purity copper wires and shall conform to the requirement of
the following BS or equivalent standard.

24-1
  BS 6346 PVC insulated cables for electricity supply
 BS 6746 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
 BS 6360 Conductors for insulated cables
 IEC 228 Conductors for insulated cables
 BS 6500 Insulated flexible cords

24.2.1 Cable Sizes

The sizes of LT copper conductor cables shall be as approved by the Engineer. Care
shall be taken so that voltage drop at the far end of the cable does not exceed 5% of the
nominal voltage (as the distance between source and equipment is at higher side).
Cables manufactured by the reputed firms shall be used, provided they fulfill all the
requirements of the specifications.

24.2.2 Phase Identification

All cables shall have phase identification colour on the insulation of each core. The color
code of three phase circuits shall be red, yellow and blue for phase conductors, black for
neutral conductor and green with yellow strips for earth conductor where PVC insulated
cable is installed as earth continuity conductor (ECC).

For all cables, to be supplied and installed, the Contractor shall submit complete
technical data, including conductor material, insulation material, current carrying
capacity, Voltage grade, all tests for armoured cables safety and weight for 100 meters
etc. and all such data shall be supported by test certificates, current and temperature rise
curves etc. for approval of Engineer.

24.2.3 Cable Accessories

All accessories shall be provided without additional cost for the complete cabling and
wiring system. These shall include but not be limited to items such as clamps, fixing
channels, connectors, cable joints (where necessary and as approved by the Engineer),
clips, lugs, tapes, solders, identification tags, bushes & glands etc.

24-2
24.2.4 Construction Requirements

Slack shall be left in cables for which purpose the cut lengths of cables shall allow about
3% more in the measured length between terminations (Engineer will verify the lengths
of cables). At junction boxes, ample slack shall be left to prevent straining of cable joints.
Cables, whether installed in bare ground or in pipes shall not be bent to a radius less
than that recommended by the cable manufacturers.

Upon completion of cable installation, the Contractor will be required to undertake testing
as approved by the Engineer or the concerned department and shall comply with IEE
wiring regulations. The copies of test results shall be supplied to the Engineer.

24.3 Low Voltage (LV) Distribution Boards

The Low Voltage Distribution Boards shall connect incoming supply through solar panel
inbuilt MPPT which will get supply from two sources i.e. from utility mains and from solar
system source properly interlocked for energization through one supply only. These
distribution boards shall be of steel sheets suitable for surface mounting, semi-recessed
or recessed in wall mounting. The Low Voltage Distribution Boards shall be totally
enclosed, dust and damp proof to IP32. The Low Voltage Distribution Boards shall be
complete in all respects with material and accessories, factory assembled, tested and
finished according to the Specifications and to the normal requirements.

All components shall be installed on a common mounting plate inside the enclosure and
protected from the front with screwed sheet steel front plate. The enclosure shall be
provided with rubber gasketting and a lockable hinged door with cam fastener.
The distribution board shall be supplied complete with all installation materials as
recommended by the manufacturer. The incoming and outgoing cable connections shall
be according to the wiring requirements. If required, an adapter box for accommodating
the cables and conduits may be provided. The box shall be of the same material and
finish as the distribution board.

The cabling inside the distribution board shall be suitably harnessed by means of straps
or cords. An earth bar or terminal strips shall be provided for connection of incoming and
outgoing earth conductors. The earth bar or terminals shall be permanently connected to
the body of distribution board at two points.

The LV Distribution Boards, in general, shall;

24-3
  Be suitable for indoor installation & operation
 Be suitable for operation and maintenance from front side
 Be suitable for either 400 Volt AC, three phase 4 wire and 230Volt AC single phase 2
wire, 50 Hz system
 Have all components rated for insulation class of 500V minimum for three phase and
300 Volt for single phase system
 Be designed for flush mounting of all instruments on the front
 Be provided with adequate clearance from live parts so flash overs cannot be caused
by switching, vermin, pests, etc.
 Have incoming/outgoing cable termination arrangements. The power cables shall be
directly connected to DIN rail mounted wiring terminals of appropriate ratings,
numbers and sizes for the outgoing wiring cables.
 Any outgoing circuit breaker not applicable for one system shall be declared spare in
that panel.
 Be provided with pocket inside of door for safe keeping of the as built
drawings of the switch board.
 Be provided with name plate on the front side of door.
 Have provisions for incoming and outgoing cables entry, connections and termination
arrangements from top and/ or bottom plates as per site requirements
 Have all openable doors grounded with the use of flexible copper cable/strip of at
least 4 mm2 cross-sectional areas.

24.3.1 Applicable Standards/ Codes

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this Section:

 IEC 947 Single and Triple Miniature Circuit Breaker

 IEC 947 Low Voltage Switch gear and Control gear
 BS 88 HRC Fuses
 IEC 73 Colors for indicator lights and push buttons
 IEC 446 Identification of insulated/bare conductors

24-4
24.3.2 Sheet Metal Work

The Surface mounting Low Voltage Distribution Board shall be fabricated with 4 SWG
sheet steel and the semi-recessed or recessed mounting type shall be fabricated with 16
SWG sheet steel.
The complete sheet steel metal work of the Low Voltage distribution board shall be:

 Cleaned down to bare shining metal.

 De-rusted and de-greased.
 Painted with two base coats of anti-corrosive RED oxide paint.
 Two coats of weather proof powder paint in standard colour.

24.3.3 Components

The Low Voltage Distribution Board shall be provided with components as specified in
the specifications, mentioned in the Bill of Quantities, as shown on the Tender Drawings
required for the satisfactory operation of the distribution board and of the electrical
system.
Typical component specifications are given below:

[Link] Bus Bars

The bus bars shall be made of high conductivity electrolytic copper and shall be
completely isolated and mechanically braced for the specified fault level. The phase
identification of bus bars shall be by colours applied on bus bars and these shall be red,
yellow and blue for phase and black for neutral. The earth bus bar shall be green.
The bus bars shall be triple pole and neutral and shall be of appropriate size to meet the
electrical and mechanical requirements of the system. The temperature rise shall not
exceed 45 degrees centigrade at rated current.

24.4 Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

The MCCB shall be moulded case, triple pole, rated for 500 Volt AC. The Operating
current ratings and Rupturing capacities shall be as mentioned in the relevant items of
the Bill of Quantities and as shown on the drawings. The MCCB’s shall have fixed
Magnetic Short circuit and fixed Thermal Overload protections wired to the auxiliary
contacts for annunciation purpose. However, the short circuit breaking capacities of triple
pole moulded case circuit breaks shall be more than or at least, 25 kA as per IEC 60947-
2, unless specified elsewhere. All incoming triple pole circuit breakers shall be Moulded

24-5
 Case Circuit Breakers with Icu equal to 100% of Ics. The MCCBs should be rated for
operation at 40 0C.

The Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be installed in the LV switchboards such that
the switching lever of the Main Incoming MCCB shall be accessible from the front of the
panel with the front door in closed position and the switching levers of all outgoing
MCCB’s and MCB’s are accessible through the front plate inside the switchboards for
operations. Circuit Numbers and Designation on all circuits shall be clearly marked to
facilitate connection and maintenance. Also consult BOQ for short circuit breaking
capacities

[Link] Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs)

The MCB shall be single pole 250 Volt and Triple pole 500 volts of current ratings as
shown on the drawings. These shall have fixed magnetic short circuit and fixed thermal
overload protections. The single pole and triple pole miniature circuit breakers shall have
a 6 kA short circuit breaking capacity as per International standards IEC 60898.
The Miniature Circuit Breakers shall be installed such that their switching levers are
accessible through the front plate inside the distribution boards for operations. Circuit
Numbers and Designation on all circuits shall be clearly marked to facilitate connection
and maintenance. These Circuit Breakers shall be suitable for working on lighting and
power circuits. Also consult BOQ for short circuit breaking capacities

[Link] Push Buttons

Push buttons shall be momentary make break contact type (normally open/normally
close). These shall be suitable for flush mounting. Distribution board, plastic face plate
etc. Push buttons shall have round/square head.

[Link] AC Voltmeters

AC Voltmeters shall be Digital type and shall be suitable for flush mounting on front door
of the Distribution Boards or DIN mounting within DB. The front dimensions for door
mounted meter shall be 96 mm Wide and 48 mm high.

24-6
[Link] Ammeters

AC Ampere meters shall be Digital type and shall be suitable for flush mounting on front
door of the distribution boards or DIN mounting within DB. The front dimensions for door
mounted meter shall be 96 mm wide and 48 mm high.

[Link] Voltmeter Selector Switch

The voltmeter selector switch shall be complete with front plate, grip handle, and RY-YB-
BR-OFF-RN positions. This is applicable for only three phase supply.

24.5 Lighting System, Wiring & Accessories

24.5.1 Description

All single core PVC insulated cables for the following shall be of 600/1000 volt grade
copper conductor cables:
 wiring of light circuits
 switch to point wiring
 light point to light point wiring
 wiring of circuits for 5 amps, 250 volt, 2&3 pin switch socket unit
 wiring between 5 amps, 250 volt, 2&3 pin switch socket units
 wiring of push buttons & between push buttons
 wiring of light circuits controlled by push buttons
 wiring between light circuits controlled by push buttons
 All single core PVC insulated power cables for the following shall be copper conductor
and of 600/1000 volt grade:
 wiring of circuits for 5 amps, 250 volt, 3 pin switch socket unit
 wiring of circuits for 10 amps, 250 volt, 3 pin switch socket uni
 All multicore un-armored control cables shall be copper conductor and of 300/500 volt
grade.
 For XLPE Armoured four cour cables and Twin core follow BOQ for specification
and standard BS:5467 as a base
 All multicore unarmored power cables shall be copper conductor and of 600/1000 volt
grade.
The light control switches, switch socket units, fan controllers, industrial socket units,
etc. shall be of following ratings;

24-7
 i) Light Switches rated for 5A, 250 Volt
ii) Fan dimmers rated for 100W, 250 Volt
iii) 2/3 pin rated for 5A, 250 Volt
iv) Shuttered 3 pin rated for 5/10A, 250 Volt

The locations of the switch fittings & accessories such as sockets, switches etc. are
tentatively shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall ensure the exact positions and
locations of wiring accessories in coordination with other services drawings, as per site
requirements and as directed by the Engineer.

24.5.2 Applicable Standards/Codes

The latest editions of the following standards and codes shall be applicable for the
materials specified within the scope of this Section:

 BS 6004 PVC insulated cables (non-armored) for electric power & lighting
 BS 6346 PVC insulated cables for electricity supply
 BS 5467 XLPE insulated cables armored for electricity supply
 BS 6746 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables
 BS 6360 Conductors for insulated cables
 IEC 60228 Conductors for insulated cables
 BS 6500 Insulated flexible cords
 BS 546 3 pin plugs, socket outlets and socket outlet adapter for circuits up to
250 volts
 BS 67 Two and three terminal ceiling roses
 BS 4934 Safety Requirements for electric fans and regulators.

24.5.3 Material

[Link] One Way Switches - Indoor type

Switches for controlling light points shall be single pole, rated for 10 Amps, 250 Volt AC.
The body of the switches shall be suitable for flush mounting on PVC back box/outlet
box. The switches shall have screw contacts and shall operate with snap action.

24-8
[Link] Switched Socket Outlets

Switched Socket units shall be of the following combinations and ratings:

 Shuttered 3 pin rated for 15A, 250 Volt,

 Shuttered 3 pin rated for 20A, 250 Volt,

Front face plate shall conform to the requirements stated above for switches - Indoor
type. The outlets shall be heavy duty type suitable for mounting on PVC outlet box. The
3 pin 15 amps and 3 pin 20 Amps sockets shall have shrouded live contacts and
designed such that the earth pin of plug is engaged to socket earth before mating of live
contacts.

[Link] Fan Controller

Fan Controller for fan speed regulating shall be suitable for Ceiling fans, rated for 10
Amps, 250 Volt AC. The body of the fan Controller shall be suitable for flush mounting on
PVC back box/ outlet box. The fan Controller shall have ON/OFF switch that shall
operate with click action.

[Link] Outlet Box

The outlet boxes for installation of switches, Dimmers and socket outlets shall be of PVC
having appropriate dimensions. The box shall have suitable arrangement for receiving
the conduit.

24.6 Conduits & Pipes

24.6.1 Description

The route of conduit and pipes should be as per site requirements, specifications and
as directed by the Engineer.

24.6.2 Applicable Standard/Codes

Latest editions of the following standards/codes shall be applicable for the materials in
scope of this Section:
 BS 6099 PVC conduits and accessories.
 BS 3595 PVC pipes & accessories.

24-9
  BS 4346 Cement Solvent for jointing

24.6.3 Material

[Link] PVC Conduits and Accessories

The heavy gauge PVC conduits and accessories conforming to BS6099 shall be
generally used. The PVC conduits and accessories of light gauge may be used on the
project with the concurrence of the Engineer.
The PVC bends, sockets, elbows, couplings, etc. shall conform to the same
specifications as for the conduits. The PVC bends shall have enlarged ends to receive
conduit without any reduction in the internal diameter at joint. Manufactured smooth
bends shall be used where conduit changes direction. Bending of conduits by heating or
otherwise will not be allowed in any situation. The use of sharp 90-degree bends and
tees will not be allowed for concealed wiring.

The round PVC junction boxes for ceiling light or fan points shall have minimum
dimensions of 63-mm diameter and depth. The junction boxes for wall light points shall
have minimum dimensions of 63-mm diameter and 38 mm deep. Round junction boxes
shall be provided with one piece PVC cover plate fixed to the box by means of brass
screws.

24.7 Earthing Protection

24.7.1 Description

The earthing system consists of earth electrodes, earthing leads, earth connecting
points, earth continuity conductors and all accessories necessary for the satisfactory
operation of the associated electrical system.

24.7.2 Applicable Standards/Codes

The latest editions of following standards/codes shall be applicable for the materials in
scope of this section:-
 BS 951 Earthing Clamps
 CP 1013 Earthing
 BS 2874 Nuts, bolts, washers, screws & rivets fixing for use on Copper
 BS 1433 Hard drawn bare copper conductor for earthing
 BS 6346 PVC insulated cables

24-10
 24.7.3 Material

[Link] Earth Electrode (Bore Type)

The earth electrode shall comprise of Tinned copper earth spike having dimension as
show in the drawing. At the top of the pipe, a clamp for bolted connections shall be
provided suitable for connection to the down conductor.
The earth electrode/spike shall be placed after bore at site. The bore shall be made up to
permanent water level of 80 feet whichever is less. The earth electrode shall be
connected to the earthing conductor of suitable size as shown in the drawings/BOQ. The
earthing conductors shall be laid in a perforated GI pipe of suitable size.
In case the soil conditions at site permit, the earth electrodes may be installed by
hammering the electrode in soil, until the top of the rod is about 12 inches below the
proposed ground level. If hammering down is not possible due to site conditions, a pit
shall be first excavated in bare ground up to the required depth and electrode shall be
installed upright in the pit. The excavated pit shall be backfilled in layers of 20 inches,
each layer tamped and compacted. At the ground level an inspection chamber of cement
concrete shall be constructed having dimensions as shown on the Drawings. The
inspection chamber shall have a cover supported on angle iron frame. The cover shall
be approved by the Engineer and shall finish flush with the ground level. The earthing
system shall be installed as per BOQ and drawings of the same.

[Link] Earthing Lead

The earthing lead shall connect the earth electrode to earth connecting point and on the
metallic part. It shall be round hard drawn bare electrolytic copper of size as shown on
the Drawings. The earth continuity conductor of sizes shown on the drawing shall be
installed all along the cable runs and connected to the earthing bar/terminals provided in
equipment. The body of all switchboards shall also be connected to earth by specified
size of ECC. All other metal work shall also be connected to earth by specified size of
ECC.

At any joint or terminations, the ECC shall be connected using proper accessories. No
connection shall be made by twisting of earth conductors.

24-11
[Link] Earth Continuity Conductor

Earth continuity conductor (ECC) shall be hard drawn bare copper wire or single core
PVC insulated copper conductor cable of sizes indicated on the Drawings. The earth
continuity conductor of sizes shown on the drawing shall be installed all along the cable
runs and connected to the earthing bar/terminals provided in equipment. The body of all
switchboards shall also be connected to earth by specified size of ECC. All other metal
work shall also be connected to earth by specified size of ECC.
At any joint or terminations, the ECC shall be connected using proper accessories. No
connection shall be made by twisting of earth conductors.

24.7.4 Earth Connecting Point

Earth connecting points shall comprise tinned copper bar, rectangular in shape, having
dimensions of 350 x 50 x 6 mm. At least, six terminals for connection shall be arranged
on the bar, which can be increased or decreased as required by the engineer.
The terminals shall have brass or tinned copper bolts, nuts and washers for protection
against corrosion. Two holes shall be provided off centre of the copper bar for fixing to
the wall by means of 10 mm dia. nut and bolt/ rawal bolt and shall be insulated by means
of rubber gaskets/washers/ insulators.
The earth connecting point shall be installed at locations shown on the drawings. It shall
be fixed on wall surface by means of brass screws.

24.8 Light Fixtures

24.8.1 Description

The description of light fixtures and all relevant materials are given in these
specifications, stated in the bill of quantities and shown on the Tender drawings.
The determination of quality of the light fixture is based on construction material, the
specific shapes of the enclosure & louver, color, finish, etc. The determination of quality
of the light output of the light fixture is based on the certified photo-metric data covering
the coefficient of utilization, light distribution curves, luminous flux output in lumens of the
lamps, color temperature of the lamps, etc.

The types of the light fixtures with manufacturer’s catalogue references are given in
details on the drawing and mentioned in the relevant items of the bills of quantities.
LEDs type energy saving lamps properly sized and justified by lighting calculations
submitted by the Contractor shall be used for all indoor and outdoor areas. Lamps shall

24-12
 be used in weather proof enclosures i.e for indoor areas it will be IP 32 and for outdoor
areas it will be at least IP 55 but outdoor LED for IPS which are 50 watts should be IP65.
All light fixtures shall be finished in standard color schemes as mentioned in the
manufacturer's catalogue for respective fixtures, unless specifically stated in the
specifications, drawings or bill of quantities or directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit samples of each and every type and model number of light
fixtures specified for approval of the Engineer.

24.8.2 Applicable Standards/Codes

The latest editions of the standards/codes from IEC and British Standards and all other
standards followed by PHED as a base shall be applicable to the material specified
within the scope of this section.

24.8.3 Material

[Link] LEDs Type Light Fixtures

Good quality LEDs type lamps of different ratings suitable as per lighting calculations
shall be acceptable and preferred over the conventional lamps mentioned above. All
these LEDs lamps shall be screw type.

The design of light fixture for recess mounting shall be coordinated with the design of
false ceiling prior to commencement of manufacture. Shop drawings shall be submitted
for approval of Engineer.

24.9 Pumping Units

24.9.1 Work Included

This Sub-section covers the general requirements for designing, manufacturing, shop
testing, commissioning, furnishing, installing, painting, placing in satisfactory operating
conditions in the location, testing and quantities shown on the Drawings with the
specified duties and warranty of devices, appurtenances for the satisfactory operation of
the pumping equipment.

24-13
 24.9.2 Reference Standards

 ASTM-A 27 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General

Application
 ASTM-A 240 Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel
Plates
 ASTM-A 276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
 ASTM-A 105 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping
Applications
 ASTM-A 743 Castings, Iron - Chromium, Iron – Chromium - Nickel, Corrosion
Resistant, for General Application
 ASTM-A 193 Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for High Temperature or High
Pressure Service
 ASTM-A 194 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or High Temperature Service
 ASTM-A 570 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled
 ASTM-D 1785 Specification for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic pipe, Schedule 40, 80
and 120
 ASTM-D 2564 Specification for solvent cements for polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Plastic
piping systems
 HI - E 35.01 Hydraulic Institutes - Standard for Centrifugal Pumps

[Link] Submittals
 Shop drawings: Indicate general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,
clearances and methods of assembly.
 Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature including general assembly,
 Proposed system operation description.
 Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Including handling, storage and start-up
instructions for pumping system.
 Manufacturers recommended spare parts and tools list.
 Manufacturer's Certificate: Certifying that pumps meet or exceed specified
 Requirements at specified operating conditions.
 Field Reports: Submit as directed by the Engineer.

24-14
[Link] Materials

 All the pumps parts, unless otherwise specified shall be of standard materials of the
manufacturer, suitable for the specified operating conditions and contents of the feed
water/media attached hereof and as per specification mentioned in the relevant
section and duly approved by Client and the Engineer.
 All materials shall be new and of first-class quality, suitable for the purpose, free from
defects and imperfections.
 Material for pump and valve parts coming in contact with pumped water shall be
selected such as no part renders any harmful effect to the water for human
consumption.
 Materials of pump and valve parts shall be compatible with the corrosive and / or
abrasive properties of the pumped water.
 All materials or parts used in the equipment shall be tested, unless otherwise directed
in conformity with applicable methods prescribed by the ASTM for mechanical,
fracture, corrosion, fatigue, erosion, effect of temperature, metallography and
chemical analysis, or such other organization as may be specifically required, and
generally in accordance with the best commercial methods. When requested, tests
shall be made in the presence of the Engineer; stocked material may be used,
provided evidence is furnished to show that such material meets the requirements as
specified herein.

24-15
 Chapter – 25

MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

25.1 Scope

The Work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all
plants, labour, equipment and materials and of performing all operations in
connection with the miscellaneous items in strict accordance with this Section of the
specifications and the applicable drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

25.2 Materials and Construction

25.2.1 Steel Work

Structural steel Work shall comply in all respects with B.S. 44. Steel for rolled
Sections shall comply in all respects with B.S.16. Welding of steel Work shall comply
with B.S. 1856. High strength bolted connection shall comply with B.S. 324.

25.2.2 Steel Ladder/Stairs

Steel access ladders shall comply with B.S. 4211 unless otherwise stated. Stringers
shall be rectangular Section measuring 2-1/2 inches by ½ inches spaced 15 inches
apart and rungs shall be ¾ inch diameter spaced at 12 inches centre. Hoops shall be
of circular pattern and shall be bolted to the stringers so as to be removable, ladders
shall be painted with black enamel paint of an approved make.

Steel stairs shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

25.2.3 Brick Pavement

Bricks for pavement in the water Works areas shall comply with the requirements of
Section-3 of the technical specifications. Excavation and compacted backfill shall be
in accordance with the requirements of Section-1 of the Technical Specifications.
Bricks joints shall be sand grouted. Pavement shall be constructed in accordance
with the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

25.2.4 Level Indicator

Level indicators shall be installed in accordance with the applicable drawings and as
directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for manufacturing and
fixing of all components involved to make it a complete working unit.

25 – 1
25.2.5 Lightening Arrester

Lightening Arrester including all associated copper strip shall be installed strictly in
accordance with the applicable drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall be responsible for providing and fixing all copper strips and other
components to make it a complete working unit.

25.2.7 Rungs

Malleable cast iron rungs of sizes as shown on the Drawings shall be provided.

25.2.8 Manhole Cover

Manhole covers shall be of concrete class ‘A’ with reinforcement and frame as shown
in the drawing.

25.2.9 Vents

Vents shall be of cast iron and shall conform to ISO, BSS and ASTM Standards. The
Contractor shall supply and install vents of type as shown on the Drawing or as
directed by the Engineer for circulation of air through tanks after the roofs have been
completed. Vents shall be fitted with cowl or wire mesh balloon.

25.2.12 Toilet Fixtures and Plumbing Works

Toilet fixtures and plumbing Works as approved by the Engineer shall be fixed
according to standard drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for proper fixing
of the plumbing Works strictly in accordance with engineering practice. This Work
include complete items to make the system functional.

25.2.13 Electric Fans

Contractor shall provide and fix Electric Fan of the approved make and brand. The
fan shall be properly fixed including all necessary accessories. The Work shall
include fixing and making the working functional.

25.2.14 Operator’s Room, Pump House and Boundary Wall

(a) General
The Work shall consist of furnishing all plant, labour equipment, appliances
and materials and in performing all operations in connection with construction
of Operator’s Room, pump house, boundary wall including plumbing and
internal electrification in accordance with these specifications and in
reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions shown in
the drawings or directed by the Engineer.

25 – 2
 (b) Material

Building for Operator’s quarter, pump house, boundary wall and gates shall
be construction in accordance with the relevant specifications and drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.

25.2.15 Septic Tank

The Work shall consist of furnishing all plant, labour equipment, appliances and
materials and in performing all operations in connection with construction of Septic
Tank including excavation, brick/block Work, plastering, concreting, inlet and outlet
pipes, manhole covers etc. in accordance with these specifications in the relevant
Sections and in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades and dimensions
shown in the drawings or directed by the Engineer.

25.3 Measurement and Payment

25.3.1 Miscellaneous Items

Measurement and payment for miscellaneous items will be made in accordance with
the provision of this clause specified hereinafter.

[Link] Method of Measurement

Rolled Section Steel will be measured by the length in linear ft. for the Work
satisfactorily completed as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Steel ladder//stairs will be measured by the length in linear ft. for the Work
satisfactorily completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the engineer.

Brick pavement will be measured by the area in square ft. for the Work satisfactorily
completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

Level indicators shall be measured by the number for the Work satisfactorily
completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

Lightening Arrester shall be measured by the number for the Work satisfactorily
completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

Malleable cast iron rungs shall be measured by the number for the Work satisfactorily
completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

25 – 3
 Manhole covers shall be measured by the number for the Work satisfactorily
completed as shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

Air vents shall be measured by the number for the Work satisfactorily completed as
shown on the Drawing or as directed by the Engineer.

All plumbing fixtures along with plumbing Works will be made as stated in the BOQ.

Measurement will be made for each item of fan and accessories all acceptably
supplied and installed by the Contractor as a complete unit.

Septic Tank along with items as shown in the drawing shall be measured as per units
stated in the BOQ for the Work satisfactorily completed as shown on the Drawing or
as directed by the Engineer.

[Link] Basis of Payment

Payment will be made in accordance with the unit prices in the Bill of Quantities of
the various items in accordance with the specifications and shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour and for performing
all operations necessary to complete the Work.

Unit of
Description
Measurement
(i) Provide, fix and paint rolled steel Section Lft.
Provide and fix M.S. ladder including Painting as per
(ii) Lft.
drawings and specifications
Provide and lay brick pavement as shown on drawings
(iii) Sft.
or as directed by the Engineer
Provide and fix level indicator complete in all respects
(iv) as per drawings and specifications or as directed by the No.
Engineer
Provide and fix lightening arrester, copper earth strips
(v) and all other accessories complete in all respects as per No.
drawings or as approved by the Engineer
(vi) Clean, test and disinfect overhead water tank No.
Provide and fix mealable cast iron rungs as shown on
(vii) No.
drawings or as directed by the Engineer
Provide and fix Manhole covers of sizes as shown on
(viii) No.
drawings or as directed by the Engineer
Provide and fix 6” dia Air vent on roof of overhead tank
(ix) No.
as per drawings or as directed by the Engineer

25 – 4
 Unit of
Description
Measurement
Provide and fix all toilet fixtures along with plumbing
Works complete with all accessories fittings, manhole Itemwise BOQ
(x)
chambers, gully traps, as shown in drawings or as Provided
directed by the Engineer
(xi) Provide and install exhaust fans accessories No.
Construction of Operators quarters complete in all Itemwise BOQ
(xii)
respects as per drawings and specifications provided
Itemwise all
respect as per
(xiii) Construction of septic tank complete in specifications
drawings and
BOQ provided

25 – 5
 Chapter – 26

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

26.1 Scope

This Work shall consist of the removal to a depth as designated, and disposal of all
trees, stumps, bushes, roots, vegetation, logs, rubbish and other objectionable
materials as and when required by the Engineer. It shall also include the removal and
disposal of structures that obtrude, encroach upon or otherwise obstruct the Work
except when otherwise provided for on the Drawings.

26.2 Construction Requirements

26.2.1 Grubbing

In roadway cut areas all stumps and roots larger than 3 inches in diameter shall be
removed to a depth of not less than 20 inches below the subgrade. In areas under
roadway embankment from which unsuitable materials are to be removed or which
are designated to be compacted all stumps and roots larger than 3 inch in diameter
shall be removed to a depth of at least 30 inch below the finished ground surface.

26.2.2 Clearing

Such individual trees as the Engineer may designate and mark in white paint shall be
left standing and uninjured. In order to minimize damage to trees that are to be left
standing, trees shall be felled towards the centre of the areas being cleared if so
required by the Engineer.

When necessary to prevent injury to structures or other trees or property or to

minimize danger to traffic, trees shall be cut in Sections from the top downwards.

All timber obtained as a result of clearing shall be handed over to the client. All bush,
stumps, roots, rotten wood and other refuse from the clearing and grubbing
operations shall be burnt or complete removed from within the right of way.

When the area on which an embankment is to be placed has been cleared the
Engineer may order the surface of the existing ground to be scarified so that the
filling material will bind into the original ground. The cost of such Work, if so required
shall be include in other items of Work.

26 – 1
 Before the bottom layer of the embankment is made, the Contractor will grub up and
remove, without extra payment, any vegetation that may in the meantime have grown
on the surface previously cleared and grubbed.

26.2.3 Protection and Restoration

The Contractor shall prevent damage to all pipes, conduits, wires, cables or
structures above or below ground. No land monuments, property makers, or official
datum points shall be damaged or removed until the Employer / Engineer has
witnessed or otherwise referenced new locations and approved their removal. The
Contractor shall so control his operations as to prevent damage to trees and shrubs,
which are to be preserved. Protection may include fences and boards lashed to trees
to prevent damage from blasting or machine operations. The Contractor shall
carefully cut off all branches of trees hanging within 16.0 ft. above any part of the
roadway or which have been broken or injured during construction. Where soil over
the roots of trees to be preserved has become compacted it shall be restored by
proper cultivation to a condition to permit adequate aeration of the soil.

26.3 Measurement and Payment

26.3.1 Method of Measurement

Clearing and grubbing will be measured for payment only on areas so designated in
writing by the Engineer or shown on the Drawings. The quantity to be paid for shall
be the number of 100 square feet satisfactorily cleared and grubbed.

Clearing and grubbing carried out by the Contractor in cuts and borrow pits shall not
be measured for direct payment.

Tree (a woody perennial plant having a main stem larger than 3” dia and one feet or
more above in ground) removed shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Rate per
number for tree removal as provided in the B.O.Q. The payment shall be full
compensation for felling, removing, transporting and handing over of the trees to the
concerned authority/department. Trees with diameter less than 6” shall not be
considered for payment.

26.3.2 Basis of Payment

The quantities determined as provided above will be paid for at the Contract Unit
Rate for the pay item mentioned below and shown in the Bill of Quantities, which

26 – 2
price and payment shall be full compensation for all the costs involved in the proper
completion of the Work prescribed in this item.

Pay Item Unit of

Description
No. Measurement
(i) Clearing and Grubbing 100 Sft.
(ii) Removal of Trees Each

26 – 3
 Chapter - 27
PUMPS

27.1 DESCRIPTION

This work shall consist of furnishing and installing pumps of all types for
pumping water, rainwater, wastewater and sludge, complete with motor
and starter & .other motor controls (where included), in accordance with
these specifications and/to the layouts and details, shown on the
Drawings and/or as directed by the Employer.

27.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a. Prior to purchase, the Contractor shall submit following information, for the
pump-motor sets, for subsequent approval by the Employer: it

i. Information on performance characteristics

ii. Construction and other technical details
iii. Overall dimensions and operating weight
iv. Manufacturers performance guarantee certificate

b. The pump shall be selected, for quiet operation, so that pump noise is not
audible outside the pump room.

c. The pumps, installed for a system, should be suitable for parallel

operation in all respects. The pumps should be so selected that these are
not overloaded when only one pump is operating and increased water
flow is to be handled due to reduced system head.

d. The Contractor shall supply approved anti-vibration foundation material,

for isolating the pump foundations from the building structure.

e. Except where otherwise specified, the pumps shall be furnished with

pressure gauges on suction and discharge sides.

27-1
27.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

a. The Contractor shall carefully clean, assemble, align and install the
pumps in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Care
shall be taken that all connections are clean and free from burrs and
foreign material so as to ensure tight fit and proper alignment.

b. A suitable thread lubricant shall be used on all threaded connection to

facilitate disassembly for maintenance.

c. In order to ensure the accurate and proper alignment of the pump, anchor
bolts shall be set only, after the pump has been aligned. Anchor bolts
holes may be formed in the concrete platform as the concrete is placed or
may be drilled in the concrete after the concrete has set thoroughly.

27.4 MOTORS AND MOTORS CONTROL

a. Except where otherwise specified, the pumps shall be direct driven by a

motor

b. The rated output, of the motors, shall be established by the pump

manufacturer, for the given pump characteristics.

27.5 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL TESTS

The Contractor shall perform all the following general quality control tests and
submit ail test results, thereof, in triplicate, to the Employer:

27.5.1 Standard Running Test

The pump shall be operated from zero capacity to the maximum capacity,
shown on the performance curve. Readings shall be taken at a minimum of 5
capacity points, including one point within 5% of the design capacity
specified. The pump shall be operated at a speed within 5% of the design
speed.

27-2
27.5.2 Capacity Measurement Test
The discharge capacity of the pump shall be measured by means of a
standard venturi tube, nozzle, orifice plate or pitot tube traverse.

27.5.3 Head Measurement Test

For head measurement, in excess of 25 feet calibrated bourdon or other
gauges with equivalent accuracy and reliability shall be used. All gauges
shall be calibrated before and after each series of tests.

27.5.4 Power Input Test

The power input to the pump shall be determined with vertical dynamometer
or a calibrated electric motor. The torque of the dynamometer shall be
measured by means of a calibrated strain gauge or other device of equivalent
accuracy.

27.5.5 Measurement of Speed

The rotating speed of the pump shall be obtained by a hand counter,
electronic computer, or a counting slip.

27.5.6 Hydrostatic Test

A standard hydrostatic test on the pump impeller housing shall be made at
1.5 times the shutoff head, developed by the pump, or at twice the rated
head, whichever is greater.

27-3